PERKINS  LIBRARY 

Duke    University 
Karc  Doolca 

i'^; 


(?;  a.'^'*^ 


/.J/Z/l''^  JtlX,^,  . 


^.^/oJkf  /tt^  ^  '"^N 


THE 


TROOPER'S  MANUAL: 


OR, 

TACTICS 


FOR 


igljt  Dragaons  mxH  ||l0iintc5)  fxifltnitn. 


'  COMPILED,  ABRIDGED  AND  ARRANGED 


BY 


Col.  J.  LUCIUS  DAVIS, 

Graduate  of  the  United  States  Military  Academy,  West  Point;  for- 
merly an  Officer  of  the  United  States  Army ;  and  for  many 
years  commander  and  instructor  of  Volunteer  Cavalry. 


9CbirI»  =ElJition. 


RICHMOND,  Va. 

PUBLISHED  BY  A.  MORHIS. 

1862. 


Entered  according  to  act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1861, 

By  a.  morris, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Confed- 
erate States  for  the  Eastern  District  of  Virginia. 

CHAS.  H.  WYNNB,  PRIKTER. 


PREFACE. 


No  military  work  is  in  more  demand  at  present 
than  a  cheap,  plain,  brief  compendium  of  Cavalry 
Tactics. 

All  books  of  this  description,  heretofore  pnb- 
lished,  are  too  large  and  costly  to  serve  as  manuals 
for  the  Trooper.  They  abound,  too,  in  matter  of 
no  interest,  at  least,  to  Mounted  Volunteers. 

As  a  general  rule,  what  have  the  latter  to  do 
with  the  tactics  of  the  riding-house?  or  the  drill 
of  Lancers,  Hussars,  Cuirassiers,  or  Caribiniers? 

The  revolver-manual,  adopted  in  this  work,  is 
the  admirable  one  of  Capt.  Bell,  U.  S.  Cavalry. 
It  is  superseding  the  defective  one  given  in  every 
Cavalry  hand-book  which  has  preceded  this.  The 
demand  for  this  work  being  immediate,  the  Com- 
piler has  ventured  to  avail  himself  of  that  manual 
for  the  revolver,  without  having  had  time  or  oppor- 
tunity to  obtain  the  author's  permission. 


IV  PREFACE. 

The  Mounted  Rifle  drill  offered  is  the  authorized 
one  of  the  United  States  service,  prepared  by  Capt- 
Maury  of  the  Mounted  Rifles,  under  the  orders  of 
the  War  Department.  * 

The  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War  establishes 
this  drill,  with  its  single  rank  formation  for  all 
mounted  troops,  the  double  rank  system  being  re- 
tained for  garrison  service  only. 

In  fact,  this  formation,  (the  single  rank,)  re* 
commended  by  Capt.  (now  General)  McClellan 
of  the  Military  Commission  to  Europe,  and  ap- 
proved by  our  best  Cavalry  commanders,  is  the 
only  one  suited  to  actual  service  in  any  portion  of 
the  American  Continent. 

But  as  two  ranks  answer  for  garrison  service  in 
peace,  for  reviews,  parades,  and  manoeuvres  in  con- 
tracted limits,  both  the  single  and  the  two  rank 
drills  are  given  in  this  book — only  one,  viz :  the 
two  rank  formation,  being  found  in  other  works. 

The  originals  have  been  faithfully  copied,  ex- 
cept where  error  demanded  correction,  not  more 
than  fifty  pages  (including  notes,  remarks,  and 
Glossary,)  having  been  introduced  by  the  Compiler, 
as  demanded  by  recent  improvements  in  arras  and 
otherwise. 

General  and  Field  Officers  and  Superintendents 


PREFACE.  V 

of  Riding  Schools  will  require  more  extended  trea- 
tises, embracing  the  whole  subject  of  I^quitation; 
but  the  Compiler  hopes  that  this  little  volume  pro- 
vides all  necessary  instruction  for  every  grade,  from 
the  Trooper  to  the  Commander  of   the  Squadron. 

The  Compiler. 
Richmond,  Va.,  April,  1861.  • 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


,  Cavalry  is  a  general  term,  embracing,  in  its 
modern  and  more  extended  sense,  all  classes  of 
mounted  soldiery. 

Dragoons  were  originally  armed  with  muskets, 
and  were  trained  equally  for  Cavalry  and  Infantry 
service. 

In  the  United  States  service.  Cavalry  and  Dra- 
goons are  armed  and  drilled  alike,  the  distinction 
being  merely  nominal. 

Mounted  Rifles  differ  from  other  Cavalry  in 
arms,  manoeuvres,  and  in  habitually  dismounting 
for  the  combat,  their  horses  being  chiefly  the 
means  of  rapid  locomotion. 

All  American  Cavalry  should  be  well  trained 
on  foot  in  the  Light  Infantry  exercises:  should 
carry  a  light  rifle,  (as  well  as  sabre  and  pistol,) 
and  use  the  fire-arms  mostly  on  foot. 

For  actual  service,  the  regular  Cavalry  saddle 
and  equipments  are  necessary.     The  Mexican  sad- 


Vlll  INTRODUCTORY   REMARKS. 

die,  however,  is  generally  preferred  by  the  Mounted 
Kangers  of  the  Western  frontier. 

Fancy  hats,  with  plumes,  of  ostrich  or  other 
feathers,  are  only  suitable  on  parades  and  reviews, 
but,  on  campaign,  they  are  a  useless  incumbrance. 
,A  conical  f .rage-cap,  with  water-proof  cover 
extending,  when  unrolled,  to  the  shoulders;  a 
water-proof  cape  reaching  from  the  neck  to  the 
hips;  one  close-bodied  csat,  one  round  jacket,  one 
over-coat,  and  two  pairs  of  pants,  (the  four  latter 
of  dark-blue  or  gray  cloth,)  together  with  under- 
garments and  short-top  boots,  constitute  the  proper 
apparel  for  all  mounted  troops. 

The  Cavalry  Tactics,  from  the  drill  of  the 
Trooper  to  that  of  the  Squadron,  both  inclusive, 
should  be  acquired  by  all  Cavalry  Corps.  The  pe- 
culiar organization  and  manoeuvres  of  the  Mounted 
Rifles  will  be  confined  to  that  class  of  troops;  but 
they,  too,  should  be  instructed  in  the  general  prin- 
ciples, laid  down  in  the  following  pages,  for  all 
Cavalry  exercises,  adding  what  appertains  to  their 
own  branch  of  the  service. 

Volunteers,  who  are  generally  expert  horsemen, 
sometimes  enter  with  reluctance  into  the  minutiae 
of  mounting,  dismounting,  the  prescribed  manage- 
ment of  the  arms  and   legs,  and  the  elementary 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  ix 

rules  of  equitation ;  but  every  item  should  be 
practised  in  detail  until  thoroughly  understood ;  as 
they  become  more  familiar  with  them,  they  will 
more  fully  appreciate  their  importance. 

A  troop-horse,  when  thoroughly  trained,  can  be 
guided  by  the  arms  and  legs  alone,  thus  allowing 
the  Trooper  the  use  of  both  hands,  if  necessary  in 
combat. 

The  following  rules  are  presented  substantially 
as  laid  down  in  the  prescribed  tactics,  the  Compiler 
having  no  authority  to  make  any  important  altera- 
tions in  the  authorized  text  books. 


CAVALRY  TACTICS. 


PART  FIRST. 

•  

grill  of  {|)e  Cr-ffoptr. 

For  the  first  lessons,  it  is  best  to  cbarge  each  In- 
Btrncror  with  a  verij  small  squad  of  recruits^  having 
between  them  intervals  of  one  yard. 

But  it  is  soinetiines  necessary,  especially  with 
voluutoers,  for  one  single  Instructor  to  take  charge 
of  a  platoon,  or  even  a  squadron.  In  this  cnse, 
they  may  be  arranged  in  one  rank,  (which  is  bes%) 
or  in  two  ranks  along  the  sides  of  a  square;  all 
facing  inwards  toward  the  Instructor,  who  will  exe- 
cute in  person  all  the  niotioA,  or  will  cause  them 
to  be  executed  by  a  well-drilled  trqoper,  stationed 
in  the  centre. 

Having  acquired  thoroughly  the  motions  of 
mounting  and  dismounting,  the  whole  may  be  formed 
into  a  platoon  or  squadron,  according  to  numbers 
present.  When  two  ranks  are  used,  they  should 
be  six  yards  distant,  measured  from  head  to  tail. 


12  THE   TROOPER. 


To  conduct  horses  to  the  drill  ground. 

The  trooper  conducts  his  horse  to  the  ground, 
the  reins  passed  over  the  neck,  and  their  extremity 
engaged  in  the  left  cloak-strap.*  He  holds  the 
reins  with  the  right  hand  at  six  inches  from  the 
mouth  of  the  horse,  the  nails  under,  the  hand  ele- 
vated and  firm,  to  prevent  the  horse  from  jumping. 

When  the  trooper  is  under  arrns,  he  has  the  sabre 
hooked  up. 

The  carbine  is  passed  over  the  rnjlit  shoulder j  the 
left  hand  hanging  by  the  side. 

Having  arrived  on  the  ground,  the  sabre  is 
unhooked.  '  • 

Position  of  the  trooper  before  mounting. 

The  trooper  places  himself  on  the  left  side  of  the 
horse,  abreast  of  the  nether  jaw  ;  he  holds  the  reins 
with  the  right  hand  at  six  inches  from  the  mouth 
of  the  horse,  the  nails  downward. 

The  trooper  has  his  heels  upon  the  same  line  and 
as  near  together  as  his  conformation  will  permit, 
the  feet  at  little  less  than  a  right  angle,  and  equally 
turned  out;  the  kne# straight  without  being  stiff, 
the  body  perpendicular  upon  the  haunches,  and 
slightly  inclined  forward;  the  left  hand  hanging  at 
the  side,  the  palm  a  little  turned  out,  the  little 
finger  along  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons;  the  head 


*  In  the  absence  of  cloak -straps,  any  other  mode  of  attaching  the 
reins  to  the  pommel  may  auawcr. 


S 


THE   TROOPER.  13 

erect;  the  chin  drawn  in,  but  without  constraint; 
the  eyp8  fixed  to  the  front. 

When  the  trooper  is  under  armSf  he  has  tJie  left 
hand  over  the  sabre. 

*  To  mount.* 

The  instructor  commands: 

Prepare  to  mount. 
1  timef  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  prepare  to  mount,  Nos.  1 
and  3  of  each  rank  move  six  paces  to  the  front, 
stepping  off  with  the  left  foot,  keeping  opposite 
their  intervals,  and  regulating  by  the  right. 

Place  the  rii^ht  foot  three  inches  in  rear  of  the 
left;  make  a  face  and  a  half  to  the  right  on  both 
heels;  let  go  the  right  rein;  slip  the  right  hand 
along  the  left  rein ;  take  two  steps,  stepping  off 
with  the  right  foot,  and  face  to  the  left  upon  the 
point  of  the  left  foot,  the  right  side  towards  the 
flank  of  the  horse;  carry  back  the  right  heel  three 
inches  in  rear  of  the  left;  the  right  hand  seizing 
the  end  of  the  reins  is  placed  upon  the  cantle  of 
the  saddle. 

2.  Place  a  third  of  the  left  foot  in  the  stirrup, 
supporting  it  against  the  fore-arm  of  the  horse  ;  rest 
upon  the  point  of  the  right  foot,  and  seize  with  the 


♦The  troopers  bein^  aligned  with  the  tallest  on  the  right,  the 
orderly  serireant,  (or  Benior  aon  commis»iotie4  officer)  calls  the  rol 
before  mouating. 


• 


14  THE   TROOPER. 

left  hand  over  the  reins  a  lock  of  the  m.ine  as  far 
forward  as  possible,  the  extremity  of  the  lock  pass- 
ing out  of  the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  little  finder. 

Mount. 
1  timcy  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  mount,  ppring  from  the 
right  fo'it,  holding  firmly  to  the  mane,  at  the  Fame 
tiijie  pressing  upon  the  cantle  to  prevent  the  saddle 
from  turninijf;  the  body  erect. 

2.  I^a-s  the  right  leg  stretched  over  the  croup  of 
the  horse,  without  touching  him;  sit  lightly  in  the 
saddle,  placing  at  the  same  time  the  right  hand, 
witbout  quitting  the  reins,  upon  the  right  holster, 
the  paliij  of  the  hand  resting  upon  it,  the  fingers  on 
the  outside  of  it,  and  take  one  rein  of  the  snaffle  in 
each  hand.* 

(If  the  trooper  is  using  the  curb-bridle,  he  will 
pass  the  reins  of  it  in  the  left  hand  and  adjust 
them.) 

Place  the  right  foot  in  the  stirrup. 

Let  fall  the  carbine  by  the  side.f 

Position  of  the  bridle-hand. 

The  reins  with  their  slide  in  the  left  hand,  the 
little  finger  between  the  reins,  the  other  fingers  well 


*  The  To'\ns  of  the  snaffle  are  thus  held  by  recruits  and  beginners 
in  equitation.  The  ])rii('ticod  horseman  will  take  his  riding  reins  at 
once  in  his  lf.fi  hand  on  mounting. 

t  Tho  carbine  (or  rifle)  is  suspended  by  a  strap  over  the  left 
shoulder. 


THE  TROOPER.  15 

closed,  and  the  thumb  upon  the  second  joint  of  the 
first  fingers;  the  elbow  slightly  detached  from  the 
bod}',  the  hand  four  inches  above  the  pommel  of  the 
saddle,  the  fingers  six  inches  from,  and  turned  to- 
wards the  body;  the  little  finger  a  little  nearer  the 
body  than  the  upper  part  of  the  wrist,  the  right 
hand  at  the  side. 

Length  of  the  stirrups. 

Having:  commenced  the  exerciPe,  the  instructor  assures 
himself  that  the  stirrups  are  properly  adjusted. 

They  aie  of  the  proper  length  if,  when  the  tronper  raises 
himself  on  the  stirrups,  there  is  a  space  of  six  inches  be- 
tween the  fork  and  the  saddle. 

Position  of  the  foot  in  the  stirrup. 

The  stirrup  should  support  only  the  weight  of 
the  leg;  the  foot  ought  to  be  inserted  one-third  of 
its  length,  the  heel  lower  than  the  toe. 

The  stirrup  should  support  only  the  weight  of  (he  leg:  if 
the  trooper  bore  too  much  upon  the  stirrups,  his  seat 
would  be  deranged,  as  well  as  the  position  of  tjie  legs,  and 
the  justness  of  their  action  would  be  impaired. 

The  foot  ought  to  be  inserted  one-third  of  its  length:  if  the 
trooper  did  not  insert  the  foot  Sufficiently  far  in  the 
stirrup,  he  would  risk  losing  them,  particularly  during 
the  lively  gaits.  If  the  foot  were  inserted  too  far,  the 
legs  would  not  fall  naturally. 

The  heel  lower  than  the  toe :  that  the  foot  may  keep  the 
stirrup  without  eflFi)rt  and  without  stiffness:  thnt  the  play 
of  the  joint  with  the  leg  mny  remain  fre&,  and  that  the 
spur  being  further  removed  from  the  horse,  there  is  less 
danger  of  its  being  improperly  employed.  * 


16  THE  TROOPEB. 


Form — Ranks. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
RANKS,  No.s.  1  and  3  raise  the  wrist  (nf  the  bridle 
hand),  and  hold  the  IciiS  cli>se  to  the  body  of  the 
horse  to  keep  him  quiet;  No.s.  2  and  4  enter  the 
intervals  witliout  jostling  and  without  precipitation. 
'The  rear  rank  being  formed,  clo6es  to  the  distance 
of  2  feet  from  the  front. 

Before  ca^ising  the  command  mount  to  be  executed,  the 
instructor  explains  in  detail  the  two  times  of  it,  and  allows 
but  a  short  interval  between  the  first  and  second  part  of 
this  command,  because,  were  the  trooper  to  remain  a  long 
time  on  the  stirrup,  the  horses  would  become  restive  and 
move  out  of  their  proper  places. 

The  instructor  will  explain  to  the  troopers,  that  in  car- 
rying the  right  hand  to  the  holster  before  placing  them- 
selves in  the  saddle,  they  will  be  able  to  do  so  lightly,  and 
will  not  run  the  I'isk  of  injuring  themselves  in  bestriding 
their  horses.  « 

The  instructor  causes  the  stirrups  to  be  crossed  upon 
the  neck,  the  left  stirrup  over  the  right.* 

The  position  of  the  trooper,  mounted. 

The  buttocks  bearing  equally  upon  the  saddle, 
and  jis  far  forward  as  possible  ; 

The  thighs  turned  upon  their  flat  side  without 
effort,  embracing  equally  the  horse,  and  stretched 
only  by  their  own  weight  and  that  of  the  legs; 

A  supple  bend  of  the  knees; 


*  This  is  usually  omitted  in  volunteer-cavalry  exercises. 


THE  TROOPER.  17 

The  legs  free  and  falHnp:  naturally; 

The  pitint  of  tlie  feet  falling  in  Yike  manner;  (i. 
e.  when  not  in  the  ^tirrup8.) 

Q'he  loins  supported  withi)ut  stiffness; 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  at  ease,  free  and 
erect ; 

The  shoulders  equally  thrown  back  ; 

The  arms  free,  the  elbows  falling  naturally; 

The  head  erect,  at  ease,  and  not  drawn  in  be- 
tween the  shouldera; 

One  rein  of  the  snaffle  in  each  hand,  the  fingers 
closed,  the  thumb  along  each  rein,  the  wrists  as 
high  as  the  elbow,  at  6  inches  Irom  each  other, 
the  fingers  turned  towards  each  other,  the  upper 
extremity  of  the  reins  leaving  the  hand  on  the  side 
of  the  thumb.* 

The  buttocks  bfaring  equally  upon  the  saddle:  Serving 
as  a  base  to  tlie  position  ot  the  trooper,  tliey  ought  to  be 
equally  charged  with  all  the  weight  of  the  body  to  assure 
its  steadiiieiss. 

And  as  far  forward  as  possible:  In  order  that  the 
trooper  ninj  have  greater  facility  in  embracing  his  hor:^, 
and  conforming  to  all  his  movements. 

The  thighs  turried  vpon  their  flat  side  without  effort, 
embracing  equally  the  horse :  The  more  the  thighs  adhere 
to  tlie  hor.-e,  the  greater  is  the  solidity  of  the  tiooper.  If 
they  did  not  embraco  the  horse  equally,  the  seat  of  the 
trooper  would  be  unfixed. 

Aiid  stretched  only  by  their  own  weight  and  that  of  the 
legs:  If  they  did  not  fall  naturaUy,  they  could  he  extend- 
ed only  by  an  etlort,  which  would  cause  constraint. 


*  NoTB.  This  paraprnph,  referring  to  the  mode  of  holding  the 
snaffle  rein,  is  not  applicable  to  voluuteer-cavalry  who  are  generally 
expert  horuemea. 


18  THE   TROOPER. 

A  supple  bend  of  the  knees:  To  give  a  facility  in  carrying 
the  legs  more  or  less  to  the  rear,  without  deranging  the 
position  of  the  thighs. 

The  legs  free,  and  falling  naturally,  the  point  of  the  feet 
falling  in  like' manner :  Stiffness  in  the  legs  would  impair 
the  goo  I  effects  of  their  action. 

The  loins  supported  without  stiffness :  The  loins  should  be 
sustained,  to  give  the  ti  ooper  grace  and  solidity.  Stiffness 
would  prevent  his  accommodating  himself  to  all  the  mo- 
tions of  the  horse. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  at  ease,  free  and  erect'.  The 
body  can  preserve  its  crectness  only  by  suppleness  and 
ease. 

The  shoulders  equally  thrown  hack:  Were  the  slioulders 
thrown  forward,  the  back  would  be  curved  and  the  breast 
contracted;  were  they  thrown  too  much  to  the  rear,  th6 
loins  would  be  hollowed  and  the  action  of  the  arms  con- 
Btrained. 

The  arms  free:  In  order  not  to  employ  more  force  than 
is  absolutely  necessary ;  constrained  movements  produce 
unr-,ertain  effects. 

The  etiows  falling  naturally :  That  they  may  contribute 
to  the  steadiness  of  the  seat,  and  communicate  stiflfnesa 
neither  to  t!ie  body  nor  fore-arms. 

The  head  erect:  If  the  head  were  not  erect,  the  body 
would  lean  towards  the  side  it  inclined  to. 
r   At  ease,  and  not  drawn  in  between  the  shoulders:  To  be 
able  to  turn  it  with  ease,  and  that  its  movements  may  be 
independent  of  those  of  the  body. 


The  use  of  the  reins. 

The  reins  serve  to  prepare  the  horse  for  the 
moveniGnts  he  is  required  to  .execute,  to  direct 
him,  and  to  stop  him.  Their  action  should  be 
progressive,  and  in  accordance  tvith  that  of  the 
legs. 


THE   TROOPER.  Ift 

When  the  trooper  makes  use  of  the  reins,  the 
arms  Bhould  act  with  suppleness,  and  their  move- 
ments  ought    to   extend   from   the    wrist   to   the 
•  fchoulder. 

The  use  of  the  legs. 

The  less  serve  to  urge  the  horse  forward,  ta 
support  him,  and  to  aid  him  in  turning  to  the 
rigUt  and  to  the  left.  Whenever  the  trooper 
wishes  his  horse  to  move  forward,  he  should  close 
the  logs  by  degrees  behind  the  girths,  causing  their 
effect  to  correspond  with  the  sensibility  of  the 
horse,  taking  care  neither  to  open  nor  elevate  thg 
knees,  of  which  the  bend  should  be  always  pliant. 
The  trooper  relaxes  the  legs  by  degrees,  as  he  closed 
them. 


The  effect  of  the  reins  and  the  legs  com- 
bined. 

By  elevating  a  little  the  left  wrist,  and  closing 
the  legs,  the  trooper  '^gathers  his  horse  ;'\  by 
elevating  again  the  wrist,  he  slackens  the  paoej 
by  repeating  this  momement  of  the  wrist,  he  stops 
the  horse,  or  •'  reins  back."  The  troopers  ought 
to  elevate  the  wrists  without  curving  them,  afe 
the  same  time  drawing  them  slightly  towards  the 
body. 

By  opening  the  right  rein  and  closing  the  righl 
leg,  the  trooper  turns  his  horse  to  the  right.  To 
open  the  right  rei^i;  the  wrist  is  carried,  without 


20  THE  TROOPER. 

turning;  it,  more  or  less  to  the  right,  according  to 
the  sensibility  of  the  horse. 

Bj  opeuiug  the  left  rein,  and  closiog  the  left  leg, 
the  troop'T  turns  his  horse  to  the  letV.  To  open 
the  left  rein,  the  left  wrist  is  carried,  without  turn- 
ing it,  more  or  less  to  the  left,  according  to  the 
sensibilify  of  the  horse. 

By  lowering  slightJy  the  wrist,  the  horse  is  at 
liberry  to  move  forward ;  the  closing  the  legs  de- 
termines the  movemeat.* 

To  march. 

The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Squad  (or  compairt/yjor  platoon)  forward, 

2.  Mauch. 

At  the  command  squad  forward^  elevate  slightly 
the  wrists,  and  close  the  legs,  in  order  ta  "gather 
the  horse." 

At  the  command  marcii,  lower  slightly  the 
wrists,  and  close  the  legs  more  or  less,  according 
to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse.  The  horse  having 
obeyed,  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

If  the  trooper  did  not  gather  his  horse  at  the  prepara- 
tory coraniaud,  the  executii)n  of  the  second  command 
would  be  too  abrupt  or  too  slow. 

If  the  trooper,  at  the  command  of  execution,  did  not 
commence  by  lowering  th6  wrist,  the  horse  would  not 
have  the  liberty  necessary  to  enable  him  to  move  forward. 

If  the  trooper  did  not  close  equally  the  legs,  the  horse 
would  not  move  directly  to  the  front;  and  if  he  did  not 

*  The  wrist  of  the  bridle  hand  is  of  course  meant. 


THE   TROOPER.  21 

do8e  them  progresBiyely,  the  horse  would  not  obey  with- 
out irregularity. 

To  halt. 

After  some  steps,  the  instructor  commarids : 
1.  Squad.  2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  i^qua/?,  the  trooR/sr  gathers  his 
horse,  without  Bhickening  his  pace. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  trooper  braces  him- 
self in  the  .«*addle;  elevate  the  wrists  at  the  same 
time  by  degrees,  and  close  the  legs  in  order  to 
prevent  the  horse  from  receding.  The  horse  hav- 
ing obeyed,  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by 
degreed. 

When  the  horse  does  not  obey,  cause  him  to  feel 
Bticcessively  the  effect  of  each  rein,  according  to  his 
sensibility. 

If  the  trooper  pressed  the  horse  with  the  thighs  or  legs,, 
it  would  be  diflacult  for  him  to  stop. 

If  he  did  not  use  (he  two  reins  equally,  and  hold  the 
legs  equally  near,  the  horse  would  stop  in  a  diagonal 
position.  ' 

If  the  trooper  used  the  reins  with  too  much  force 
and  precipitation,  the  horse  would  stop  suddenly  aud  fall 
back. 

To  turn  to  the  right,  and  to  the  left.* 

The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Squad  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left). 

2.  March.  ,    3.  Halt.       # 


•  In  pmcticing  the-^urninga,  let  intervals  be  taken  of  3  yards, 
nrom  boot  to  boot.  j'""^, 


22  THE   TROOPER. 

At  the  command,  squad  to  the  rijJit,  gather  the 
borsc. 

At  the  command  march,  opf^n  the  right  rein, 
and  close  progressively  the  right  leg.  In  order  not 
to  turn  the  horse  too  short,  perform  the  movement 
upon  a  quarter  of  a  circle  of  3  paces.*  The  move- 
ment being  almost  completed,  diminish  the  effect 
of  the  rein  and  the  right  leg,  supporting  the  horse 
at  the  same  time  with  the  laft  reirf  and  leg  to  termi- 
nate the  movement. 

At  the  command  halt,  elevate  slightly  the 
wrists,  and  hold  the  legs  near,  in  order  to  keep  the 
horse  straight  in  the  new  direction;  replace  the 
wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

If  the  trooper  did  not  describe  the  arc  of  the  pre- 
scribed oii'cle,  the  movement  would  be  too  much  shortened. 

If  the  trooper,  towards  the  end  of  the  movement,  did 
Dot  diminish  the  effect  of  the  right  rein  an  1  the  rlglit  leg, 
hy  means  of  the  left  rein  and  left  leg,  the  horse  would 
perform  more  than  a  turn  to  the  right. 

To  turn-about  to  the  right,  and  to  the 
.     left. 

The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Squad  to  the  right-ahout  (or  to  the  Ic/tahouty 

2.  March.  3.  Halt. 

This  'movement   is  executed   on    the   principles 
proscribed  for  the  turn  to  the  right  or  to  the  Ic/t, 

*  That  is,  ft  circular  path  or  track  3  yards  id  length. 


TUE   TROOPER.  23 

with  this  diflference,  that  the  hofse  should  pass  over 
a  semi  circle  of  6  paces,  and  face  to  the  rear. 

In  order  to  make  the  trooper  compreheiid  better  the 
movomentH  dotifiiled,  the  instructor  places  himself  at  tha 
shoulder  of  the  horse,  and  describes  each  movement  oi> 
foot,  in  marking  off  the  arc  of  the  prescribed  circle. 

To  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right  and 
to  the  left. 

The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Squad  right  oblique  (or  left  ohVque). 

2.  March.  3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  Squad  right  ohliquej  gather  the 
horse. 

At  the  command  march,  open  a  little  tKe  right 
rein,  and  close  slip-htiy  the  right  leg,  in  order  to 
make  the  horse  execute  a  quarter  turn  to  the  right  ^ 
cause  the  horse  to  feel,  almost  at  the  same  time, 
the  effect  of  the  left  rein  and  the  left  leg,  to  termi- 
nate the  n»ovement  without  increasing  the  degree  of 
obliquity. 

At  the  command  halt,  elevate  slightly  the 
wrists  and  close  the  legs,  to  keep  the  direction  cf 
the  quarter-turn  to  the  right;  replace  the  wrista 
and  legs  by  degrees. 

The  instructor  commands  halt,  almost  imme- 
diately after  the  comiiiand  march;  he  does  not 
require  great  exactness  in  this  movement,  the  ob- 
ject of  which  is,  to  give  the  trooper  the  first  idea  cf 
the  oblique  direction. 


24  THE  TROOPER. 

The  tnovemcnta  detailed,  after  having  been  executed 
to  the  right,  are  executed  to  the  left,  according  to  tie 
same  priuciplc9,  but  by  inverse  means. 

To  rein-back,  and  to  cease  reining-back. 

The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Squad — Backwards.  3.   Squad. 

2.  March.  4.  Halt. 

At  the  command  Squad  backwards,  gather  the 
hprse. 

At  the  command  march,  keep  a  firm  seafc  elevate 
the  wrist?,  and  close  the  legs.  As  foon  as  the  horse 
obeys,  lower  and  elevate  successively  the  wrists, 
which  is  called  yidding  and  checking.  If  the  horse 
throws  the  haunches  to  the  right,  close  the  right 
leg;  if  ho  throws  them  to  the  lefr,  close  the  left 
leg.  If  these  means  are  not  sufficient  to  replace  the 
horse  in  his  proper  position,  open  the  rein  on  the 
aide  towards  which  the  horse  throws  his  haunches, 
causing  him  to  feel,  at  the  same  time,  slightly,  the 
effect  of  the  opposite  rein. 

At  the  command  squadf  the  trooper  prepares  to 
stop. 

At  the  command  halt,  lower  the  wrists  and  close 
the  legs.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  replace  the 
wrists  and  legs  by  degrees. 

If  the  trooper  did  not  keep  a  firm  seat,  he  vrould  incline 
•forward,  from  the  effect  of  the  movement  of  the  horse. 

If,  instead  of  lowering  and  eleva'iiig  the  vrrists  alter- 
nately, the  trooper  were  to  prolong  the  effect  of  the  hands, 


THE   TROOPER.  25 

the  horse  woold  step  back  suddenly,  and  would  cross  or 
throw  himself  upon  his  haunches. 

To  dismount. 

The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Prepare  to  dismount. 
1  time  J  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  prepare  to  dismount,  Nos. 
1  and  3  of  the  front  rank  move  forward  6  paces 
Nos.  2  and  4  of  the  rear  rank  rein-back  4  paces) 
and  keep  themselves  opposite  their  interval.     The 
troopers  of  each  rank  dress  by  the  ri'rht. 

Seize  the  carbine  with  the  right°  hand,  at  the 
lower  band ;  pass  it  over  the  right  shoulder  diago- 
nally, the  muzzle  in  the  air,  so  that  it. cannot  tall 
back. 

2.  Seize  the'  reins  of  the  snaflae  (or  of  the  curl- 
hriiUe)  above  and  near  the  left  thupib  with  the 
right  hand,  the  nails  downward,  and  place  this 
hand  upon  the  right  holster.  Disengage  the  right 
foot  from  the  stirrup,  and  seize  with  the  left  hand 
a  lock  of  the  mane  over  the  reins. 

Dismount. 

1  time^  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  dismount,  rise  upon  the 
left  stirrup;  pass  the  right  leg  extended  over  the 
croup  of  the  horse,  without  touching  him,  and 
bring  the  right  thigh  near  to  the  left,  the  body 
well  sustained  J  place  at  the  same  time  the   right 

o 


26  THE  TROOPER. 

hand  upon  the  cnntle  of  the  paddle,  slipping  it 
along  the  reins  without  letting  them  go;  descend 
lightly  to  the  ground,  the  body  erect,  the  heels 
upon  the  same  line.  Let  go  the  mane  with  the  left 
hand  J  engage  the  extremity  of  the  reins  in  the  left 
cloak-strap  with  the  right  hand,  which  then  seizes 
the  left,  rein. 

2  Make  a  face  and  2  steps  to  the  left,  stepping 
off  with  the  left  foot;  slip  the  right  hand  along  the 
left  rein,  seize  with  the  same  hand  both  reins  at  6 
inches  from  the  mouth  of  the  horse,  the  nails  down- 
ward, and  take  the  position  of  the  trooper  before 
mounting. 

Form — Ranks. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  ranks, 
Nos.  1  and  3  of  each  rank  elevate  slightly  the  right 
hand  to  keep  the  horse  quiet;  Nos.  2  and  4  return 
to  their  intervals  gently.  • 

To  file  off. 

The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Bi/  the  right  (or  hi/  the  left) — File  off. 

2.  March. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
FILE  off,  hook  up  the  sabre;  use  both  hands  to 
unhook  the  curb  and  unbuckle  the  nose-band ;  re- 
take the  reins  with  the  right  hand,  and  replace  the 
left  hand  at  the  side. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  the  trooper  of  the 
right,  in  each  rank,  steps  off  with  the   left  foot, 


THE  TROOPER.  27 

leading  his  horse  to  the  front;  he  takes  4  steps, 
turns  to  the  right,  and  marches  in  the  new  direc- 
tion, holding  at  the  same  time  the  hand  high  and 
firm  to  J)revent  the  horse  from  jumping  Each 
trooper  in  each  rank  executes  successive!}^  the  same 
movement,  when  the  one  who  precedes  him  has 
moved  4  paces  to  the  front. 

To  leap  to  the  ground ;  the  trooper,  holding  the 
reins  of  the  snaffle  as  prescribed,  seizes  with  the  left 
hand  a  lock  of  the  mane,  the  fingers  well  closed; 
places  the  right  hand  upon  the  pommel,  raises  him- 
self upon  the  wrists,  brings  the  right  thigh  to  tho 
side  of  the  left,  remains  an  instant  in  this  position, 
and  descends  lightly  to  the  ground. 

To  leap  on  the  horse ;  the  trooper  seizes  the  mane 
with  the  left  hand,  places  the  right  hand  which 
,  holds  the  reins  upon  the  pommel  of  the  saddle, 
springs  lively,  raising  himself  upon  the  two  wrists, 
remains  an  instant  in  this  position,  and  places  him- 
self lightly  in  the  saddle. 

The  instructor  sometimes  gives  the  command  to  rest,  in 
marcking,  in  order  to  calm  the  horses  nfter  a  quick  pace, 
and  to  relieve  the  troopers  who  may  become  fatigued. 
During  the  rest  in  marching,  the  troopers  relax  them- 
selves a  little;  but  without  changing  the  pace  and  with- 
out losing  their  distance.  The  conductors  always  regulate 
the  march. 

Being  halted,  to  commence  the  move  at 
a  trot. 

The  commands  are : 

1.  Column  forward. 

2.  Trot.  3.  March. 


28  THE   TROOPER. 

,    At  the  command  trot,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  h)wcr  the  wrists  and 
close  the  legs  progressively ;  as  soon  as  the  horse 
cbejSj  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

*  Marching  at  a  trot,  to  halt. 

The  troopers  marching  at  a.  trot,  and  ia  column,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Column.  '         2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  column,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  halt,  elevate  the  wrists  by 
degrees,  until  the  horse  stops;  and  hold  the  legs 
always  near,  to  keep  him  straight  and  to  prevent 
bis  stepping  back.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  re- 
place the  wrists  and  logs  by  degrees. 

The  in«trnctor  requires  all  the  troopers  to  set  off  freely 
at  the  trot,  at  the  command  makch,  and  to  stop  all  to- 
gether, without  jostling,  at  the  command  halt. 

To   pass  from   the  trot  to  the  trot-out, 
and  from  the  trot-out  to  the  trot. 

The  troopers  marching  at  the  trot,  and  in  column,  the 
rnfitractor  commands : 

Trot-out. 

At  this  command,  lower  a  little  the  wrists  and 
close  the  legs  progrrssively ;  as  soon  as  the  horse 
obeys,  replace  the  wrists  and  the  logs  by  degrees. 


THE  TROOPER.  29 

The  gait  being  lengthened  to  a  suitable  decree,  the  in- 
structors see  tliat  the  troopers  keep   their  horses  up  to  it. 

He  pays  particular  attention  to  the  position  of  the 
troopers.  He  reminds  them  tliat  it  is  in  holding  the  body 
erect,  having  a  li^iht  hand,  the  loins  supple,  and  in  allow- 
ing the  thighs  and  le;.'s  to  fall  naturally,  they  can  di.ninish 
the  eifect  of  the  reaction  of  the  horse,  and  conform»mpre 
readily  to  all  his  motions. 

To  prevent  the  horses  from  overreaching,  it  is  neces- 
aary  to  raise  the  wrists  and  close  more  or  less  the  legs. 

To  passage  from  the  trot-out  to  the  trot^  the  instructor 
commands: 

Slow  trot. 

At  this  command,  elevate  the  wrists  by  degrees 
and  close  the  legs,  to  prevent  the  horse  from  taking 
the  walk;  as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the 
wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 


To  pass  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop. 

The  instructor  commands :  • 

1.  Gallop.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  gallop,  gather  the  horse  and 
keep  hira  perfectly  straight. 

At  the  command  march,  carry  the  hand  sligbtlj 
forward  and  to  the  left,  to  enable  the  ri^ht  Bhoiii- 
der  to  move  in  a<lvance  of  the  left,  and  close  the 
legs  behind  the  girths  in  order  ta  urge  the  horse 
forward,  causing  hitu  to  feel  lin^htly  the  effect  of 
the  left  leg.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  held  a  light 
baud  aud  the  legs  near,  to  keep  him  at  his  gait. 


30  THE   TROOPER. 

The  instructor  requires  the  troopers  to  be  perfectfy 
calm,  to  conduct  their  horses  with  tnihlnes?,  nnd  particu- 
larly to  preserve  a  light  band  that  the  gallop  may  be  free 
and  regular. 


To  passage  to  the  right  or  to  the  left. 


The  commands  are :  , 

1.  Right  (or  left)  pass.  3.   Squad. 

*    2.  March.  4.  Halt. 

At  the  command  riglit  pass,  bear  the  shoulders 
of  the  horse  to  the  right,  opening  a  little  the  right 
rein,  and  closing  the  right  leg. 

This  movement  is  only  preparatory ;  it  indicates 
to  the  trooper  that  the  shoulders  of  liis  horse  should 
always  commence  the  march,  and  precede  the  move- 
ment of  the  hauncheg. 

At  the  command  march,  open  the  right  rein  to 
incline  the  horse  to  the  right,  closing  at  the  same 
time  the  left  leg  that  the  haunches  may  follow, 
"without  leaning  the  body  to  the  left ;  make  use  of 
the  left  rein  and  the  right  leg  to  support  the  horse 
and  moderate  his  movement. 

At  the  command  halt,  cause  to  cease  insensibly 
the  effect  of  the  right  reia  and  the  loft  leg,  em- 
ploying the  opposite  rein  and  leg;  straighten  the 
Lorse  and  replace  the  wrists  and  legs  by  degrees. 

To  passage  to  the  left,  and  to  halt,  employ  the  same 
priuciples  afhl  inverse  means. 


THE  TROOPER.  31 

The  principal  movements  of  the  bridle- 
hand. 

By  raising  slightly  the  hand  and  drawing  it  ia 
towanis  the  body,  the  trooper  gathers  his  horse; 
by  raising  it  still  more,  the  gait  is  made  slower. 
*  By  increasing  the  effect  of  the  hand,  the  horse  is 
stopped;  if  increased  still  more,  the  horse  is  reined 
back. 

By  lowering  slightly  the  hand,  the  horse  is  at 
liberty  to  move  forward.  , 

By  carrying  the  han^  forward  and  to  the  right, 
the  horse  is  turned  to  the  right. 

By  carrying  the  hand  forWard  and  to  the  left,  the 
horse  is  turned  to  the  left. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  the  bridle-hand  re- 
sumes its  original  position. 

In  all  the  movements  of  the  hand,  the  arm  should 
act/ree'y,  without  communicating  constraint  to  the 
shoulder  or  body  ;  the  effect  of  the  curb  being  more 
powerful  than  that  of  the  snaffle,  it  shou'd  be  used 
progressively,  particularly  ia  stopping  and  reining 
back. 

To  gather  the  horse. 

Elevate  slightly  the  hand,  drawing  it  at  the  same 
time  towards  the  body,  and  close  the  legs. 

To  march. 

Lower  slightly  the  hand,  the  wrists  always  oppo- 
site the  middle  of  the  body,  and  close  the  legs  pro- 


32  THE   TROOPER. 

gressively.     As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the 
hand  and  legs  by  degrees. 

To  halt. 

.The  trooper  braces  himself  in  the  saddle;  ele- 
vate the  hand  by  degrees,  drawing  it  towards  the 
body,  and  close  the  le^s  to  keep, the  horse  straijiht, 
and  prevent  him  from  stepping  back.  As  soon  as 
the  horse  obeys,  replace  the  hand  and  the  legs  by 
degrees. 

To  turn  to  the  right. 

Carry  the  hand  forward  and  to  the  right,  accord- 
ing to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse ;  close  the  right 
leg,  the  left  leg  held  ueac  to  sustain  him.  The 
movement  being  nearly  finished,  replace  the  hand 
and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

To  turn  to  the  left. 

Carry  the  hand  forward  and  to  the  left,  according 
to  the  sensibi'ity  of  the  horse;  close  the  left  leg, 
the  riglit  leg  held  near  to  sustain  him.  The  move- 
ment being  nearly  finished,  replace  the  hand  and 
legs  by  degrees. 

To   turn-about  to  the  right  and  to  the 

left. 

The  same  principles  as  prescribed  to  execute  a 
turn  to  the  right,  or  to  thp  left,  observing  to  pass 
over  a  semi-circle. 


THE   TROOPER.  33 

To  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right,  and 
to  the  left. 

The  same  principles  as  prescribed  to  execute  a 
turn  to  the  right,  or  to  tjie  left,  observing  that  the 
movement  of  the  hand  does  not  require  the  horse 
to  do  more  than  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right, 
or  to  the  left. 

To  rein  back,  and  to  cease  reining  back. 

The^  same  principles  as  prescribed  for  the  halt, 
observing,  as  soou  as  the  hor«e  obeys,  to  lower  and 
raise  the  hand  alternately,  that  the  movement  may 
be  regular.  • 

To  cease  j-eining  back, 'relax  the  effect  of  the 
hand  and  close  the  legs ;  as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys, 
replace  the  hand  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

Of  the  spur.   - 

If  the  horse  docs  not  obey  the  legs,  it  is  necessary 
to  employ  the  spur. 

It  is  only  necessary  to  use  it  occasionally,  but 
always  vigorously,  and  at  the  moment  the  horse 
commits  the  fault. 

In  order  to  use  the  spurs,  it  is  necessary  to  keep 
steady  the  body,  the  waist,  and  the  wrists;  to  cling 
to  the  horse  with  the  thighs  and  the  calves  of  the 
legs;  turn  the  point  of  the  feet  a  little  out;  lower 
a  little  the  wrists;  press  the  spurs  close  behind  the 


S4  THE   TROOPER. 

girths,  without  moving  the  body,  and  let  them  re- 
mjiio  there  until  the  horse  obeys;  replace  then  the 
wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

When  the  troopers  employ  the  spur,  the  instructor 
observes  that  they  do  not  bear  too  much  upon  tl:e  reins, 
which  wouM  C(»unteract  the  effect  of  the  spur.  lie  also 
observes  that  the  troopeni  do  uot  use  the  spur  uuncces- 
sarily. 

Preparation  for  the  sabre  exercise. 

The  instructor  causes  the  sabre  exercise  to  be 
executed  at  a  halt;  for  this  purpose  he  opens  the 
ranks,  and  commands : 

1.  By  the  left  (or  hy  the  right) — Ojoenjiles, 

2.  March.  • 

3.  Riijht  (or  left) — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rifxht  trooper  of 
each  rank  moves  forward  6  paces ;  the  one  on  the 
left  of  each  rank  turns  to  the  Ic/t,  and  moves  for- 
ward; he  is  followed  by  all  the  other  troopers  of 
Lis  rank,  who  execute  the  same  movement  as  soon 
as  tiiey  have  the  necessary  space  to  put  them- 
selves in  file  at  their  proper  disturites.  The  second 
trooper  from  the  rip;ht  of  each  rank,  after  having 
inarched  3  paces,  turns  and  dresses  to  the  right; 
each  of  the  other  troopers  look  occasionally  to  the 
rear,  and  perform  succes.'^ively  the  same  movement 
when  at  three  paces  from  the  one  who  follows  him, 
and  dresses  upon  those  already  formed;  the  troopers 


THE   TROOPER.  35 

of  the  roar  rank  place  themselves  exactly  behind 
their  file-leader. 

After  the  command  march,  the  instructor  moves  to  the 
right  of  tlie  front  rank,  nnd  wlien  the  second  trooper  from 
the  rifrht  has  turned  to  the  front,  he  commands:  Right — • 
DiiESS.  After  having  rectified  the  alignment  and  the 
distances  in  tlie  two  ranks,  he  commands  :  Front. 

Whon  the  instructor  wishes  to  form  the  platoon, 
he  commands  : 

1.  To  the  right  (or  to  the  hfC) — cloze  files. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  the  right  trooper  of 
each  rank  moves  forward  6  paces;  all  the  other 
troopers  execute  a  turn  to  the  right  and  move  for- 
ward. 

Each  trooper,  on  arriving-  within  2  paces  of  the 
place  he  is  to  occupy  in  line,  turns  to  the  left,  and 
pin  cos  hiujself  on  tlie  left  of  the  troopers  already 
formod,  and  dresses  to  the  right. 

The  instructor  closes  the  ranks  as  soon  as  they 
are  formed. 

The  sabre  manual. 

Draw — Sabre. 

2  times. 

1.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
draw,  incline  slif:;htly  the  head  to  the  left,  carry 
the  riiiht  hand  above  the  reins,  engage  the  wrist  in 
the  sword-knot;  seize    the    gripe,    disengage    the 


36  THE   TROOPER. 

blade  six  inches  from   the  scabbard,  and  turn   the 
head  to  the  front. 

2.  At  the  last  part  of  the  coramand,  which  is 
8ABRE,  draw  quickly  the  sabre,  raising  the  arm  to 
its  full  length  ;  hold  the  sal^re  in  this  poififion  an 
instant,  then  carry  it  to  the  right  shoulder,  the 
back  of  the  blade  supported  against  the  hollow  of 
the  shoulder,  the  wrist  upon  the  top  of  the  thigh, 
the  little  finger  on  the  outside  of  the  gripe. 

Present — Sabre. 
1  time.  ' 

At  the  last  part  of  the  coramand,  which  is  sabre, 
carry  the  sabre  forward,  the  thumb  opposite  to  and 
6  inches  from  the  neck,  the  blade  perpendicular, 
the  edge  to  the  left,  the  thumb  along  the  right  side 
of  the  gripe,  the  little  finger  joined  to  the  other 
three. 

Carr^ — Sabre. 

1  time. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  sabre, 
replace  the  sabre,  the  back  of  the  blade  supported 
against  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  the  wrisX  upon 
the  upper  part  of  'the  thigh,  the  little  finger  outside 
of  the  gripe. 

Return— Sabre. 

2  times. 

1.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
RETURN,  execute  the  movement  of  prtsent   sabre. 

2.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,    which  is 


THE   TROOPER.     ^  37 

SABRE,  carry  the  wrist  opposite  to  and  G  inches 
from  the  left  shoulder,  lower  the  blade,  passing  it 
near  the  left  arm,  th6  point  to. the  rear;  incline  the 
Ijpad  slightly  to  the  left,  and  fix  the  eyes  upon  the 
mouth  of  the  scabbard  ;  return  the  blade,  disengage 
the  wrist  from  the  sword-knot,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front,  and  adjust  the  reins. 

Inspection  {of) — Sa^RE. 

1  time,  7  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
SABRE,  execute  the  first  time  of  draiv  sabre. 

2.  Execute  the  second  time  of  draw  sabre. 

3.  Present  the  sabre. 

4.  Turn  in  the  wrist,  in  order  to  show  the  other 
side  of  the  blade. 

5.  (^arry  the  sabre  to  the  shoulder. 

0.   Execute  the  first  time  of  return  sabre. 
7.  Execute  the  second  time  of  return  sabre. 

Manual  of  arms,  in  marching. 

The  troopers  are  required  to  draio  sabre,  and  to  return 
sabre,  while  marching  in  column  at  a  walk. 

The  instructor  observes  that  neither  the  seat,  nor  the 
position  of  the  bridle  hand  is  deranged.  He  also  requires 
the  troopers  to  keep  their  legs  near,  in  order  to  prevent 
the  horses  from  slackening  the  gait.  When  the  troopera 
/have  the  sabre  drawn,  the  instructor  observes  that  they 
do  not  throw  back  the  right  shoulder. 

As  the  troopers  become  more  skillful,  they  are  required 
to  draw  sabre,  in  marching  first  at  the  trot,  and  then  at 
the  gallop.     They  also  take  the  position  of  the  first  motion 

4 


38  THE   TROOPER. 

of  in  tierce  point,  and  front  cut,  in  marcbing  at  the  different 
gaits. 

Tlie  troopers  are  taught  to  take  the  position  of  the 
pabre  for  the  chargt^.  as  front  rank  an']  as  rear  rank.  For 
this  purpof^e  the  instructor  commands  :  ^ 

As  front  rank — Raise  sabre. 

1  time. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  co^jmand,  which  is  sabre, 
take  the  position  of  in  tierce  point. 

The  instructor  then  causes  the  sabre  to  be  carried,  and 
commands: 

As  rear  rank — Raise  Sabre. 

1  time. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  wliich  is  sabre, 
take  the  position  of  the  first  motion  of  front  cut. 

These  movements  are  executed  successively  at  the 
ditferent  gaits 

The  sabres  are  returned  in  marching  at  a  walk ;  for  this 
purpose  the  troopers  are  directed  to  su|)port  tiie  back  of 
the  blade  against  the  left  arm,  until  the  point  has  entered 
the  scabbard. 

The  troopers  are  exercised,  isahres  drawn,  in  turning  to 
the  right  and  to  the  loft  at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop,  and  to 
the  right-about,  and  lefl-about,  at  the  trot  only. 

Sabre  exercise  at  all  gaits. 

The  troopers  execute  progressively,  at  the  different 
gaits,  the  exercise  of  the  sabie,  taking  care  to  preserve 
between  each  other  the  distance  of  3  yards. 


THE   TROOPfeR.  39 

Let  the  otlier  motions  of  this  exercise  be  first  taught  to 
the  troopers  dismounted. 

Preparatory  to  all  cuts  and  thrusts,  the  commander  or 
instructor  opens  his  ranks  and  then  orders, 

1.  B}f  the  left  (or  hy  the  rvjht) — OrEN  FILES. 

2.  March. 

3.  Right  (or  ^e/?)— Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
OPEN  FILES,  all  face  to  the  left  except  the  first  file. 

At  the  command  march,  the  meu  step  oflf 
together.  The  second  man  from  the  right,'  after 
having  marched,  for  the  sahrc  exercise  5  paces, 
halts,  fronts  bj  a  right  face,  and  dresses  on  the 
right  file  who  has  not  moved.  The  others  march 
on,  and  each  one  glancing  over  his  right  shoulder, 
halts  in  succession,  and  fronts  whrn  he  has  arrived 
at  his  place.  The  rear  rank  men  regulate  them- 
selves by  their  file-leaders,  and  remain  exactly 
behind  them. 

"When  the  third  man  from  the  right  has  fronted,  the 
instructor  dresses  the  front  rank  ;  the  assistant  instructor 
dresses   the   rear   rank,   and   the    instructor  commands 

FRONT.      . 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  form  the  platoon,  he 
commands : 

1.  To  the  right  (or  to  the  left) — Close  files. 

2.  March. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
CLOSE  files,  the  men  all  face  to  tlie  right  (or  hft)y 
except  the  file  on  which  they  close.   . 


40  THE   TROOPER. 

At  the  command  march,  th(3y  stop  off  toajether, 
and  each  one  fronts  in  succession  by  a  riglit  face 
(or  left  face,)  when  he  has  closed  up  to  the  man 
who  precedes  him. 

After  the  ranks  are  formed,  the  instructor  closes  and 
dresses*  them. 

At  first  the  motions  are  executed  in  detail  by  the  num- 
bers;  but  when  the  troopers  execute  all  the  motions  with 
regularity,  the  instructor  requires  each  cut  to  be  given 
without  decomposing  it ;  the  last  syllable  of  a  command 
is  the  signal  for  the  quick  execution  of  it.  All  the  cuts 
are  then  terminated  by  a  half  moulinet,  which  brings  back 
to  the  position  of  guard. 

The  objects  of  the'  moulinet  is  to  render  the  joints  of 
the  arm  and  wrist  supple,  and  as  it  a-lJs  to  the  confidence 
of  the  men  when  isolated,  by  increasing  their  dexterity, 
they  should  first  be  exercised  at  it,  as  a  preparation  for 
the  other  motions. 

Each  lesson  is  therefore  commenced  and  ended  with 
moulinets,  executed  with  a  quickness  proportioned  to  the 
progress  of  the  troopers.  The  instructor  pays  particular 
attention  that  the  men  do  not  employ  a  degree  of  force  in 
the  sabre  exercise,  which  not  only  is  less  necessary  than 
skill  and  suppleness,  but  which  is  oven  prejudicial.  He 
observes,  also,  that  they  do  not  lean  to  one  side,  in  such 
a  manner  as  to  lose  the  seat,  when  mounted;  he  requires 
more  especially,  in  the  motions  of  the  sabre  to  the  rear, 
that  the  blade  shall  not  fall  too  near  the  body,  for  fear  of 
"Wounding  the  horse.  In  describing  a  circle,  the  flat  of 
the  blade  should  He  to  the  side,  and  the  edge  to  the  front, 
and  it  should  be  so  directed  as  not  to  touch  either  the 
horse's  head,  or  his  haunches,  or  the  knees  of  the  rider. 

Thrusts  should  always  be  used  in  preference,  as  they 
require  less  force,  and  their  result  is  more  prompt,  sure, 
and  decisive.  They  should  be  directed  quickly  home  to 
the  body  of  the  adversary,  the  sabre  being  held  with  the 
full  grasp,  the  thumb  pressing  against  the  guard  in  the 
direction  of  the  blade.  • 


THE   TROOPER.  *    ♦  41 

The  parries  against  the  lance  are  the  same  as  against 
the  point. 

The  instructor  explains  what  is  meant  by  right  and  left 
side  of  (he  gripe :  by  tierce,  and  by  qiiarte. 

The  right  aide  of  the  gripe  is  the  side  opposite  to  the 
guard. 

The  left  side  of  the  gripe  is  the  side  next  to  the  guard. 

Tierce  is  the  position  in  •which  the  edge  of  the  blade  is 
turned  to  the  right,  the  nails  downward. 

Qunrte  is  the  position  in  which  the  edge  of  the  blade  is 
turned  to  the  left,  the  nails  upwards. 

To  rest,  the  instructor  conforms  to  what  is  prescribed. 
In  this  case,  he  causes  the  sabre  to  bo  returned. 

Sabre  exercise. 


The  troopers  being  placed  as  prescribed,  the  instructor 
orders  the  Sabres  to  be  drawn. 

lie  commands: 

Guard. 

1  time. 

At  the  command  guard,  carry  the  richfc  foot  2 

feet  from  the  left,  the  heels  on  the  same  line;  place 

the  left  baud  closed,  G  inches  from  the  body,  and  as 

high  as  the  elbow,  the  fingers  towards  the  body,  the 

little  finger  nearer  than  the  thumb  (position  of  the 

bridle  hand);  at  the   same  time,   place   the  right 

hand  in  tierce  at  the  height  of,  and  3  inches  from, 

the  left  hand,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of 

the  gripe,  the  little  finger  by  the  side  of  the  othe/s, 

the  point  of   the  sabre  inclined  to  the  left,  and  2 

feet  higher  than  the  hand, 
4* 


42  THE   TROOPER. 

Left — M  OULINET. 
1  t'l'me^  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
MOULINET,  ex,lend  the  right  arm  to  the  front  to  its 
full  length,  the  hand  in  tierce  and  as  high  as  the 
ejes. 

2.  Lower  the  blade  in  rear  of  the  left  elbow; 
graze  the  horse's  neck  quickly,  describing  a  circle 
from  rear  to  front,  and  return  to  the  position  of 
guard. 

Rir/ht — Moulin  ET. 
1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
MOULTNET,  extend  the  right  arm  to  the  front  to  its 
full  length,  the  hand  in  quarte,  and  as  high  as  the 
eyes. 

2.  Lower  the  blade  in  rear  of  the  right  elbow  j 
graze  the  horse's  neck  quickly,  describiug  a  circle 
from  rear  to  front,  and  return  to  the  position  of 
guard. 

To  execute  the  tnoulinet  without  stopping,  if  the  in- 
structor wishes  to  begin  by  the  left,  he  commands: 

Lf'ft  and  r?V//jY— MoULTNET. 
1  timey  2  motions. 
If  he  wishes  to  begin  by  the  right,  ho  comtnands: 

Eiijht  and  left — MoULlNET. 
1  time,  2  motions. 
At  either  of  these  conimands,  the  troopers,  com- 
mencing from  the  position  of  guard,  execute  alter- 


THE  TROOPER.  43 

nately  what  is  laid  down,  without  stopping  at  any 
motion.  ,     , 

Rear — Moulinet.    . 

1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
MOULINET,  raise  the  arm  to  the  right  and  rear  to 
its  full  extent,  the  point  of  the  sabre  upwards,  the 
edge  to  the  right,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back 
of  the  grifie,  the  body  slightly  turned  to  the  right. 

2.  Describe  a  circle  in  rear  from  left  to  right,  the 
hand  as  far  as  possible  from  the  body,  and  return  to 
the  position  of  guard. 

When  the  troopers  execute  the  moulinets  well,  the  in- 
structor requires  them  to  execute  several  in  succession, 
uutil  the  command  guard. 

In  tierce — PoiNT. 

1  time,  3  motions. 

*  1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
POINT,  raise  the  hand  in  tierce  as  high  as  the  eyes, 
throw  back  the  right  shoulder,  carrying  the  elbow 
to  the  rear,  the  point  of  the  sabre  to  the  front,  the' 
edge  upwards. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  front,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length. 

•3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  quarts — Point. 

1  lime^  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
POINT,  lower  the  hand  in  quarte  near  the  right  hip, 


44  THE   TROOPER. 

the  thumb  extended  on  the  right  side  of  the  gripe, 
the  point  a  little  higher  than  the  wrist.* 

2.  Thrust  to  the  front,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  leuiith. 

3.  Keturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Left — Point. 
1  iimCy  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  commanci,  which  is 
POINT,  turn  the  head  to  the  left,  draw  back  the 
hand  in  tierce  towards  the  ri^ht,  at  the  hei<:;lit  of 
the  neck,  the  edge  upwards,  the  point  directed  to 
the  left. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  left,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length. 

3.  Keturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Eight — Point. 
1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
POINT,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  carry  the  hand 
in  quarto  near  the  left  breast,  the  edge  upwards, 
the  point  directed  to  the  right. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  right,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length. 

3.  Keturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 


*  The  first  position  of  the  hand  is  with  the  fin<Ter-naiIa  turned  to  ■ 
wards  the  hip,  the  edge  of  the  sabre  downward;  us  the  thrust  is 
made,  the  edge  is  turned  to  the  left  and  the  nails  brought  forward. 


THE   TROOPER.  4'5 

7?car— Point. 
1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
.POINT,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  and  rear,  hring 
the  hand  io  quarte  opposite  to  the  right  shoulder, 
the  arm  half  extended,  the  blade  horizontal,  the 
point  to  the  rear,  the  edge  upwards. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  rear,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length. 

3.  Ileturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry  left — Point. 
1  tlme^  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
POINT,  turn  the  head  to  the  left,  raise  the  hand  in 
tierce  npar  the  neck,  the  point  of  the  sabre  directed 
at  the  height  of  the  breast  of  a  man  on  foot. 

2.  Thrust  down  in  tierce. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry  right — Point. 
1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
POINT,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  carry  the  hand 
in  quarte  near  the  right  hip,  the  point  of  the  sabre 
directed  at  the  height  of  the  breast  of  a  man  on 
foot. 

2.  Thrust  in  quarte. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 


46  THE   TROOPER. 

Front — Cut. 
1  timCy  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  raise  the  eabre,  the  arm  half  extended,  the 
band  a  little  above  the  head,  the  edjjje  upwards,  the 
point  to  the  rear  and  higher  than  the  hand. 

2.  Cut,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Left—Qm. 
1  timej  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
cut,  turn  the  head  to  the  loft,  raise  the  sabre,  the 
arm  extended  to  the  right,  the  hand  in  quarte,  and 
as  high  as  the  head,  the  point  higher  than  the 
hand. 

2.  Cut  diagonally  to  the  left. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Right — Cut. 
*    1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
cut,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  carry  the  hand 
opposite  to  the  left  shoulder,  the  point  of  the  sabre 
upwards,  the  edge  to  the  left. 

2.  Exttnd  the  arm  quickly  to  its  full  length, 
give  a  back-handed  cut  horizontally. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

The  cuts  are  also  used  against  iufantry,  observing  to 
direct  them  downward. 


/ 


THE   TROOPER.  47 

Rear— GvT. 
1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  throwing  back  the 
right  shoulder;  carry  the  hand  as  high  as,  and  op- 
posite to  the  left  shoulder,  the. sabre  perpendicular, 
the  edge  to  the  left. 

2.  Extend  the  arm  quickly  to  its  full  length,  and 
give  a  back-hunded  cut  horizontally  to  the  rear. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Right,  in  tierce  and  quarte — Cut. 

1  time,  4  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  execute  the  1st  motion  of  riijhi  cut. 

2.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  r^^//ti  cnt. 

3.  Turn  the  hand  in  quarte,  and  cut  horizontally. 

4.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Left,  in  tierce  and  quarte — CuT. 
1  time,  4  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  execute  the  1st  motion  of  left  cut. 

2.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  left  cut. 

3.  Turn  the  hand  in  tierce,  and  cut  horizontally, 

4.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

r  Rear,  in  tierce  and  quarte — CuT. 

1  time,  4  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  ie 
CUT,  execute  the  1st  motion  of  rear  cut. 


48  THE   TROOPER. 

2.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  rear  cut. 

3.  Turn  the  hand  in  quarto,  and  cut  horizontally. 

4.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  tierce — Parry. 

1  timey  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
PARRY,  carry  the  hand  quickly  a  little  to  the  front 
and  right,  the  nails  downwards,  without  moving  the 
elbow;  the  point  inclined  to  the  front  as  high  as 
the  eyes,  and  in  the  direction  of  the  right  shoulder  j 
the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the  giipe,  and 
pressing  against  the  guard.  ^ 

2.  Kcturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  quarte — Parry. 
1  time  J  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
parry,  turn  the  hand  and  carry  it  quickly  to  the 
front  and  left,  the  nails  upwards,  the  edge  to  the 
left,  the  point  inclined  to  the  front,  as  high  as  the 
eyes,  and  in  the  direction  of  the  left  shoulder;  the 
thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  tte  gripe,  and 
resting  against  the  guard. 

2.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

For  the  head — Parry. 

1  timcj  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
PARRY,  raise  the  sabre  quickly  above  the  head;  the 


THE  TROOPER.  ^ 

arm  nearly  extended,  the  edge  upwards,  the  point 
to  the  left,  and  about  6  inches  higher  than  the 
hand. 

The  hand  is  carried  more  or  less  to  the  right,  left,  or 
rear,  according  to  the  position  of  the  adversary. 

2.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry  right — Parry. 
1  <tme,  8  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
parry,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  throwing  back 
the  rijjht  shoulder,  raise  the  sabre,  the  arm  ex- 
tended to  the  right  and  rear,  the  point  upwards, 
the  hand  in  tierce,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back 
of  the  gripe,  the  edge  to  the  left. 

2.  Describe  a  circle  quickly  oa  the  right  from 
rear  to  front,  the  arm  extended ;  turn  aside  the 
bayonet  with  the  back  of  the  blade,  bringing  the 
hand  as  high  as  the  head,  the  point  upwards. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry  left — Parry. 
1  timey  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  comaiand,  which  is  par- 
ry, turn  the  head  to  the  left,  raise  the  sabre,  the  arm 
extended  to  the  front  and  right,  the  point  upwards,, 
the  hand  in  tierce,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back 
of  the  gripe,  the  back  of  the  blade  to  the  front. 

2.  Describe  a  circle  quickly  on  the  left,  from 
front  to  rear  along  the  horse's  neck,  the  arm  ex- 

5 


50  THE   TROOPER. 

tended ;  turn  aside  the  bayonet  with  the  back  of 
the  blade,  bringing  the  hand,  still  in  tierce,  above 
the  left  shoulder. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

When  the  troopers  begin  to  execute  correctly  the  above 
cuts,  thrusts  and  parries,  the  instructor  requires  them 
to  make  the  application  of  them  by  combined  motions,  as 
follows ; 

In  tierce — Point  and  front  cut. 

In  quarte — Point  and  front  cut. 

Left — Point  and  cut. 

Right — Point  and  cut. 

Rear — Point  and  cut.- 

Against  infantry  right — Point  and  cut. 

Against  infantry  left — Point  and  cut. 

Carry— Sabre. 

As  it  is  prescribed,  and  carry  the  right  foot  by 
the  side  of  the  left. 

After  the  troopers  have  acquired  the  sabre-exercise  on 
foot,  they  must  practice  it  on  horseback,  at  all  the  gaits. 

Of  course  it  would  be  better  to  study  tlie  sabre-man- 
ual under  the  instruction  of  a  skillful  swordsman,  but  as 
perfect  accuracy  is  not  essential,  the  trooper  may  acquire 
all  that  is  necessary  by  attention  to  the  rules  given,  and 
frequent  practice. 

Manual  for  Colt's  revolver. 

The  preliminary  instructions  in  the  use  of  the 
Revolver  should  always  be  given  on  foot,  but  the 
following   Manual  will   apply  equally  well  either 


THE  TROOPER.  51 

on  foot  or  mounted.  In  the  instruction  on  foot, 
the  trooper  should  be  brought  to  the  position  of 
^'  fjfuard"  in  the  sabre  exercise,  so  as  to  assimilate 
his  motions  to  those  he  will  execute  when  mounted. 
In  the  following  Manual  for  Colt's  revolver,  the 
term  "  holster"  is  appliid  equally  to  the  holster  of 
the  saddle  or  its  substitute  on  the  belt. 

The  trooper  being  in  position,  the  instructor  will 
command: 

Draw  pistol. 
1  timef  2  motions. 

1.  At  tbe  command,  unbuckle  the  holster,  seize 
the  pistol  by  the  handle  with  the  last  three  fingers 
and  palm  of  the  hand,  the  fore-finger  extended  out- 
side the  holster,  so  as  to  be  placed  on  the  guard 
when  the  pistol  is  partially  withdrawn,  the  thumb 
on  the  back  of  the  handle. 

2.  At  the  command  ^^  two,"  draw  the  pistol  from 
the  holster,  placing  the  fore-finger  on  the  guard ; 
raise  it,  placing  the  right  wrist  at  the  height  and  6 
inches  in  front  of  the  right  shoulder;  the  barrel  of 
the  pistol  perpendicular,  guard  to  the  front. 

To  load  the  pistol  the  instructor  will  command : 

Load  in  six  times. — 1  load. 
1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  Place  the  pistol  in  the  left  hand,  the  little 
finger  on  the  point  of  the  kei/,  the  muzzle  inclined 
to  the  left,  and  front  and  upwards  at  an  angle  of 
sixt)/  degrees  to  the  horizon,   half  cock  the  pistol 


62  THE   TROOPER. 

with    right   thumb,  the   right  hand   grasping   the 
handle. 

2.  Let  go  the  pistol  with  the  left  hand,  turn  it 
with  the  right,  and  seize  it  with  the  left;  the  ham- 
mer between  the  thumb  and  fore  finger,  the  middle 
finger  on  the  guard,  the  last  two  fingers  and  palm  of 
the  hand  grasping  the  handle,  and  carry  the  right 
band  to  the  cartridge  box,  and  open  it, 

2.  Handle  cartridge. 

1  time,  1  motion. 

Take  a  cartridge  from  the  hox  with  the  thumb 
and  first  two  fingers  and  carry  it  to  the  mouth. 

3.  Tear  cartridge. 

Tear  off  the  end  of  the  cartridge  with  the  teeth 
and  carry  it  opposite  the  chamber  nearest  the  lever 
and  on  the  side  next  the  trooper. 

4.  Charge  cartridge. 

1  timcj  1  motion. 

Empty  the  powder  into  the  chamber  and  press 
the  ball  in  with  the  fore-finger,  seize  the  end  of  the 
lever  with  the  thumb  and  two  first  fingers  of  the 
right  hand. 

5.  Ram  cartridge. 

1  timcj  1  motion. 

Bring  down  the  lever  with  the  right  hand,  at  the 
same  time  turning  the  cylinder  with  the  thumb  and 
fore-finger  of  the  left,  until  the  charged  chamber 


THE  TROOPER.  63 

comos  in  prolongation  of  the  lever,  ram  home  the 
charg;e  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  tlie  cartridge 
hoXj  leaving  the  lever  in  the  charged  cliaraber. 

'Repeat  as  above  until  all  the  chambers  are  charged, 
and  after  charging  the  last  one  return  the  lever,  the 
thumb  and  two  first  fingers  remaining  on  the  end 
of  it. 

6.  Prime.     . 

1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  Seize  the  handle  of  the  pistol  with  the  right 
hand  below  the  left,  turn  it  with  the  guard  to  the 
front,  muzzle  to  the  left  and  front,  and  elevated 
sixft/  degrees  above  the  horizon,  and  place  it  in  the 
left  hand,  the  little  finger  on  the  point  of  the  kei/  ; 
turn  the  ci/linder  with  the  right  hand  until  it 
clicks,  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  cap  box  and 
open  it." 

2.  Take  a  cap,  press  it  on  the  exposed  cone,  turn 
the  cylinder  again  until  it  clicks,  and  carry  the 
right  hand  again  to  the  cap  box. 

Repeat  the  second  motion  until  the  priming  is 
completed  ;  then  seize  the  lyistol  at  the  handle  with 
the  right  hand,  let  down  the  hammer,  and  bring  the 
pistol  to  the  second  position  of  ^^  draw  pistol." 

To  fire  the  pistol  the  instructor  will  command : 

Ready. 

1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  Place  the  pistol  in  the  left  hand,  the  little 
finger  touching  the  key,  the  muzzle  to  the  left  and 


54  THE   TROOPER. 

front,  and  elevated  at  an  angle  of  sixfj/  degrees  to 
the  horizon,  the  guard  under,  the  thumb  on  the 
cock,  the  fore-finger  on  the  guard. 

2.  Cock  the  pistol  with  the  thumb  and  return  to 
the  second  position  of  ''  draw  pistol." 

Aim. 

1  time  J  1  motion. 

Lower  the  muzzle  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the 
front  of  the  neck,  half  extending  the  right  arm, 
place  the  fore-finger  lightly  on  the  trigger,  close  the 
left  eye  and  aim  horizontally. 

Fire. 

1  time  J 1  motion. 

Press  the  fore-finger  gradually,  but  quickly  on 
the  trigger,  fire  and  return  to  the  second  position  of 
"  draw  pistol." 

Should  the  instructor  desire  to  have  all  the  charges 
fired,  he  will  give  an  intimation  to  that  effect,  and  after 
bringing  the  trooper  to  the  position  of  "  ready  "  he  will 
command : 

1.  Aim.  2.  Fire 

Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed.  After 
firing  the  first  charge,  the  troopers  will  go  through 
the  motions  of  ^^  ready"  ^^  aim"  and  ^^jire"  and 
so  continue  until  the  last  charge  is  fired,  when  they 
will  return  to  the  second  position  of  ^^  draw  pistol." 

To  load  without  observing  the  times  and  motions,  the 
instructor  will  command : 


the  trooper.         55 

1.  Load  at  will.  2.  Load. 

Load  the  pistol  as  prescribed.  Prime  and  return 
to  the  second  position  of  "  draw  pistol.'^ 

When  the  troopers  execute  the  manual  well, 
they  will  be  instructed  to  come  to  the  position  of 
"  ready j^^  as  follows  : 

The  instructor  will  command  : 

Ready. 

1  time  J  1  motion. 

Move  the  right  hand  6  inches  to  the  front,  at 
the  same  time  lowering  the  muzzle  to  an  angle  of 
sixty  degrees  with  the  horizon,  cock  the  pistol  with 
the  right  thumb,  and  return  to  the  second  position 
of  ''  draw  pistol.'^ 

The  trooper  having  been  well  instructed  in  the  <*  man- 
ual" on  foot,  should  be  made  to  repeat  it  mounted,  first 
at  a  halt,  and  afterwards  at  the  dilFerent  gaits,  but  the 
progression  in  the  instruction  should  be  slow.  Every 
trooper  should  be  made  to  execute  all  the  motions  well  at 
each  gait  before  passing  to  a  more  rapid  one. 

Aiming,  and  especially  at  rapid  gaits,  requires  some 
remark.  Aiming  should  be  practiced  to  the  right,  left, 
front  and  rear.  In  aiming  to  the  right,  left  or  front,  at 
the  gallop,  or  at  speed,  the  trooper  should  rise  a  little  in 
the  stirrups  and  incline  the  body  slightly  to  the  front ;  the 
arm  should  be  half  extended  and  the  body  turned  in  the 
direction  of  the  object  aimed  at.  In  aiming  to  the  rear, 
the  right  shoulder  should  be  well  thrown  back  and  the 
right  arm  extended  to  its  full  length. 

Firing  should,  at  first,  be  executed  with  the  greatest 
care  and  deliberation.  The  "target"  should  be  8  feet 
high  and  3  feet  wide,  with  a  vertical  and  a  horizontal  line, 


56  THE   TROOPER. 

each  an  inch  wide,  intersecting  at  the  height  of  5  feet. 
The  vertical  line  should  pass  through  the  centre  of  the 
target.  The  troopers  should  be  formed  in  front  of,  facing, 
and  at  a  distance  of  100  paces  frora  the  target.  The 
firing  should  at  first  be  executed  at  the  distance  of  10 
paces,  but  the  distance  should  be  grfidually  increased  to 
40  paces.  A  peg  in  front  of  the  target  will  mark  the 
point  frora  which  the  trooper  is  to  fire. 

To  commence  the  firing,  the  instructor  will  cause  the 
trooper  on  the  right  to  move  5  paces  to  the  front,  turn  to 
tne  right,  move  30  paces  to  the  front,  turn  to  the  left, 
move  to  the  front  until  he  arrives  abreast  of  the  peg  in 
front  of  the  target,  then  turn  to  the  left  and  move  to  the 
front  until  he  comes  opposite  the  target,  turn  towards  it, 
cock  the  pi«tol,  aim  and  fire  deliberately  ;  then  turn  to  the 
left,  move  30  paces  to  the  front,  turn  to  the  left  again  and 
pass  to  the  rear  of  the  troop,  reload  and  take  his  place  on 
the  left  of  the  rank.  To  fire  to  the  right,  the  trooper  ex- 
ecutes what  he  did  in  firing  to  the  front,  except  that  he 
does  not  turn  towards  the  target  when  he  comes  in  front 
of  it.  To  fire  to  the  left  the  instructor  causes  the  trooper 
on  the  left  to  execute,  inversely,  what  the  trooper  on  the 
right  executed  in  firing  to  the  right.  To  fire  to  the  rear, 
the  trooper  on  the  right  executes  what  he  did  in  firing  to 
the  tront,  except  that  he  turns  from  the  target  instead  of 
towards  it,  and  aims  to  the  rear.  The  points  where  the 
troopers  are  required  to  turn  in  the  exercise  will  be 
marked  by  pegs.  At  first,  but  one  chamber  of  the  pistol 
should  be  discharged  by  each  trooper,  and  great  care 
should  be  taken  to  guard  against  frightening  the  horses. 
The  troopers  should  be  cautioned  to  be  gLnitle  with  them, 
and  soothe  them  when  excited.  When  a  young  horse  is 
very  timid,  he  should  be  accompanied  by  one  which  has 
courage.  When  the  troopers  are  suffic  ently  instructed  in 
the  exercise,  and  control  their  horses  well,  tliree  or  more 
targets  should  be  used.  They  should  at  first  be  placed  on 
the  same  line,  and  100  paces  apart;  but  the  distance 
should  be  gradually  reduced  to  50  paces. 


THE  TROOPER.  57 


To  load  the  repeating  rifle  (or  carbine.) 

Follow  the  directions  given  for  the  repeating  or  revolver 
pistol,  with  such  slight  modifications  as  the  difference  in 
size  and  shape  of  the  weapons  will  suggest  to  the  in- 
structor. 

To  load  with  powder  and  ball. 

The  commands  are : 

Load  in  5  times. 

1.  Load. 

2.  Handle  Cartridge. 

3.  Charge  Cartridge. 
4   Ram  Cartridge. 

5.  Prime. 

All  of  which  are  executed  as  directed,  except 
that,  at  the  second  command,  the  right  hand  grasps 
the  flask  and  brings  the  charger  to  the  chamber; 
and  at  the  third  command,  the  powder  being  intro- 
duced, tlie  same  hand,  letting  go  the  flask,  quickly 
inserts  the  ball  on  the  powder. 

But,  in  loading  the  rifle  or  carbine,  the  previous 
COMMAND,  instead  of  draw  pistol,  is  advance 
carbine  or  ADVANCE  RIFLE,  which  is*  executed  as 
in  the  manual  vf  the  breech  loader. 


58  THE   TROOPER. 


Manual  of  the  breech-loader. 

The  rifle  being  suspended  at  the  back,  muzzle  down- 
vrard,  by  the  shoulder-strap  from  left  to  right.  The  in- 
structor commands  : 

Advance  rifle. 
Seize  the  rifle  at  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the 
right  hand  ;  place  the  butt  on  the  right  thigh  and 
across  it;  the  barrel  sloping  easily  forward. 

To  load  the  rifle. 

The  commands  are : 

Load  in  3  times. 

1.  Load.  3.  Prime. 

2.  Charge  Cartridge. 

At  the  word  ''  load,"  place  the  piece  quickly  in 
the  left  hand,  which,  holding  the  reins,  grasps  the 
gun  near  and  below  the  band;  the^ muzzle  upward 
and  pointing  to  the  left ;  butt  downward,  to  the 
right  and  near  the  right  hip;  the  right  hand  seizes 
the  lever;  (2d,)  opens  the  breech;  (3d,)  opens  the 
cartridge-box. 

At  the  command,  ^^  Charge  cartridge,''  put 
the  cartridge  in  the  chamber,  shut  the  breech  by 
pressing  the  lever  firmly ;  then  half-cock,  brush  off 
the  old  cap,  and  open  the  cap-box;  each  motion 
with  thef  right  hand  and  in  the  order  prescribed. 

At  the  word  "Prime,"  place  the  cap,  press  it 
on  the  nipple  with  the  right  thumb,  let  the  cock 
gently  down,  and  with  the  right  hand  grasp  the 
small  of  the   stock. 


THE   TROOPER.  59 

To  load  the  self-priming  breech  loader. 

The  commands  are : 

Load  in  2   times. 
1.  Load.  2.  Charge  cartridge. 

Which  are  executed  as  above. 

If  the  intention  is  to  fire  immediately  after  load- 
ing, the  word  "ready"  is  given. 

At  this  command,  promptly  cock  the  rifle  with 
the  right  hand,  and  place  it  in  the  position  of  ad- 
vance rifle. 

Next,  the  word 

Aim. 

At  which  the  piece  is  leveled,  with  the  butt 
against  the  right  shoulder;  left  eye  closed,  the 
riffht  cast  alone;  the  si<!;hts  ;  the  riijht  fore-finger 
lightly  touching  the  trigger;  the  barrel  resting  on 
the  bridle-hand. 

Fire. 

At  this  word,  discharge  the  piece,  but  remain  at 
the  position  of  aim. 

If  the  intention  is  to  load  after  firing,  the  word 
"load,"  is  given  and  executed  by  the  times  as 
before,  or  the  command, 

Load   at  will. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  load  without  the 
times,  or  separate  commands,  and  then  advance 
rijies. 

If  the  design  is  not  to  reload,  instead  of  the 
command  load,  advance  rifles  is  ordered. 


60  THE    TROOPER. 

The  instructor  must  not  allow  the  pieces  to  be  held  in 
the  position  of  aim  more  than  a  moment  before  giving 
the  next  following  command ;  and,  until  the  horses  are 
accustomed  to  firing,  the  pieces  should  be  advanced 
after  being  discharged,  or  held  at  will. 

Not  intending  to  fire  after  aiming,  the  instructor 
will  order  advance  rifle,  (or  recover  arms,  when 
dismounted.^ 

Intending  to  handle  the  sabre  or  pistol,  the  com- 
mand is,  DROP  RIFLE. 

At  which  the  trooper  lowers  the  muzzle,  butt 
upward,  the  piece  behind  him. 

For  inspection  of  sabre^  see  Sabre-manual. 

To  inspect  the  revolver-pistol. 

The  command  is : 

Inspection  op  pistol. 

At  which  the  trooper  draws  pistol ;  (2d,)  turns 
his  hand,  bringing  first  the  right  and  then  the  left 
side  toward  the  inspector;  (3d,)  he  returns  pis- 
tol without  farther  command. 

To  return  pistol  at  the  word. 

The  command  is : 

RETURN    PISTOL. 

At  which  it  is  passed  helow  the  reins  into  the 
saddle-h'jhter  j  if  the  belt  or  side-holster  is  meant, 
it  must  be  named. 


THE   TROOPER.  61 

To  inspect  the  breech-loader  on  horse- 
back. 

The  command  is : 

Inspection  op  rifle  (or  carbine.) 

At  which  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  advance  ; 
(2d),  turned  to  exhibit  the  other  side;  and  (3d), 
DROPPED  as  directed. 

In  preparing  to  mount  or  dismount,  the  rifle  or  carbine 
is  passed  over  the  right  shoulder,  as  directed  in  the  arti- 
cles on  that  subject. 

For  further  infitruotion  in  the  mounted  rifle  exercise, 
see  Skirmish  Drill  in  the  sequel. 

The  position  of  raise  pistol  is  that  of  the  second  motion 
of  draw  pistol ;  see  Manual. 


CAVALRY  TACTICS. 


PART  SECOND. 


Clje  platoon  §rill. 

The  PLATOON  is  composed  of  either  12  or  16 
files,  according  to  the  numbers  present 

This  requires  24  or  32  troopers  in  two  ranks  j 
12  or  16  in  one  rank 

The  right  and  left  flanh-men  are  corporals ;  but, 
in  two  ranks,  the  rear  fiank-met^  are  privates. 

The  chief  of  plat' )on  (lieutenant  or  serg^'ant)  is 
posted,  when  in  line,  one  pace  (that  is,  ^  ne  yard) 
in  front  of  the  centre;  this  is  measured  from  the 
heads  of  the  front  horses  to  the  croup  or  tail  of  the 
horse  of  the  chief. 

The  senior  sergeant  one  pace  behind  the  third 
file  from  the  rijrhtj  the  second  sergeant  on  the  right 
of  the  corporal  of  the  right  flank;  this  sergeant  is 
right  particular  guidcj  and  not  counted  in  the 
furs  ;  the  third  sergeant  on  the  leJt  of  the  left 
corporal ;  the  left  sergeant  of  a  single  platoon  is 
counted  off. 


THE   PLATOON.  68 

But  when  two,  three  or  four  platooDS  are  orfranized 
as  a  squadron,  or  fraction  of  a  squadron,  the  left 
sergeant,  is  l<ft  purticalar  <jalde,  and  ni)t  counted. 

But,  in  this  case,  the  jint  and  second  aen/mnts 
are  the  principal  guides ;  tliey  are  posted  boliind 
the  third  file  from  each  flank.  The  tliird  and 
fourth  sert/eau^s  are  the  particular  guides  respec- 
tively of  the  right  and  left. 

All  nonconiuii'^sionod  officers,  excepting  the  prin- 
cipal and  pnrticulixr  guides,  and  those  coujmanding 
platoons,  arc  counted  in  the  fours. 

The  rank  and  fie,  composed  of  all  except  officers, 
chiefs  of  platoon  and  guides,  principal  and  particu- 
lar, are  counted  or  told  off  into  fours. 

On  the  left  of  the  first  and  right  of  the  second 
platoon  are  sergeants,  who  are  counted,  and  covered 
by  rear-rank  men;  when  these  sergeants  are  absent, 
corporals  take  their  places. 

The  fle.'cloiers  are  one  yard  in  rear  of  the  platoon 
or  troop ;  the  principal  guides  are  the  file-closers  of 
the  right  and  left. 

Two  platoons  are  a  division  or  company  ;  its  chief 
(like  the  chief  of  squadron)  is  posted,  when  in  line, 
one  yard  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  command. 

The  orgiinization  of  the  division,  troop  or  com- 
pany, is  as  follows : 

Posts  of  Officers  and  Non-Commissioned 
Officers  of  a  Company  acting  singly. 

The  ^aptain  in  front  of  the  centre,  one  pace  dis. 
tant  from  the  front  rank. 


64  THE   PLATOON. 

The  1st-  Lieutenant  in  rear  of  the  centre,  in  the 
rank  of  file-closers. 

The  2d  Lieutenant  commands  the  first  platoon ; 
in  the  absence  of  a  3d  Lieutenant  the  2d  platoon  is 
commanded  by  the  senior  Sergeant.  The  chiefs  of 
platoons  are  posted  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre 
of  their  respective  platoons. 

The  1st  Sergeant  in  rear  of  the  right,  in  the  rank 
of  file-closers. 

The  2d  and  3d  Sergeants  on  the  right  and  left  of 
the  troop,  not  told  off. 

A  non-commissioned  officer  is  posted  on  the  left 
of  the  1st  platoon,  and  on  the  right  of  the  2d. 

Corporals,  next  to  the  Sergeants  who  are  on  the 
flanks  of  platoons. 

The  Saddler  and  Farrier  in  rear  of  the  left  of 
the  troop  8  paces  retired  from  the  line  of  file- 
closers  ;  and  the  Buglers  20  paces  in  rear  of  the 
centre.  * 


Posts  of  the  Officers  and  Non-Commis- 
sioned  Officers  of  a  Squadron  in  line. 

The  Captain  commanding  is  posted  at  the  centre 
of  the  squadron,  the  croup  of  his  horse  one  pace 
in  front  of  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front 
rank. 

The  2d  Captain  8  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of 
the  squadron.  He  is  charged  with  the  alignment 
of  the  rear  rank  and  file  closers. 

The  senior   1st  Lieutenant   commands   the  1st 


THE  PLATOON.  65 

plafoon,  the  other  1st  Lieutenant  commands  the 
4th  plantoon. 

The  senior  2d  Lieutenant  commands  the  2d 
platoon/  the  other  2d  Lieutenant  commands  the  8d 
platoon. 

Each  of  these  officers  is  posted  at  the  centre  of 
his  platoon,  with  the  croup  of  his  horse  one  pace 
in  front  of  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front 
rank. 

The  senior  Serfijcant  is  posted  behind  the  3d  file 
from  the  right  of  the  Lst  platoon ;  he  is  the  princi- 
pal guide  when  the  column  of  squadrons  is  left  in 
front. 

The  2d  Sergeant  behind  the  8d  file  from  the  left 
of  the  4th  platoon ;  ho  is  principal  guide  when  the 
column  of  squadrons  is  right  in  front. 

The  3d  Sergeant  is  posted  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  squadron ;  he  is  not  counted  in 
the  rank. 

The  4th  Sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank; 
he  is  not  counted  in  the  rank. 

The  5th  Sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  1st  platoon. 

The  6th  Sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  2d  phitoon. 

The  7th  Sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  3d  platoon. 

The  8th  Sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  4th  platoon. 

The  heads  of  the  horses  of  all  the  file-closers 
are  at  one  pace  from  the  croup  of  those  of  the  rear 
rank. 

The  Corporals  are  posted  in  tine  front  rank,  on 
the  right  and  left  of  their  respective  platoons,  and 
supply  the  places  of  Sergeants  when  necessary.- 

When  guidons  are  used,  they  are  carried  by. the 
5* 


66  THE  PLATOON. 

non-commissioned  officers  on  the  left  of  the  1st  and 
3d  platoons. 

The  flag  of  the  guidon  is  swallow-tailed,  3  feet  5  inches  from  the 
lance  to  the  end  of  the  swallow-tail ;  15  inches  to  the  fork,  and  2 
feet  3  inches  measured  on  fhe  lance.  Half  red  and  half  white;  the 
red  above.  On  the  red  the  arms  of  the  State  or  the  initial  letters. 
On  the  white  the  letter,  number  or  name  of  the  company. 

The  lances  of  standards  and  guidons  are  nine  feet  long,  mcluding 
spear  and  ferule. 

The  Squadron  in  columns  of  twos  or 
fours. 

The  Captains  commanding  march  on  the  side  of 
the  guides,  and  4  paces  from  the  flank,  and  abreast 
of  the  centre  of  their  squadrons. 

The  second  Captains  march  on  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guides,  4  paces  from  the  flank,  and  abreast 
of  the  centre  of  their  squadrons. 

The  1st  Lieutenant  of  each  squadron  marches  at 
the  head  of  the  1st  platoon,  one  pace  in  advance  of 
the  first  files,  having  the  particular  guide  of  the 
right  on  his  ri^ht. 

The  Chiefs  of  the  other  platoons  march  on  the 
side  of  the  guides,  one  pace  from  the  flank  of  the 
column,  and  abreast  of  their  first  files;  the  file- 
closers  march  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide, 
one  pace  from  the  flank,  and  on  a  line  with  the 
centre  of  their  platoons. 

They  all  manch  in  a  similar  manner  on  the 
flanks  of  the  column  when  the  left  is  in  front;  aad, 
in  this  case,  it  is  the  junior  1st  Lieutenant  who 
marches  in  the  column  at  the  head  of  the  4th  pla- 
toon of  each  squadron.  • 


THE   PLATOON.  67 

The  particular  guide,  who  iir  line  is  posted  on 
the  left  of  the  squadron,  marches  behind  the  last 
files  of  the  squadron;  when  the  column  is  left  in 
front,  he  takes  post  on  the  left  of  the  officer  com- 
manding the  4th  platoon,  one  pace  in  front  of  the 
left  file. 

When  the  nature  of  the  ground  obliges  the  offi- 
cers and  file-closers  to  enter  the  column,"the  move- 
ment is  made  successively ;  the  Captains  command- 
ing, and  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  place  themselves  at 
the  head  ',  the  second  Captains,  and  the  file-closers, 
in  the  rear  of  their  respective  troops. 


Order  in  Column  of  platoons. 

• 

In  this  order,  the  distance  from  one  platoon  to 
another,  measured  from  the  men  of  one  front  rank 
to  those  of  auother  front  rank,  is  equal  to  the  front 
of  a  platoon  ;  that  is  to  say,  it  is  12  paces  if  the 
platoons  are  of  twelve  files.  Subtracting  the  depth 
of  two  ranks,  which  is  6  paces,  there  remain  6 
paces  from  the  croup  of  the  horses  of  the  rear  rank 
of  one  platoon,  to  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  next  platoon,  a  distance  which  is 
equal  to  half  of  the  front  of  a  platoon. 

In  SINGLE  RANK  FORMATION,  Subtracting  3 
paces  or  yards  from  12,  there  remain  9  yards  as  the 
distance  between  platoons  from  head  to  croup;  or 
with  platoons  of  16  troopers,  13  yards. 

The  Captains  commanding  march  on  the  side  of 
the  guides,  four  paces  from  the  flank  of  the   col- 


68  THE  PLATOON. 

umn,  and  habitually  abreast  of  the  centre  of  their 
squadrons. 

Tlie  second  Captains  march  on  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guide,  4  paces  from  the  flank  of  the  column, 
and  abreast  of  the  centre  of  their  squadrons. 

The  1st  atid  2d  Lieutenants  march  at  the  centre 
of  their  platoons,  one  pace  from  the  front  rank; 
other  chiefs  of  platoon  in  front  of  centre  of  pla- 
toons; those  who  command  the  platoons  at  the 
head  of  v'squadrons,  preserve,  besides  their  distance, 
the  ground  necessary  to  enable  each  squadron,  in 
wheeling  into  line,  to  maintain  its  interval. 

The  Sergeants,  who  are  file-closers,  march  on  the 
side  opposite  to  the  guides,  behind  the  third  file  of 
their  platoons. 

When  the  column  marches  right  in  front,  the 
particular,  guide  of  the  right  of  each  squadron 
marches  on  the  right  of  the  1st  platoon  ;  and  the 
particular  guide  on  the  left  places  himself  as  file- 
closer  behind  the  2d  file  from  the  left  of  the  4th 
platoon. 

The  post  of  these  Sergeants  is  the  reverse  when 
the  left  is  in  front. 

The  squadron  being  composed  of  04  files,  when 
it  is  broken  into  sections,  the  1st  Lieutenant  of 
each  squadron  marches  at  the  head  of  the  1st  sec- 
tion of  the  1st  platoon;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  pla- 
toons, remain  on  the  side  of  the  guiiles,  one  pace 
from  and  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank  of  their  1st 
section. 

The  file-closers  who  command  the  2d  sections, 
march  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  guides,  one  pace 
from  and  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank. 


THE   PLATOON.  69 

The  posts  of  the  commandants  of  sections  is  the 
reverse  when  the  left  is  in  front. 

Column  of  divisions  (or  companies.) 

The  Captains  are  posted  as  in  column  of  platoons. 

The  senior  1st  Lieutenant  commands  the  1st 
division,  the  other  1st  Lieutenant  the  2d;  they  re- 
main, however,  at  the  centre  of  their  platoons. 
^  All  the  other  officers  and  Sergeants  of  each  divi- 
sion are  posted  as  prescribed  in  the  order  in  column 
of  platoons,  the  file-closers  remaining  in  their  places, 
on  whatsoever  side  the  guide  may  be. 

There  being  a  sufficient  number  of  officers  and  troopers 
present,  they  may  be  formed  as  a  division  or  squadron, 
and  the  various  posts  taken  as  directed;  but  before  at- 
tempting the  drill  of  the  squadron,  that  of  the  platoon 
must  be  well  understood.  If  competent  officers  can  be 
found  for  the  purpose,  each  Instructor  and  assistant 
should  be  limited  to  12  or  16  men.  But  this  not  being 
always  possible,  2  or  more  platoons  may  be  instructed  by 
ONE  OFFICER  and  ONE  ASSISTANT,  the  wbolc  for  the  pres- 
ent forming  one  single  platoon.  The  other  officers  may  re- 
main at  the  posts  assigned  them,  or,  for  the  time  bein"-, 
ride  in  the  nink  of  file-closers.  ° 

The  drill-call  being  sounded,  the  horses  are  conducted 
to  the  drill-groand,  as  directed  in  the  first  lessons,  none 
being  mounted  but  the  instructor  and  assistant.  The  for- 
mer commands : 

ATTENTION ! 
IN  TWO  RANKS, 
FORM  PLATOON. 
To  form  company  or  squadron,  those  words  will  be  sub- 
stituted for  ''platoon:'     To  form  in  one  rank,  one  rank 
will  be  named  instead  of  two. 


70  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  last  command,  the  flank  Seroreants  (guides  of 
the  right  and  left)  will  take  post  at  the  flanks  of  the  pro- 
posed h"ne  ;  the  1st  Corporal  on  the  left  of  the  right  guide; 
the  2d  Corporal  on  the  right  of  tlie  left  euide ;  the  tallest 
trooper  (man  and  horse  considered)  will  take  his  place  on 
the  left  of  the  1st  Corporal,  and  the  lowest  on  the  right  of 
the  2d  Corporal ;  the  next  tallest  will  cover  the  1st  Cor- 
poral, and  the  next  lowest  the  2d  Corporal  ;  these  latter 
being  of  the  rear  rank,  will  form  six  yards  behind  ths 
Corporals. 

Thus  the  platoon  will  be  formed  with  the  tallest  on  the 
right. 

The  file-closers  are  six  yards  in  rear,  posted  as  directed  ; 
the  assistant  instructor  ten  yards  in  front  of  centre,  facing 
the  platoon. 

The  instructor,  posted  where  his  presence  is  most 
wanted,  commands : 

1.  Attention.  3.  Front. 

2.  Right — Dress. 

He  then  commands: 

In  each  rank — Count  (by)  fours. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  comraaud,  which  is  FOURS, 
the  men  count  in  each  rank,  from  right  to  left,  pro- 
nouncing in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice,  in  the  same 
tone,  without  hurry,  and  without  turning  the  head ; 
one.,  two,  three,  four^  according  to  the  place  which 
each  one  occupies. 

The  troopers  then  mount  by  the  times,  and  without 
explanation. 

At  the  command  form — ranks,  the  assistant 
instructor  moves  forward,  turns  to  the  right-about, 
and  places  himself  at  the  centre  of  the  platoon,  the 
croup  of  his  horse  one  pace  from  the  head  of  the 


THE   PLATOON.  71 

horses  of  tbe  front  rank.      The  file-closers   follow 
the  rear  rank. 

General  principles  of  alignment. 

The  troopers,  to  align  themselves,  should  regu- 
late their  shoulders  upon  those  of  the  men  on  the 
side  of  the  alignment,  and  fix  the  eyes  upon  the 
line  of  the  eyes,  so  as  to  perceive  the  breast  of  the 
second  trooper  of  their  rank  on  the  side  of  the 
alignment;  for  this  purpose,  they  should  turn  the 
bead,  remaining  square  upon  their  horses,  feel 
lightly  the  boot  of  the  man  on  the  side  of  the 
alignment,  and  keep  the  horses  straight  in  the 
ranks  that  all  may  have  a  parallel  direction. 

The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank,  independently  of 
the  alignment,  should  be  exactly  behind  their  file- 
leaders,  and  in  the  same  direction,  taking  care  to 
preserve  the  distance  of  2  feet  from  head  to  croup. 

Successive  alignment  of  files  in  the 
platoon. 

The  two  files  of  the  right  or  of  the  left  are  moved  for- 
ward 10  paces,  and  aligned  parallel  to  the  platoon  by  the 
commands:  1.  Two  files  from  right  (or  left)  forward; 
2.  Mabch;  3.  Halt;  4.  Right  {or  left) — Dress;  5.  Front. 
The  instructor  then  commands : 

1.  B^  the  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

2.  Front.  • 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
DRESS,  each  file  moves  forward  successively  and 
steadily,  the  troopers  turning  the  head  to  the  riglit, 


tZ  THE   PLATOON. 

and  taking  the  l.'ust  steps  slowly,  in  order  to  arrive 
abreast  of  the  files  already  frini'd  withoiu  passing 
boyond  the  alignment,  observing  'hen  to  halt,  give 
the  hand,  relax  the  legs,  and  keep  the  head  to  the 
riirht  until  the  command  front. 

Each  file  executes  the  ?ame  movement  when  the 
preceding  one  has  arrived  on  the  base  of  alignment, 
so  that  only  one  file  may  align  itself  at  the  same 
time. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  front  when  the  last 
file  is  aligned. 

"When  the  troopers  execute  correctly  these  nlignmcnts, 
this  instruction  is  repented  in  piviiifr  tlie  two  files  of  the 
right  an  oblique  direction.  For  this  purpose,  the  two 
files  liHvinfj;  marched  forward  4  pnces,  ns  Ims  been  pre- 
scribed, execute  a  /in//  (urn  to  t/ie  ri</fit,  or  to  (he  lef(^  and 
march  (J  paces  in  this  new  direction. 

The  platoon  beinj;  unmasked,  the  remninder  of  the 
movement  is  executed  by  tlie  commands  and  follDwinp;  the 
principle?  prescribed  ;  each  file,  as  it  arrives  nearly  oppo- 
site the  place  it  is  to  occupy,  executes  a  ht/f-(uni  (o  (/if 
rig/i(,  or  (o  (lie  left,  so  that  bavin  x  left  the  platoon  ty 
one  straight  line,  it  arrives  upon  the  new  alignment  by 
another. 

The  two  files  of  the  right,  or  of  the  left,  are  made  to 
rein-back  4  paces,  and  align  themselves  parallel  to  the 
platoon  and  opposite  the  place  they  oecupieil  in  it,  by  the 
commands:  Two  Jihg  from  (fie  rii//t(  [or  left)  bn:/\U'ards ; 
2.  M  Alien;  3.  Halt;  4.  liiff/it  (or  lfJ'()—l)iiKss;  5.  Fuont. 
The  instructor  theu  commands: 

1.  By  fih— right  (or  left)  haclcicards — Dress. 
.2.  Front. 


THE  PLATOON.  73 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
DRESS,  each  file  reins  back  successively,  keeping 
perfectly  straight,  the  troopers  turning  the  head  to 
the  right,  and  passing  a  little  to  the  rear  of  the 
files  already  formed,  in  order  to  come  up  abreast  of 
them  by  a  movement  to  the  front,  which  renders  the 
alignment  more  easy. 

The  troopers  of  the  front  rank  rein  back  slowly, 
those  of  the  rear  rank  regulate  themselves  upon 
the  file-leaders,  preserving  always  their  proper  dis- 
tance. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  alignment  to  the  rear  gives  the  means  of  repairing 
a  fault  hy  returning  to  the  alignment  when  it  has  been 
pasted  Over ;  but  it  should  he  avoided  as  much  as  possible. 

The  alignment  is  fhen  executed  by  twos  (or  by  fours). 
For  this  purpose,  the  two  or  four  files  of  the  right  move 
forward  as  has  been  prescribed,  and  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Bj/  twos  (or  hj/  fours) — right  (or  left) — Dress. 

2.  Front. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
DRESS,  the  tiles  align  themselves  successively  by 
twos  (or  by  fours),  following  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  alignment  by  file,  being  particular 
to  set  out  and  arrive  upon  the  alignment  together. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  troopers  align  them- 
selves on  the  breast  of  the  bccond  mau  towards  ihe  side 

7 


74  THE   PLATOON. 

of  the  nlignmcnt.  ntifl  not  upon  the  extremity  of  the 
rank  (which  wuuM  prevent  their  remaining  sqnare  in 
their  seat^)  ;  that  they  arc  neither  too  much  opened  nor 
closed  ;  and,  finally,  that  those  of  the  rear  rank  are 
exactly  heliind  their  tile-leaders.  The  troopers  are  also 
required  to  align  themselves  promptly,  that  the  horses 
may  not  be  kept  a  long  time  gathered. 

When  a  platoon  is  not  aliened,  it  arises  from  the  fact, 
generally,  tliat  the  horses  are  not  straight  in  the  ranks. 

Wlien  a  platoon  dres«es  to  the  right,  if  the  left  wing  is 
in  rear,  it  is  presumed  that  most  of  the  horses  are  turned 
to  the  left;  it  is  necessary  to  observe  if  this  is  the  case, 
and  to  command  the  troopers  to  carry  the  hand  slightly 
to  the  right,  at  the  same  time  closing  the  right  leg,  which 
brings  the  horse  upon  the  alignment 

If,  after  this  movement,  some  of  the  troopers  are  still 
too  much  in  rear  to  perpeive  the  line  of  the  rank,  they 
move  forward  after  squaring  their  horses. 

When  a  platoon  dresses  to  the  right,  if  the  left  wing  is 
in  advance,  it  is  presumed  that  the  horses  are  turned  to 
the  right:  the  troopers  are  then  re(juired  to  carry  the 
hand  to  the  left,  closing  at  the  snnu'  time  the  left  leg, 
•which  causes  the  horse  to  step  back  to  his  proper  place. 

If,  after  this  movement,  some  troopers  are  still  in  ad- 
vance, they  rein  directly  back  until  they  can  perceive 
only  the  line  of  the  rank. 

In  dressing  to  the  left,  the  same  faults  are  corrected 
by  inverse  means. 

During  the  alignment,  the  instructor  places  himself  in 
front  of  the  troopers,  to  be  assured  that  they  execute  the 
movement  steadily,  and  do  not  turn  the  heud  more  than 
is  prescribed  ;  that  they  do  not  open  the  knee  in  order  to 
feel  the  boot;  that  they  prevent  their  horses  from  crowd- 
ing the  troopers  already  formed;  that  they  take  ti»e  last 
Bteps  fclowly  ;  that  they  align  themselves  without  losing 
time  as  they  arrive  ;  and  that  they  give  the  hand  and 
replace  the  legs  immediately  after  being  aligned. 

For    this   exercise    alone,    the   assistant   instructor   is 


THE   PLATOON.  75 

placed  perpendicularly  to  the  flank  of  the  platoon,  facing 
to  the  left,  if  the  alignment  is  to  the  right,  and  facing 
to  the  right,  if  the  alignment  is  to  tiie  left.  He  observes 
that  the  troopers  halt  on  the  same  linp,  and  rectifies  the 
alignment  in  a  low  voice.  At  the  command  front,  he 
resumes  his  place  before  the  platoon. 

The  instructor  insists  upon  all  tbese  principles;  but  tho 
alignments  will  be  occasionally  interrupted  by  marches 
in  column,  in  order  to  calm  the  horses. 

Alignment  of  the  platoon. 

The   platoon  being  in  line,  the  instructor  places  the 
corporal  of  the  flank  on  which  he  wishes  to  align  it  in 
such  a  position  that  no  trooper  will  be  forced  to  rein-back 
and  commands:  '  *       ^ 

1.  Riyht  (or  left) — Dress.  2.  Front. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
DRESS,  all  the  troopers  align  themselves  promptly 
but  with  steadiness. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

In  all  the  alignments,  the  corporal  of  the  opposite  flank 
aligns  himself  promptly  on  the  one  towards  the  side  of 
the  alignment,  without  respect  to  the  individual  align- 
ment of  the  troopers. 

To  open  and  close  the  ranks. 

To  open  the^ranks,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Rear  rank  open  order.  3.  Rujht--T)K^ss 

2.  March.  4.  Frojjt, 


76  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  command  MARcn,  tlie  front  rank  remains 
immoveable,  the  rear  rank  reins-back  0  paces,  each 
trooper  preserving  the  direction  of  his  file-leader. 
The  file-closer  reins-back  until  he  is  G  paces  from 
the  rear  rank.  The  assistant  instructor  moves  for- 
ward G  paces,  and  faces  the  platoon  by  a  tum- 
about  to  the  left 

At  the  command  riglxt — DUESS,  the  rear  rank 
dresses  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

To  close  the  rank,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Rear  rank  close  order.  3.  Rujht — Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  marcii,  the  rear  rank  closes 
upon  the  front  to  the  distance  of  2  feet,  each 
trooper  taking  care  to  preserve  the  direction  of  his 
file-leader.  The  assistant  instructor  resumes  his 
place  at  the  centre  of  the  platoon  by  a  turn-about 
to  the  right,  and  the  file-closer  takes  his  proper 
distance  from  the  rear  rank. 

At  the  command  j-ight — DRESS,  the  platoon  is 
aligned  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

To  rein-back  the  platoon. 

The  platoon  being  halted,  the  instnictor  commands : 

1.  Platoon  b(ichvHir(h. 

2.  Guide  right  (or  left). 


THE  PLATOON.  7t 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  reia- 
back  at  once,  regulating  their  movements  by  those 
of  the  guide. 

"When  the  platoon  Las  reined  back  some  steps,  the  in- 
Btructor  commands : 

1.  Platoon.  3.  RujhL{ox  Ze/i)— Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

.   To  break  the  platoon  by  file. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  the  instructor  commands: 
1.  By  file.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  file,  the  troopers  of  the  first 
file  gather  thtir  horses,  and  the  others  successively, 
as  soon  as  the  file  on  the  right  is  in  motion. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  the 
right  moves  straight  to  the  front;  it  is  followed 
by  the  other  file;  each  file  moves  off  when  the 
haunches  of  the  rear  rank  horse  of  the  file  which 
has  broken,  arrives  at  the  herd  of  the  horses  of  the 
front  rank;  each  file  marches  6  paces  straight  to 
the  front,  makes  a  quarter-turn  to  the  ri(/htj  and 
marches  in  the  new  direction  until  it  reaches  its 
place  in  the  column,  when  it  makes  a  quarter-turn 
to  the  left. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  troopers  gather  their 
horses  and  break  successively,  only  at  the  moment  pre- 
scribed ;  tiiat  the  first  file  moves  straight  to  t lie  front; 
that  the  other  files  never  march  less  than  six  paces  before 
obliquing,  and  do  not  make  more  than  a  quarter-turn  to 
the  riylu  or  to  the  left,  in  order  to  rejoin  the  column. 


78  THE   PLATOON. 

To  break  the  pUtoon  by  the  loft,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means, 
at  the  commands: 

1.  By  files  from  the  left.  2.  March. 

Direct  march  in  column  by  file. 

The  troopers  should  keep  their  horses  straifrht, 
and  march  at  a  free  and  equul  ^:iit;  they  should 
keep  their  eyes  to  the  front,  and  continue  in  the 
direction  of  the  column,  so  as  to  perceive  only  the 
trooper  who  marches  before  them,  to  march  at  the 
same  gait  with  him,  preserving  always  the  distance 
of  two  feet  from  head  to  croup,  that  his  own  horse 
may  not  tread  upon  the  heels  of  the  horse  in  front. 
The  distance  should  be  recovered  gradually  when 
lost. 

The  greater  the  depth  of  the  column,  the  more  atten- 
tion sliould  the  instructor  pay  to  the  t-quality  of  the  gaits, 
and  the  preservation  of  the  distances. 

Change  of  direction. 

To  change  the  direction,  the  instructor  commands: 

Head  of  column — Right  (or  left). 

At  which  the  assistant  instructor  orders  : 

Right  (or  /e/0— Turn. 

At ^ the  word  turn,  the  leading  tile  turns  to  the 
left  (or  right),  over  an  arc,  or  circular  path  of  3 
yards,  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  original 
one.     All  turn  in  succession  at  the  same  point. 


THE  PLATOON.  79 

To  halt,  and  to  commence  the  march  in 
column. 

The  column  marching,  to  halt  it,  the  instructor  com- 
mands: 

1.   Column.  *     2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  HALT,  the  troopers  stop  to- 
gether in  the  direction  of  their  file-leaders  and  at 
their  distances,  taking  care  to  prevent  their  horses 
from  stepping  back. 

^0  move  off,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.   Column  forward.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  move  off 
steadily  together. 

The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor  wishes  it 
to  commence  the  move  at  a  trot,  he  commands : 

Column  forward,  trot — March. 

The  order  may  then  be  given  either  to  WALK,  or 
the  halt  may  be  ordered. 

Individual  oblique  march. 

The  column  marching  by  file,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  oblique.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  trooper  executes 
a  quarter-turn  to  the  left,  and  moves  forward  in  his 
new  direction,  all  following  parallel  lines,  and  regu- 


80  THE  PLATOON. 

lating  themselves  towards  the  right,  in  order  to 
keep  on  the  same  line,  and  to  preserve  their  dis- 
tances on  that  side. 

To  return  to  the  primitive  direction,  the  instructor 
command:^ : 

J'ORWARD. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  return  to  the 
original  direction,  by  a  quarter-turn  to  the  rUjht,  in 
advancing,  and  move  forward  in  the  direction  of 
their  file-leaders. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  file, 
to  form  it  to  the  front,  to  the  left,  or 
on  right,  into  line. 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  it  to  the 
front  into  line,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Front  into  line.  4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  continues 
to  march  straight  forward.  The  others  oblique  im- 
mediately to  the  left,  march  in  this  new  direction, 
and  each  file  makes  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right  on 
coming  opposite  the  place  he  is  to  occupy  in  the 
platoon. 

When  the  first  file  has  marched  20  paces,*  the 
instructor  commands  halt.     At  this  command,  it 


*  This  is  increased  to  30  pares  (yards)  in  tho  squadron  drill;  it  is 
often  much  diminished,  especially  when  obstacles  interfere. 


THE   PLATOON.  81 

halts  square  to  the  front;  the  other  files  come  up 
and  form  successively  on  the  left  of  the  first,  and 
dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  right — dress,  imme- 
diately after  halt,  and  commands  front  when  the  last 
file  is  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is 
executed  following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Frmit  into  line ;  2.  March; 
3.   Halt  ;  4.  Left — Dress  :  5.  Front. 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  it  into  line 
upon  its  left  flank,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Left  into  line.  4.  Riyht — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  turns  to 
the  left  and  moves  straight  forward  ;  the  other  files 
continue  to  march  on,  and  at  2  paces  before  arriving 
opposite  the  place  they  are  to  occupy  in  the  platoon, 
they  turn  successively  to  the  left. 

When  the  first  file  has  marched  20  pices,  the 
instructor  commands  halt.  At  this  command  it 
halts;  the  other  files  come  up  and  form  successively 
on  the  left  of  the  first,  and  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  rir/hf — dress,  imme- 
diately after  HALT,  and  commands  front  when  the  last 
file  is  aligned. 

He  observes  that  the  troopers  turn  exactly  upon  the 
point  indicated,  and  before  arriving  at  it  do  not  incline  to 
the  side  of  the  formation. 


82  THE   PLATOON. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  to  form  in  line  on 
the  rifrht  flank,  the  movement  is  executed,  following  the 
gftme  priiiciples,  l)ut  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands: 

1.  Hi yht  into  line;  2.  March;  3.  Halt;  4.  Left — Dress; 
6.   Fkont. 

^Vhen  necessary,  the  front  may  be  made  to  the  left  or 
right  in  less  time  and  space,  by  the  commands,  Front, 
Halt. 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  in  line 
upon  the  prolongation  and  in  advance  of  its  right  flank, 
the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Oti  right  into  line.  4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front.  ♦ 

3.  Halt.    ' 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  turns  to 
the  right  and  moves  straight  forward ;  the  other 
files  continue  to  march  on,  and  each  turns  succes- 
sively to  the  right,  at  one  pace  beyond  the  point 
where  the  one  preceding  turned. 

When  the  first  file  has  marched  20  paces,  the 
instructor  commands  halt.  At  this  command  it 
halts :  the  other  files  come  up  and  form  succes- 
sively on  the  left  of  the  first,  and  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  right — dress,  imme* 
diately  a,fter  halt,  and  commands  front  when  the  last 
file  is  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  to  form  in  line  upon 
the  prolongation  and  in  advance  of  its  left  flank,  the 
mcivement  is  executed,  followi'ig  the  same  principles,  but 
by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands:   1.    On  left  into  line; 

2.  March;  3.  Halt:  4.  Left — Dress;  5.  Front. 


THE  PLATOON.  83 

In  ordering  "'On  right  (or  on  left)  into  line,^^  strong 
emphasis  is  laid  on  the  word  On,  to  prevent  the  men  from 
mistaking  this  for  the  previous  movement. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  twos  or  by 
fours. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  i?y  twos  (or  hi/ fours).  3.   Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  or  four 
files  of  the  right  move  straight  to  the  front;  they 
are  followed  by  the  other  files,  who  move  off  when 
the  haunches  of  the  horses  of  the  rear  rank  are  oa 
a  line  with  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front  rank. 
These  files  march  straight  forward  6  paces,  execute 
a  guarfer-turn  to  the  right  by  trooper,  and  march 
in  tbis  direction  until  they  meet  the  column,  when 
they  take  their  places  in  it  by  making  a  quarter- 
turn  to  the  left. 

The  command  guide,  left,  is  given  immediately  after  that 
of  MAUCII,  that  the  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  frout  rank 
of  twos  or  fours,  who  becomes  guide  of  the  column,  may 
take  at  once  a  point  of  direction. 

After  breaking  by  twos,  Nos.  two  and /owr  being  guides, 
keep  their  eyes  to  the  frout.  After  reaching  the  column, 
Nos.  one  and  three  dress  upon  them. 

After  breaking  by  fours,  Nos.  four  become  guides  of 
each  rank. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  the  left,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted, following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means, 
at  the  commands:  1.  /?//  txoos  from  the  left  (or  by  fours)  ; 
2.  March;  3.  Guide  right. 


84  THE   PLATOON. 


Direct  march  in  column  by  twos  or  by 
fours. 

The  principles  of  the  direct  march  in  column  by  file, 
are  applicable  to  the  column  by  twoi  or  by  fours. 

The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  first  rank  of  twos 
(or  fours)  is  guide  of  the  column  3  he  keeps  his 
eyes  to  the  front,  moves  straight  forward,  and 
marches  so  that  the  troopers  of  his  rank  may  be  at 
1  pace  from  the  croup  of  the  sub-instructor's  horse. 
The  trooper  on  the  left  of  each  of  the  other  ranks, 
who  is  guide  of  his  rank,  preserves  the  head  direct, 
and  keeps  at  the  distance  of  2  feet  from  his  file- 
leader,  and  in  the  same  direction;  the  other  troopers 
of  each  rank  look  occasionally  towards  the  guide,  in 
order  to  align  themselves  and  regulate  upon  him 
their  rate  of  march.  They  feel  lightly  the  boot 
towards  that  side,  and  yield  to  all  pressure  coming 
from  it.  When  the  march  is  by  four,  they  resist 
all  pressure  coming  from  the  opposite  direction. 

When  the  platoon  marches  left  in  front,  the  guide  is  to 
the  right,  and  in  other  respects  the  troopers  conform  to 
the  same  principles. 

Change  of  direction. 

The  column  marching  by  twos  or  by  fours,  right  or  left 
in  front,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Head  of  column  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left). 

At  this  <:ommand  the  assistant-instructor  commands: 


THE  PLATOON.  85 

1.  if//;— -Turn.  2.  Forward. 

At  the  first  part'of  the  first  command,  which  is 
left,  the  left  trooper,  who  is  pivot,  prepares  to  turn 
at  the  same  gait,  the  trooper  of  the  opposite  side  to 
increase  his.  The  walk  is  accelerated,  but  the  trot 
is  avoided,  if  possible,  until  ordered. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  turn, 
the  first  rank  of  twos  or  fours  turns  to  the  left. 
The  pivot  turns  at  the  same  gait,  describing  an 
arc  of  a  circle  of  five  paces.  The  trooper  on  the 
opposite  side  turns,  increasing  the  gait;  the  other 
troopers  turn  the  head  towards  the  marching  flank, 
to  regulate  their  rate  of,  march,  feeling  at  the  same 
time  lightly  the  boot  on  the  side  of  the  pivot. 

At  the  command  forward,  the  troopers  who 
had  increased  the  gait  Resume  the  precise  pace  at 
which  they  were  b.fore  moving,  and  the  head  of 
the  column  marches  straight  forward  in  the  new 
direction. 

Each  rank  executes  the  same  movement  on 
arriving  upon  the  ground  where  the  first  has  turned. 

The  assistant-instructor  should  give  the  command  left 
in  sufficient  time  to  command  turn,  when  he  is  at  three 
paces  from  the  point  indicated  for  the  change  of  direction ; 
he  executes  his  movement,  lengthening  slightly  the  gait, 
without  leaving  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  regulating 
himself  upon  the  marching  flank,  so  as  to  give  the  com- 
mand FORWARD  at  the  instant  the  front  rank,  having 
executed  a  quarter  of  a  wheel,  is  in  a  direction  perpen- 
dicular to  the  former  one. 

When  the  changes  of  direction  are  to  be  executed  at  the 
angles  of  a  limited  ground,  and  the  column  is  marching 
by  fours,  the  assistant-instructor  commands :  1.  Left  (or 
8  ^ 


86  THE   PLATOON. 

right) — Tinix  ;  2.  Forward,  without  waitinp  forthe  oem- 
mand  Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  to  the  rijht). 

• 

The  column  marching  by  two8  or  by  fours,  the  instruc- 
tor halts  it,  as  prescribed. 

To  commence  the  march,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  C'liimn  forward.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March.  « 

The  column  marching  by  twos  or  by  fours,  the  instruc- 
tor commands : 

1.  Left  (or  riffJu)  ohlique. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  March,  each  trooper  executes 
a  quarter-turn  to  the  left. 

The  trooper  oa  the  left  of  the  first  rank,  who  is 
guide  of  the  column,  moves  straight  forward  in 
the  new  direction,  and  parallel  to  the  assistant- 
instructor.  The  trooper  on  the  left  of  each  of  the 
other  ranks,  who  is  guide  of  his  rank,  moves  for- 
ward also  in  the  new  direction,  observing  the  guide 
of  the  column  so  as  to  keep  on  the  same  line,  and 
'in  a  parallel  direction  with  him. 

The  other  troopers  move  forward,  looking  occa- 
sionally to  the  left  so  as  to  align  themselves  upon 
their  guide.  Each  one  places  the  left  knee  behind 
the  right  knee  of  the  man  on  the  left,  and  the  head 
of  his  horse  opposite  the  lower  part  of  the  neck  of 
the  horse  on  his  left.  The  troopers  march  thus,  in 
each  rank,  during  the  oblique  march. 

To  return  to  the  primitive  direction,  conform  to  what 
is  prescribed,^ for  the  column  by  files. 


THE   PLATOON.  87 

If  the  troopers  becotne  disunited  during  the  oblique 
march,  they  should  rejoin  the  guide  of  their  rank,  gain- 
ing more  ground  to  the  front  than  to  the  side,  so  as  not  to 
lose  their  alignment  nor  retard  those  who  march  behind 
them.  If  the  guide  of  any  rank  ceases  to  be  on  the  line 
of  the  guide  of  the  column,  he  lengthens  or  .shortens  the 
pace,  without  changing  the  direction,  in  order  to  recover 
his  place. 

.To  rectify  the  distances,  the  degree  of  obliquity,  and 
to  be  assured  that  the  guides,  as  well  as  the  other  troopers, 
are  in  the  same  direction,  the  instructor  halts  the  column 
at  the  commands  :  1.  Column;  2.  IIalp.  The  column  is 
put  again  in  motion  in  the  oblique  direction  at  the  com- 
mands;  1.  Column  forward ;  2.  March. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by 
twos  or  by  fours,  to  form  it  to  the 
front,  to  the  left,  or  on  right,  into  line. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  right  in  front,  to  form 
line  to  the  front,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Front  into  line.  4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  6.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  (or  four)  first 
files  continue  to  march  forward  ;  the  other  ranks  of 
twos  (or  fours)  oblique  to  the  left,  march  in  this 
direction,  and  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right  on 
coming  opposite  the  place  they  are  to  occupy  in  the 
platoon. 

When  the  first  files  have  marched  20  paces,  the 
instructor  commands,  halt.  At  this  command, 
they  halt  square  to  the  front;  the  other  files  come 


88  THE   PLATOON. 

up  and  form  successively  on  their  left,  and  dress  to 
the  rit;ht. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  commnnfl  right — drkss  imme- 
diately after  that  of  halt,  and  commands  fuont  when  the 
last  rank  of  twos  or  fours  is  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is 
executed  following  the  same  principle.^  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Front  into  line;  2.  March; 
3.   Halt;  4.   Left — Dress;  6.   Front. 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  line  upon 
its  left  flank,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Left  into  line.  4.  Rl<jlit — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 
8.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  (or  four)  first 
files  turn  to  the  left  and  move  straight  forward ;  the 
other  ranks  of  twos  (or  four«i)  continue  to  march 
on,  and  at  3  paces  before  arriving  opposite  the  place 
they  are  to  occupy  in  the  platoon,  turn  succes- 
sively to  the  left. 

When  the  first  files  have  marched  20  paces,  the 
instructor  commands,  halt.  At  this  command,  the 
first  files  halt;  ihc  others  come  up  and  firm  succes- 
sively on  their  left,  and  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  right — drrss,  imme- 
diately alter  that  of  halt,  and  commands  front  when 
the  two  (or  four)  last  files  are  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  to  form  line  upon  its 
right  flauk,  the  movement  is  executed  following  the  same 


THE  PLATOON.  ^  89 

principles,  but  bj  inverse  means,  at  the  commands :  i 
Right  into  line  ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Halt  ;  4.  ic/^— Dress  • 
6.  Front.  * 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  line  upon 
the  prolongatioji,  and  iu  advance  of  its  right  flank,  the 
instructor  commands: 

1.  On  riijht  into  line.  4.  Ri(/ht—DRi:ss. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  tlie  two  (or  four)  first 
files  turn  to  the  right  and  move  straight  forward  • 
the  other  ranks  of  twos  (or  fours)  continue  to  march 
on,  and  each  turns  successively  to  the  right,  at  3 
paces  beyond  the  point  where  the  preceding  rank 
has  turned 

When  the  first  files  have  marched  20  paces,  the 
instructor  commands,  halt.  At  this  command,  the 
first  files  halt  ssquare  upon  the  line;  the  other  files 
come  up  and  form  successively  on  their  left,  and 
dress  to  th^  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  right— j>bess,  imme- 
diately after  that  of  halt,  and  commands  front  when  the 
two  (or  four)  last  files  are  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  to  form  line  upon 
the  prolongation   and   in   advance   of  its   left  flank,  the 
movement   is   executed    following   the    same    principles 
but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  :   I.   On  the  left  into 
Itne;  2.   March;  8.    Halt;  4.  Le/t-J)RESs:  5.  March. 

The  foregoing  explanations  have  been  given  for  move- 
ments twos  or  by  fours,  in  order  to  avoid  repetition*  but 
they  are  executed  by  fours  only  after  obtaining  the  neces- 
sary precision  in  the  exercises  by  twos.     When  these 


90  THE  PLATOON. 

movements  have  been  executed  "with    regularity  at  the 
walk,  they  are  repeated  at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop. 

To  form  the  platoon  to  the  left  in  one 
rank. 

4 

The  platoon  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  Lf/t  into  single  rank.         4.  Halt. 

2.  March.  •  5.  Rijht — Dress. 

3.  Front.  G.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  moves 
forward  6  paces,  dressing  by  the  right;  the  trooper 
on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  turns  to  the  left  and 
moves  forward;  he  is  followed  by  all  the  other 
troopers  of  that  rank,  who  execute  successively  the 
same  movement. 

At  the  command  front,  the  trooper  on  the  left 
of  the  rear  rank  turns  to  the  right,  and  the  other 
troopers  successively,  when  they  have  arrived  nearly 
opposite  the  places  they  are  to  occupy  in  the  rank. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  trooper  on  the  left 
halts,  and  successively  the  others,  on  arriving  abreast 
of  him. 

At  the  command  Right — Dress,  all  the  troopers 
of  the  rear  rank  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  Gth  command,  which  is  front,  turn  the 
head  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  3d  command,  which  is  front, 
the  ftioment  that  one-tliird  of  the  rear  rank  in  column 
have  passed  the  front  rank:  he  conjmands  right — dress, 
when  the  trooper  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank  has  fronted. 


THE   PLATOON.  91 


Manual  of  arms. 

The  platoon  being  in  one  rank,  the  troopers  execute  at 
a  halt  the  manual  of  arms. 

To  form  the  platoon  to  the  right  in  two 
ranks.* 

The  platoon  being  in  one  rank,  the  instructor  desig- 
nates the  trooper  who  is  to  be  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  also  the  one  to  be  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank, 
and  commands : 

1.  Right  into  two  ranks.         3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  March,  the  front  rank  moves 
forward  ^  puces,  dressing  by  the  rights  the  trooper 
on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank  turns  to  the  right  as 
soon  as  the  front  rank  has  passed,  and  rnoves  for- 
ward obliquing  to  the  right;  when  he  is  nearly  in 
rear  of  the  trooper  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank, 
he  fronts  by  turning  to  the  left.  All  the  other 
troopers  execute  successively  the  same  movement, 
placing  themselves  exactly  behind  their  file-leaders 
and  at  their  proper  distances. 

At  the  command  right — DRESS,  all  the  troopers 
align  themselves  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  in.xtructor  gives  the  command  right — drkss,  when 
the  trooper  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank  has  turned  to 
the  front. 


92  THE   PLATOON. 

The  exercise  being  finished,  the  troopers  are  ordered 
to  dismount  and  file  oflF. 

At  the  command  prepare  to  dismount,  the  assistant 
instructor  moves  12  paces  to  the  front,  and  faces  the 
platoon  by  a  turn-about  to  th'i  left;  at  the  same  com- 
mand the  file-closer  reins  back  4  paces,  and  dismounts 
with  the  platoon. 

To  form  twos  and  fours  at  the  same 

gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  file,  right  in  front, 
to  form  twos,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Form  twos.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  continues 
to  march  on,  and  halts  when  it  has  marched  10 
paces  J  the  second  file  obliques  to  the  left,  and 
comes  up  abreast  of  the  first;  on  arriving  there,  it 
halts  and  dresses  to  the  right.  All  the  other  files 
continue  to  march  straight  forward,  Nos  2  and  4 
executing  their  movement  in  the  same  manner,  but 
successively,  and  when  Nos.  1  and  3,  upon  which 
they  should  form,  have  nearly  arrived  at  their 
proper  distances,  and  are  about  to  halt. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  la 
front,  to  form  fours,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Form /ours.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  the  two  first  files  con- 
tinue to  march  on,  and  halt  when  they  have 
marched  10  paces ;  the  two  following  files  oblique 
to  the  left,  and  come  up  abreast  of  the  two  first; 


THE  PLATOON.  93 

on  arriving  there,  they  halt  and  dress  ta  the  right. 
All  the  other  files  continue  to  march  straijzht  for- 
ward, Nos.  3  and  4  executing  their  movement  in 
the  same  manner,  but  successively,  and  when  Nos. 
1  and  2,  upon  which  they  should  form,  have  nearly 
arrived  at  their  proper  distance  and  are  about  to 
halt. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  trot,  the  formation  of  twos 
and  fours  at  the  same  gait  is  executed  following  the  same 
principles.  The  first,  or  two  first  files,  pass  to  the  tcalkf 
at  the  command  march;  the  others  continue  to  march 
at  the  trot,  until  they  have  arrived  abreast  of  those  on 
which  they  should  form  ;  then  they  pass  to  the  walk. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  gallor),  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted following  the  same  principles.  The  first,  or  two 
first  files  pass  to  the  trot  at  the  command  march;  the 
others  continue  to  march  at  the  gallop,  until  they  have 
executed  their  formation  ;  then  they  pass  to  the  trot. 

When  twos  or  fours  are  formed  at  the  trot  or  at  the 
gallop,  the  guide  is  announced  as  soon  as  the  first  files 
have  doubled.  In  executing  the  same  movements  at  a 
walk,  as  the  head  of  the  column  halts,  the  guide  ^s  not 
announced. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  these  movements 
are  executed  following  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

To  break  by  twos  and   by  file   at  the 
same  gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  to  break  by  twos,  the  instructor  commands  :    . 

1.  By  twos.        2.  March.        3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  command  hy  twos,  all  the  troopers  pre- 
pare to  halt,  except  Nos.  1  and  2  of  the  leading  files. 


94  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  command  march,  Nos.  1  .and  2  of  the 
leading  files  con'inue  to  march  at  the  same  gait; 
all  the  others  halt.  Files  3  and  4  of  the  leading 
rank  oblique  to  the  right  the  moment  they  are 
pas«od  b}'  the  croup  of  the  hor.^cs  of  the  rear  rank 
of  Nos  1  and  2,  a^d  place  themselves  in  column 
behind  them. 

Each  rank  of  fours  executes  successively  the 
same  movement,  files  1  and  2  breaking  as  soon  as 
files  o  and  4  of  the  rank  which  precedes  them  have 
cemmenced  obliquing,  in  order  to  enter  the  column. 

Files  1  and  2,  which  break  to  the  front,  regulate 
their  gate,  so  as  to  preserve  their  distances;  and 
files  3  and  4  keep  their  horses  straight,  so  as  not  to 
constrain  the  movements  of  files  1  and  2. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in  front, 
to  break  by  file,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Bi/Jih.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  jile^  all  the  troopers  prepare 
to  halt  except  the  right  file  of  the  leading  rank  of 
twos. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  the  rij>ht  file  of  the 
leading  rank  of  twos  continues  to  march  at  the  same 
gait,  all  the  others  halt.  .  The  left  file  of  this  same 
rank  obliques  to  the  right  the  moment  it  is  passed 
by  the  croup  of  the  rear  rank  horse  of  No.  1,  and 
places  itself  in  column  behiud  the  first  file. 

Each  rank  of  twos  executes  successively  the 
same  movement,  files  1  and  3  breaking  as  soon  as 
files  2  and  4  who  precede  them  have  commenced 
obliquing  in  order  to  enter  the  column. 


THE   PLATOON.  95 

Files  1  and  3,  which  break  to  the  front,  regulate 
their  gait  so  as  to  have  their  di&tauces.  Files  2  and 
4  keep  their  horses  straight,  so  as  not  to  constrain 
the  movements  of  files  1  and  3. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  break  by  twos  or  by 
file  is  executed  on  the  same  principles;  the  right  files  of 
the  leading;  rank  continue  at -the  trot;  all  the  others  take 
the  tvalk  at  the  command  march,  and  resume  the  trot,  ia 
order  to  enter  the  column  ;  when  the  column  is  qX.  the  gallop, 
the  files  which  are  to  break  take  the  trot  at  the  command 
MARCH,  and  atterwards  resume  the  gallop  on  entering  the 
column. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  files  which  break,  halt, 
change  gait,  and  put  themselves  again  in  motion,  with 
steadiness  ;  that  they  keep  their  horses  strfyght,  so  as  not 
to  retard  the  movements  of  those  which  only  march  for- 
ward, and  that  they  retake  successively  their  distances, 
their  directions  and  their  original  gait. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is 
executed,  following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inversS 
means,  at  tlie  commnnds:  1.  By  twos  (or  by  file)  from  the 
left;  2.  March.  If  the  column  marches  by  twos,  the 
guide  is  indicated  to  the  right,  immediately  after  the 
command  march. 

To  form  twos  and  fours,  doubling  the  gait. 

Tne  platoons  marching  in  column  by  file,  right  in  front, 
to  form  twos  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Forin  twos — trot.  3.   Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  form  twos — trot,  all  the  troopers 
prepare  to  take  the  trot,  except  the  leading  file. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  take 
the  trot,  except  the   leading   file;  the   second  file 


96  THE   PLATOON. 

obliques  to  the  left,  and  conies  up  abreast  of  the 
first;  on  arriving  there  it  takes  the  walk;  all  the 
other  files  continue  to  march  forward  at  the  trot. 
Files  4  and  2  execute  their  movement  in  the  same 
manner,  but  successively,  when  3  and  1,  upon  whom 
they  are  to  form,  have  nearly  arrived  at  their  dis- 
tance, and  are  about  to  pass  to  the  walk. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in  front, 
to  form  fours  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Form  fours — trot.  3.   Guide  left. 

2.  Marcu. 

At  the  command/orm/owrs — trot,  all  the  |;rooper8 
prepare  to  take  the  trot,  except  the  two  leading  files. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  take 
the  trot,  except  the  two  leading  files;  the  two  fol- 
lowing files  oblique  to  the  left,  and  come  up  abreast 
of  the  two  first :  on  arriving  there  they  resume  the 
walk;  all  the  other  files  continue  to  march  forward 
at  ike  trot.  Files  3  and  4  execute  their  movement  in 
the  same  manner,  but  successively,  when  files  1  and 
2,  upon  whom  they  are  to  form,  have  nearly  arrived 
at  their  distance,  and  are  about  to  pass  to  the  walk. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted on  the  same  principles.  At  the  command  march, 
all  the  troopers  pass  to  the  gallop,  except  the  files  at  the 
head  of  the  column,  and  resume  the  trot  when  their  for- 
mation is  executed. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  the  movement  to  form 
twos  or  fours  is  always  executed  at  the  same  gait. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is 
executed,  following  the  same  principles,  but  bj  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Form  twos  {or  form  fours) — 
trot;  2.  Marcu;  3.   Guide  right. 


THE  PLATOON.  97 

"The  instructor  observes  that  the  first  file  to  oblique 
does  so  immediately  after  the  command  marcii  ;  that  the 
gait  is  doubled  with  moderation  ;  that  the  formation  ex- 
tends itself  successively  from  the  head  to  the  rear  of  the 
column,  the  files  who  march  straight  forward  keeping 
their  horses  well  in  hand  to  prevent  their  following  those 
which  oblique;  he  observes  „also  that  the  files  which 
oblique  do  so  a  little  before  arriving  at  their  distance, 
particular!}'  in  marching  by  fours  ;  and  that  they  never 
pass  beyond  the  alignment  of  those  on  whom  they  are  to 
form. 

To  break  by  twos  and  by  file,  doubling 
the  gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  fours,  the  instruc- 
tor commands: 

1.  By  twos — trot.  »  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  twos — ti'otj  files  1  and  2  of 
the  leading  rank  of  fours  prepare  to  trot. 

At  the  command  march,  they  commence  tJie 
trot ;  all  the  other  files  continue  to  march  at  the 
walk ;  files  3  and  4  take  the  trot  successively  and 
oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  place  themselves  ia 
column  behind  files  1  and  2. 

The  movement  being  terminated,  the  instructor  orders 
the  walk. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in  front, 
to  break  by  file  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  By  file— trot.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  file — trot,  the  right  file  of 
the  leading  rank  of  twos  prepares  to  trot. 
9 


98  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  command  march,  it  commences  the  trot ; 
all  the  other  files  continue  to  march  at  the  walk  ; 
files  2  and  4  assume  the  trot  successively  and 
oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  place  themselves 
behind  files  1  and  3  in  the  column. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  break  doubling  the 
gait,  the  instructor  commands:  1.  B;/ twos  (or  by  file — 
gallop ;  2.  March  ;  which  is  executed  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  the  movement  to 
break  by  twos  or  by  file  is  Executed  at  the  same  gait. 

In  these  movements,  the  iusti-uctor  observes  that  the 
head  of  the  column  changes  gait  with  moderation,  and 
that  the  troopers  who  follow  do  not  permit  their  horses  to 
move  off  before  the  moment  prescribed. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is  ex- 
ecuted, following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  ]3y  ttcos  (or  by  file)  from  the 
left — trot ;  2.  March.  If  the  column  is  to  march  by  twos, 
the  guide  is  indicated  to  the  right,  immediately  after  the 
command  march. 

As  it  is  important  for  the  precision  and  regularity  of 
these  movements  that  the  troopers  should  not  forget  their 
numbers,  the  instructor  should  assure  himself  of  it  from 
time  to  time. 

Direct  march  of  the  platoon  in  hne. 

The  principles  of  the  direct  march  give  the  troopers  the 
means, 

1st.  Of  preserving  the  alignments  in  marching,  without 
being  disunited. 

2d.  Of  not  closing  too  much,  and  of  recovering  the  re- 
quired distances  when  they  have  closed. 

3d.  Of  not  opening,  and  of  closing  upon  each  other 
again  when  they  have  opened. 


THE   PLATOON.  99 

4th.  Of  not  throwing  the  guide  out  of  bis  direction, 
and  of  permitting  him  to  return  to  it  if  be  has  been 
forced  out. 

The  most  important  point  in  the  (lirect  march 
being  to  keep  the  horses  straight  in  the  ranks,  it  is 
indisperyfiable  that  the  troopers  should  preserve  the 
head  direct. 

To  keep  themselves  aligned,  the  troopers  should 
feel  Ughtl}^  the  boot  of  the  men  on  the  side  of  the 
guide,  and  march  at  an  equal  gait. 

The  troopers  should  yield  to  all  pressure  coming 
from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that  coming 
from  the  opposite  side. 

The  guide  should  always  march  at  a  free  and 
steady  gait,  and  change  it  ^ith  steadiness  in  order 
to  avoid  irregularity  in  the  ranks. 

If  the  troopers  are  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  align- 
ment, too  near  to  or  too  far  from  the  man  on  the 
side  of  the  guide,  they  move  from  or  approach  him 
gradually,  and  in  gaining  ground  to  the  front. 

When  the  guide  leels  himself  thrown  out  of  his 
direction,  he  extends  his  arm  to  the  front  to  in- 
dicate that  there  is  too  much  pressure  towards 
him,  the  troopers  give  a  glance  to  the  guide,  relieve 
him,  and  straighten  their  horses  as  soon  as  he  is 
relieve^. 

The  corporal  of  the  flank  opposite  to  the  guide,  is  no' 
required  to  preserve  the  head  erect.  He  aligns  himsel^ 
upon  the  guide  and  the  general  front  of  the  plntoon. 

The  guide  is  commanded  alternately  to  the  right  and  to 
the  left,  that  the  troopers  may  have  the  habit  of  dressing 
equally  towards  either  direction. 

VVIien  tlie  platoon  is  halted,  the  alignment  is  ordered 
towards  the  side  of  the  guide. 


100  TUE   PLATOON. 

When  the  instnictor  wishes  to  exercise  the  platoon  ftt 
the  direct  mnrch.  it  is  contlucted  to  the  extremity  of  a 
ground  of  Mitficient  extent  to  admit  of  its  marchiug  some 
time  without  changing  the  direction. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Opni  Jiles  to  tJie  left  (or  to  the  rvjlit-) 

•        2.  March. 

3.  Riijht  (or  Zf/?)— Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  coraraand  marcii,  all  the  troopers,  except 
the  right  file,  passage  to  the  left,  as  pre.^^cribed,  the 
second  trooper  straightens  his  horse  and  halts  as  sooQ 
as  he  has  gained  an  interval  of  1  pace  between  him- 
self and  the  trooper  of  the  right. 

Kach  of  the  other  'troopers  executes  the  same 
movonient,  regulating  the  interval  by  the  trooper 
on  his  right. 

The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  follow  their  file- 
Icadcrs,  and  keep  at  their  proper  distances. 

The  instructor  orders  the  alignment  the  moment  the 
second  trooper  from  the  ripht  has  attained  his  interval. 

The  troopers  being  ali<rned,  the  instructor  indicates  to 
the  j;uide  of  the  right,  or  of  the  left,  a  fixed  point  in  a 
direction  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the  platoon  ;  he  in- 
structs him  to  take  an  internu'diate  point,  never  to  lose 
siplit  of  these  two  points,  in  order  to  keep  hiniseli'  :»lways 
in  the  proper  direction,  and  to  select  a  more  distant  point 
as  lie  approaches  the  one  tiearest  to  hini. 

To  give  a  point  of  direction,  the  instructor  places  him- 
self exactly  beliind  the  right  file,  or  the  k-tt  file,  and  indi- 
cates to  the  trooper  of  the  front  rank  un  oltject  on  the 
grouml  which  is  immovable  and  can  be  distinctly  seen, 
BU'-h  as  11  house,  a  steeple,  a  mill,  a  tret*  ;  tia;  trooper  of 
the  rear   rank    keeps   himself  always  iu  file  and  at  bis 


THE  PLATOON.  101 

proper  distance,  SO  that  the  front  rank  man  will  conceal 
from  him  the  point  of  direction  indicated. 

To  march  the  platoon  forward,  the  instructor  commands : 

,•  1.  Platoon  forward. 

2.  Guide  right  (or  left^. 

3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  trbopers  move 
straiirht  forward,  at  the  same  gait  with  the  men  on 
the  s'de  of  the  gui<le. 

As  the  troopers  are  not  boot  to  boot,  they  should 
give  a  glance  from  time  to  time  towards  the  guide. 

During  the  march  the  instructor  is  sometimes  at  the 
side  of  the  guide,  to  assure  himself  that  the  troopers 
march  on  the  same  line  ;  and  sonjietim-es  behind  the  guide, 
to  observe  that  he  follows  the  direction  indicated. 

To  halt  the  platoon,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Platoon.  3.   Right  (or  Z(/(f)— DrESS. 

"1.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  troopers  stop. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  they  align  them- 
selves. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  troopers  having  been  sufficiently  exorcised  ia 
irarcliing  with  open  files,  the  instructor  halts  the  platoon, 
and  commands : 

1 .  Clone  files  to  the  right  {or  to  the  left). 

2.  March. 

.3.  Right  (or  /^/O— Dress. 
4.  Front. 


102  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  coramancl  march,  all  the  troopers  except 
the  rij^ht  file  passage  to  the  right,  as  prescribed,  and 
resume  their  places  boot  to  boot. 

After  having  dressed  the  platoon,  it  is  marched  with 
files  closed. 

The  troopers  march  straight  forward,  feeling 
lightly  the  boot  towards  the  side  of  the  guide. 

When  the  troopers  begin  to  manage  their  horses  pro- 
perly at  the  tvalk,  they  are  required  to  open  and  close 
files,  marching  at  the  same  gait,  taking  care  not  to  repeat 
these  movements  too  often,  out  to  m:il<e  them  march  some 
time  after  having  opened  tlie  files,  before  closing  them, 
and  after  having  closed  the  files,  before  opening  them; 
for  this  purpose  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  OpfM  files  to  the  left  (or  to  the  right). 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  all  the  troopers  except 
the  right  file  make  a  quarter  turn  to  the  left,  at 
the  same  time  advancing  and  preserving  their 
alignment ;  when  they  are  at  one  pace  from  the 
man  on  the  right,  they  straighten  their  horses  and 
move  forward. 

To  close  files,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Clone  files  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left). 

2.  March. 

This  movement  is  executed  following  the  same 
principles,  but  by  inverse  means  Kach  trooper 
should  clnse  the  leir  in  sufl&cient  time  to  prevent 
his  horse  from  pressing  against  the  one  on  which 
he  closes. 


THE  PLATOON.  103 

The  files  are  always  opened  towards  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guide,  and  closed  upon  him. 

These  movements  having  been  executed  to  the  right 
and  to  the  left  in  marching  at  (he  xoalk,  they  are  repeated 
at  the  trot,  passing  frequently  from  the  walk  to  the  troty 
and  from  the  trot  to  the  walk. 

Tlie  platoon  is  then  exercised  in  commencing  the  trot 
fi'om  a  halt,  and  in  halting  while  marching  at  this  gait. 

Counter-march. 

The  platoon  having  arrived  at  the  extremity  of  the 
ground,  in  order  to  change  the  direction  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  Counter-marcli — hy  the  right  fianJc. 

2.  Bi/  fik  to  the  right. 

3.  March. 

At  the  command  counter-march — hy  the  right 
flank,  the  assistant  instructor  places  himself  facing 
to  the  rear  at  6  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  and  ia 
such  a  position  that  the  trooper  who  is  to  be  placed 
on  his  left  may  find  himself  in  the  direction  of  the 
left  file  of  the  platoon.  The  file-closer  places  himi- 
self  on  the  right  of  the  platoon,  facing  to  the  right, 
the  croup  of  his  horse  1  pace  from  and  on  the  line 
of  haunches  of  the  horse  of  the  rear  rank,  in 
order  to  mark  the  wheeling  point. 

At  the  command  march,  the  trooper  on  the  right 
of  each  rank  turns  to  the  right,  the  rear-rank  man 
joining  in  his  movement  the  front-rank  man  ;  they 
then  wheel  together  to  the  right,  the  latter  length- 
ening a  little  his  gait ;  they  pass  before  the  file- 


104  THE  PLATOON. 

closer,  very  near  the  croup  of  tbe  horses  of  the 
rear-rank,  and  are  followed  by  the  other  troopers, 
who  execute  successively  the  same  movement,  taking 
care  to  pass  over  the  same  ground. 

When  the  first  file  is  within  two  paces  of  the  assistant- 
instructor,  who  indicates  the  point  on  which  it  is  to  form, 
the  instructor  commands  :  , 

1.  Front.  3.  Rir/lit — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  commands  front  and  halt,  the  first  file 
turns  to  the  left  and  halts,  the  trooper  of  the  rear- 
rank  taking  care  to  slacken  the  pace  and  place 
himself  exactly  behind  his  file-leader.  All  the 
other  files  execute  succpssivt-ly  the  same  movement. 

At  the  last  command,  which  is  front,  turn  tbe 
head  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  right — drkss  imme- 
diately after  that  of  halt,  and  commands  front  wlien  the 
last  tile  is  aligned. 

The  assistant-instructor  and  file-closer  return  to  their 
places. 

0 The  counter-march  is  executed  by  the  loft,  on  the  same 
principles,  at  the  commands:  1.  Counter-march — hy  the 
left  flank:  2.  Bj/ file,  to  the  left :  3.  March.  And  after- 
wards; 1.  Front:  2.  Halt:  3.  Left— Dress:  4.  Front. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  troopers  execute  with 
steadiness  their  turns  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  an<l  that 
they  place  themselves  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  one  origin- 
ally occupied  by  the  platoon. 

The  counter-march  should  be  generally  executed  at  the 
trot.  For  this  purpose  after  the  second  command,  the 
instructor  indicates  the  gait. 


THE  PLATOON.  105 


Wheelings* 


There  are  two  kinds  of  wheels :  the  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot,  and  the  wheel  on  a  moveahle  point. 

The  Avheel  is  always  on  a  fiz<'d  pivot,  except  when  the 
command  is  ri^ht  (or  left) — turn. 

The  troopers  should  execute  this  movement  without 
disuniting,  and  without  ceasing  to  observe  the  alignment. 

In  every  kind  of  wheel,  the  conductor  of  the  marching 
flank  should  measure  with  his  eye  the  arc  of  the  circle  he 
is  to  pass  over,  so  that  it  may  not  be  necessary  for  the 
files  either  to  open  or  close.  He  turns  his  head  occasion- 
ally towards  the  pivot;  if  he  perceives  that  the  troopers 
are  too  much  crowded,  or  too  open,  he  increases  or  dimin- 
ishes gradually  the  extent  of  his  circle,  gaining  more 
ground  to  the  front  than  to  the  side. 

Each  trooper  of  the  front  rank  should  describe  his  cir- 
cle in  the  ratio  of  the  distance  at  which  he  may  be  from 
the  pivot.  As  these  different  arcs  are  all  passed  over  ia 
the  same  time,  it  is  necessary  that  each  trooper  should 
Blacken  his  pace  in  proportion  to  the  distance  from  the 
marcliing  flank. 

Duritig  the  wheel,  the  troopers  Fhould  turn  the  head 
elightly  towards  the  marching  flank,  to  regulate  the  ra- 
pidity of  their  march  and  to  keep  themselves /aligned : 
they  .should  also  feel  lightly  the  boot  on  the  side  of  the 
pivot,  in  order  to  remain  closed  to  that  side.  They  should 
ueverllieless  yield  to  pressure  coming  from  that  pivot,  and 
resist  that  from  the  opposite  direction.  The  horses  are 
slightly  turned  towards  the  pivot,  in  order  to  keep  them 
upon  tlio  circular  line  they  have  to  pass  over. 

When  the  troopers  have  opened,  they  should  approach 
the  pivot  insensibly,  diminishing  their  circle  by  degrees, 
gaining  more  ground  to  the  front  than  to  the  side.  In 
this  case,  they  give  alternately  a  glance  to  the  pivot  and 
to  the  marching  flank,  taking  care  not  to  force  the  pivot. 

When  t!ie  troopers  have  closed  too  much,  they  should 
endeavor  to  correct  the  fault  gradually,  increasing  their 


106  THE   PLATOON. 

CiFcle  by  degrees,  and  gaining  more  ground  to  the  front 
than  to  the  side.  For  tliis  purpose,  they  give  alter- 
nately a  glance  to  the  marching  flank  and  to  the  pivot, 
taking  care  to  feel  lightly  the  boot  towards  the  Bide  of 
pivot. 

In  every  kind  of  'wheel  the  troopers  should  cease 
wheeling,  and  retake  the  direct  march  at  the  command 
Forward,  at  whatever  point  of  the  wheel  they  may  be; 
it  is  necessary  to  observe  ali^o,  that  the  flanks  which 
become  pivots,  or  marching  flanks,  do  not  slacken  or 
augment  the  pace  before  the  command  of  execution. 

To  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  object  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot  is,  when  the 
platoon  forms  a  part  of  the  squadron,  to  pass  from  the 
order  of  battle  to  the  order  of^  column,  and  from  the 
order  of  column  to  the  order  of  battle. 

The  trooper  who  forms  the  pivot  of  the  wheel  turns 
upon  his  own  ground,  without  advancing  or  reining-back, 
and  without  passing  'to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  so  that 
the  centre  of  gravity  of  his  horse  remains  always  on  the 
eam^  point.  Thus,  in  wheeling  to  the  right,  the  shoulders 
of  the  pivot  horse  describe  an  arc  of  circle  in  passing 
from  left  to  right,  while  the  haunches  describe  another  in 
passing  from  right  to  left. 

The  trooper  at  the  pivot  should  turn  his  head  slightly 
towards  the  marching  flank,  that  he  may  continue  aligned 
on  the  conductor  of  that  flank. 

When  the  platoon  is  marching,  the  pivot  halts,  and  the 
marching  flank  executes  its  movement  at  the  same  gait  as 
before  the  wheel. 

If  the  instructor  indicates  a  new  gait,  in  order  to 
wheel,  the  marching  flank  wheels  at  this  gait;  all  the 
other  troopers,  who  regulate  the  rapidity  of  their  march 
in  accordance  with  their  distance  from  the  marching  flank, 
take  freely  the  new  gait  at  the  command  fokwauu. 

When  the  platoon  is  halted  'after  a  wheel  on  a  fixed 


THE  PLATOON.  107 

pivot,  the  alignment  is  always  ordered  towards  the  side 
of  the  marching  flank  ;  but  as  the  pivot  should  never 
move  from  its  place,  the  marching  flaak  should  come  up 
abreapt  of  it. 

When  the  platoon  is  marched  forward  after  a  wheel  on 
a  fixed  pivot,  the  guide  is  ordered  on  the  side  of  th6 
marching  flank,  immediately  after  the  command  for- 
ward, unless  the  movement  of  the  platoon  in  the  squad- 
ron requires  the  contrary. 

The  wheelings  are  executed  at  first  in  single  rank ;  for 
this  purpose,  the  front  rank  is  marched  forward,  and 
halted  when  arrived  at  a  distance  from  the  rear  rank 
equal  to  double  its  front ;  the  file-closer  remains  at  his 
place  ;  the  assistant  instructor  places  himself  behind  the 
front  rank  ;  each  of  them  observes  the  rank  behind  which 
]}e  is  placed. 

The  ranks  being  aligned,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Platoon  in  circle  right  (or  left)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  put  them- 
selves in  motion,  turning  the  head  towards  the 
marching  flank  The  non-commissioned  oflficer  who 
conducts  this  flank  marches  at  a  walk,  measuring 
with  the  eye  the  extent  of  the  circle  he  is  to  pass 
over,  that  neither  opening  nor  closing  may  be 
caused  in  the  rank,  and  that  the  troopers  may 
keep  aligned.  The  pivot  man  turns  upon  his 
own  ground,  regulating  himself  upon  the  marching 
flank.  ^ 

The  instructor  directs  the  troopers  to  avoid,  as  far  as 
practicable,  all  pressure  in  the  ranks,  which  would  cause 
eonfusion  on  extended  fronts  and  at  rapid  gaits. 

When  the  platoon  has  executed  several  wheels,  to  halt 
it,  the  instructor  commands : 


108  THE   PLATOON. 

1.  Platoon.  3.  Rirjlit  (or  /r/i)— Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  halt,  tlie  troopers*  straighten 
■    their  horses  and  halt  with  steiidines;;. 

At  the  command  left  (or  rijht) — DRKSS,  they 
align  themselves  towards  the  side  indicated. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  two  ranks  are  then  marched  forward,  preserving 

between  them  the  same  distance,  nti'l  made  to  recommence 

the  wheel.     When  the  instructor  wishes  the  platoon  to 

take  the  direct  march,  he  commands  : 

I 

1.  Forward.  2.   Guide  left  (or  right). 

• 

At  the  first  command,  which  is  forward,  the 

pivot  resumes  the  gait  at  which  it  was  previously 
inarching. 

All  the  other  troopers  straighten  their  horses, 
and  the  two  flanks  move  forward  at  the  same  gait, 
conforming  to  the  principles  of  the  direct  march. 

At  the  command  (juide  left  (or  ri(jht),  the 
troopers  regulate  their  movement  towards  the  side 
indicated. 

When  the  troopers  have  executed  several  wheels  to  the 

right  and  to  the  left,  interrupted  occasionally  by  direct 

inarches,  and  when  the  horses  become  calm,  the  instructor 

^causes  them  to  pass  to  the  trot;  after  several  wheels  at 

the  trot,  they  resume  the  walk. 

If  the  platoon  is  wheeling  to  the  right,  and  the  instructor 
wishes  it  to  change  the  wheel  to  the  left  without  halting, 
he  commands: 

1.  Platoon  in  circle  left  wheel.         2.  March. 


.  THE  PLATOON.  109 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  flank  halts,  and 
becomes  the  pivot.  The  right  flank  assuming  the 
gait  at  which  the  left  flank  was  marching,  moves 
forward  and  describes  a  circle  proportionate  to  the 
extent  of  the  front.  All  the  other  troopers  straighten 
their  horses,  and  guide  them  so  as  to  pass  over  new 
circles  in  the  opposite  direction. 

"When  the  troopers  begin  to  wheel  regularly,  the  in- 
structor requires  the  conductors  of  the  marching  flanks 
to  regulate  the  gait  so  as  to  arrive  together  in  line  and  in 
column.        • 

The  troopers  being  sufficiently  exercised  at  the  wheels 
in  single  rank  at  the  walk  and  the  trot,  the  ranks  are  closed 
and  the  wheels  executed  by  platoon,  following  the  sa|.me 
gradation. 

The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Platoon  in  circle  right  (or  left)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  of  the 
front  rank  execute  this  movement,  as  prescribed. 
The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  turn  the  head  and 
carry  the  hand  towards  the  marching  flank,  so  that 
each  one  may  be  out  of  the  direction  of  his  file- 
leader  by  two  troopers.  For  this  purpose,  the  mo- 
ment the  wheel  commences,  each  reari  rank  man 
executes  a  quarter-turn  to  the  left,  sustaining  the 
haunches  of  his  horse  with  the  right  leg,  when  the 
wheel  is  to  the  right,  (or  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right^ 
sustaining  the  haunches  of  his  horse  with  the  kft 
leg  when  the  wheel  is  to  the  left,)  keeping  during 
the  wheel  in  the  direction  of  his  new  file-leader,  and 
remaining  at  the  distance  of  2  feet  from  Ihe  front 
rank.  The  two  rear  rank  men  on  the  marchinjr 
10 


110  THE   PLATOON. 

flank,  who  are  without  file-leaders,  should  desQribo 
their  circle  without  being  farther  outside  of  the 
front  rank  than  is  necessary,  and  be  able  to  resume 
their  places  behind  their  file-leaders  easily.  During 
the  wheel,  they  should  regulate  their  gait  so  that 
the  rear  rank,  which  aligns  itself  upon  them,  may 
be  at  its  proper  distance. 

To  stop  the  wheel,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Platoon.  3.  Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  platoon,  the  rear  rank  men 
Btraighten  their  horses  and  return  to  the  direction 
of  their  file-leaders. 

At  the  command  halt,  all  the  troopers  stop. 

At  the  command  left  (or  right)  dress,  they 
align  themselves  towards  the  side  indicated. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  platoon  is  then  marched  to  the  front,  and  made  to 
repeat  the  same  movement. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  the  platoon  to  resume  the 
direct  march,  he  commands  : 

1.  Forward.  2.   Guide  left  (or  right). 

At  the  first  command,  which  is  forward,  the 
rear  rank  men  replace  themselves  behind  their  file- 
leaders,  and  march  straight  forward. 

The  platoon  wheeling  to  the  right,  to  wheel  to  the  op- 
posite side  without  halting,  the  instructor  commands: 

1,  Platoon  in  circle  left  wheel.         2.  March. 


THE   PLATOON.  Ill 

At  the  command  platoon  in  circle  left  loheel,  the 
rear  rank  men  return  to  the  direction  of  their  tile- 
leaders. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  men 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  the  rear  rank  men 
carry  the  hand  towards  the  marching  flank. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  march,  the  moment 
the  rear  rank  men  have  taken  up  the  direction  of  their 
file-leaders. 

To  give  the  trooper||Uie  habit  of  correcting  faults,  the 
pivot  man  is  directed^f  bear  against  the  rank,  so  that 
the  other  troopers  feeling  the  pressure  from  that  direction, 
may  learn  to  gain  ground  towards  the  marching  flank. 
The  pivot  is  then  directed  to  gain  ground  in  the  opposite 
direction,  which  would  require  the  other  troopers  tp  ap- 
proach him  gradually. 

When  the  troopers  have  acquired  in  the  execution 
of  these  movements,  at  the  walk,  the  intelligence  and 
skill  necessary  to  avoid  confusion,  they  are  repeated  at 
the  trot. 

The  platoon  being  halted,  to  place  it  in  a  direction 
perpendicular  to  the  original  front  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

•        1.  Platoon  right  (or  left)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  of  the 
wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  halt,  when  the 
marching  flank  has  nearly  terminated  its  wheel. 


112  TUE   PLATOON. 

The  platoon  being  halted,  to  face  it  to  the  rear,  the 
instructor  commands: 

1.  Platoon  riylU-ahout  (or  Irft-about)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Left  (or  riglit) — Dress. 
6.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  following  the  principles  just 
prescribed,  the  platoon  pasRin|t  over  a  half  circle. 

The   instructor  gives   the  1    halt,  when   the 

marching  flank  has  nearly  c<.i,,j.,i  .<  i  the  half  circle,  and 
the  platoon  is  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  original  front. 

The  platoon  being  halted,  to  place  it  towards  its  right 
in  a  direction  oblique  to  the  original  front,  the  instructor 
commands: 

1.  Platoon  right  half  (oi  left  half)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  of  the  wh^el 
on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  halt,  when  the 
marching  flank  has  nearly  completed  its  half-wheel  to 
the  right  or  to  the  left. 

Before  dressing  the  platoon,  the  trooper  on  the  march- 
ing flank  is  made  to  come  tip  abreant  of  the  pivot  man, 
so  tliat  the  other  troopers  will  not  have  to  rein-back  in 
order  to  align  themselves. 

The  platoon  being  on  the  mar^h,  the  same  movements 


THE  PLATOON.  113 

are  executed  at  the  commands:  1.  Platoon  right  (or  left) 
wheel,  right-about  (or  left-ahout)  wheel,  right-half  (or  left- 
half)  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  right  (or 
left.) 

At  the  command  march,  the  wheeling  flank 
wheels  at  the  gait  at  which  the  platoon  was  march- 
ing ;  the  pivot  flank  halts. 

At  the  third  command,  which  is  FORWARD,  the 
pivot  resumes  its  original  pace,  and  the  two  flanks 
move  forward  at  the  siDie  gait. 

These  movements  being  properly  executed  from  a  halt    ♦, 
and  at  the  tcalk,  are  repeated  at  the  trot. 

To  wheel  on  a  moveable  piVot. 

The  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot  is  employed  in  the  suc- 
cessive changes  of  direction  in  column. 

In  this  wheel  the  object  of  the  moveable  pivot  is  to 
leave  by  degrees  the  ground  on  whir.h  the  movement  com- 
mences, by  advancing  in  the  new  direction. 

The  conductor  of  the  marching  flank  should  increase 
his  gait  and  describe  his  arc  of  circle  so  as  to  cause  the 
files  neither  to  open  nor  close.  The  pivot  describes  an 
arc  of  Jive  paces,  slackening  the  gait.  In  each  rank  the 
troopers  from  the  centre  to  the  marching  flank  increase 
the  gait  progressively,  so  that  the  centre  man  preserves 
the  gait  at  which  the  platoon  was  marching.  The  troop- 
ers from  the  centre  to  the  pivot  slacken  the  gait  progres- 
sively. At  the  end  of  the  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot,  the 
portion  of  the  rank  which  had  augmented  its  gait  should 
slacken  it,  and  that  which  had  slackened  its  gait  should 
augment  it.  All  the  troopers  straighten  their  horses; 
the  marching  tlank  and  the  pivot  resume  the  gait  at  which 
they  originally  marched. 

The  platoon  being  on  the  march,  and  supposed  to  be 


114  THE  PLATOON. 

the  head  of  the  coluniD,  to  cause  it  to  change  direction, 
the  instructor  commands : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  to  the  right). 

At  this  command,  the  assistant  instructor  commands: 

1.  Left  (or  right) — Turn.  2.  Forward. 

At  the  first  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
left  (or  right),  the  pivot  pr^|^res  to  slacken,  and 
the  marching  flank  to  augment  the  gait. 

At  the  second  part  of  the  same  command,  which 
is  TURN,  the  platoon  turns  to  the  left  or  to  the 
right,  the  pivot  slackening  its  gait,  in  describing  an 
arc  of  five  paces;  the  marching  flank  augments  its 
gait,  and  regulates  itself  by  the  pivot  during  the 
whole  of  the  wheel. 

At  the  last  command,  which  is  forward,  all  the 
troopers  straighten  their  horses,  the  pivot  and  march- 
ing flank  moving  forward  in  the  gait  at  which  the 
platoon  was  originally  marching. 

The  troopers  not  having  been  exercised  to  wheel  at  the 
gallop  on  a  fixed  pjvot,  they  are  made  to  wheel  on  a 
moveable  pivot  only  in  marching  at  the  walk,  that  the 
marching  flank,  which  should  increase  its  gait,  will  have 
to  take  only  the  trot. 

To  exercise  the  troopers  in  wheeling  at  the  gallop  on  a 
fixed  pivot,  the  progression  established  for  the  exercise 
at  the  xcalk  and  at  the  trot  is  followed,  except  that  inten- 
tional faults  are  not  committed  in  order  to  be  corrected, 
and  that  the  platoon  is  always  halted  before  changing  the 
direction  of  the  wheel. 

The  instructor  changes  the  gait  frequently,  and  avoids 
galloping  too  long  to  the  same  hand. 


THE  PLATOON.  115 

The  platoon  is  exercised  also  to  wheel  at  the  trot  and  at 
the  gallop,  in  setting  out  from  a  halt,  and  to  halt  while 
wheeling  at  these  gaits. 

Individual  oblique  march. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground 
towards  one  of  its  flanks,  without  changing  the  front,  the 
instructor  commands : 

• 

1.  Rfffht  (or  left)  oblique,  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  execute 
all  at  the  same  time  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right,  so 
that  the  head  of  each  horse  may  be  opposite  the 
lower  part  of  the  neck  of  the  horse  on  his  right, 
and  that  the  right  knee  of  each  trooper  may  be  in 
rear  of  the  left  knee  of  the  trooper  on  his  right. 
The  first  movement  being  executed,  the  troopers 
move  forward  in  the  new  direction,  re^rulatinf;  them- 
selves  upon  the  guide. 

When  the  platoon  has  obliqued  sufficiently,  the  in- 
structor commands : 

Forward. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  straighten  their 
horses  and  move  forward,  regulating  themselves 
upon  the  guide. 

In  the  ohlique  march,  the  guide  is  always  on  the  ob- 
liquing side,  without  being  indicated ;  and  after  the  com- 
mand FORWARD,  the  guide  returns,  without  indication,  to 
the  side  on  which  it  was  originally. 

When  the  troopers  are  not  closed  they  should  increase 
progressively  the  gait,  in  order  to   approach   the   side 


116  THE  PLATOON. 

towards  wliich  they  march  ;  they  should  insensibly  slacken 
the  gait  if  thoy  are  too  much  closed,  or  more  advanced 
than  the  flank  towards  which  they  oblique.  All  these 
movements  are  executed,  gaining  more  ground  to  the 
front  than  to  the  side. 

The  platoon  marching  at  (he  wall:,  to  execute  the  oblique 
at  (he  (rot,  the  instructor  commands:  1.  Jii(/hl  (or  left) 
oblique — (rot;  2.   March. 

When  the  platoon  has  obliqued  sufficiently,  the  in- 
structor commands :  Forward.  , 

The  guide  observes  particularly  to  commence  the  trot 
■without  precipitation. 

The  same  course  is  observed  if  the  platoon  is  marching 
at  the  trot,  and  the  object  is  to  oblique  at  the  gallop. 


The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break 
it  by  fours  or  by  twos,  at  the  same 
gait. 

The  instructor  commands: 

1.  By  fours  (or  hy  twos), 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  (or  two)  first 
files  of  the  right  continue  to  march  forward  at  the 
same  gait;  the  other  files  halt  and  break  succes- 
sively, by  fours  (or  by  twos)  as  prescribed,  in  break- 
ing from  a  halt. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  by  file,  the 
movenu'rit  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  the  first 
file  only  continuing  to  march  forward. 

The  platoon  marching  at  the  trot,  is  broken  on  the  same 


THE  PLATOON.  117 

principles,  the  first  files  continuing  to  march  at  the  same 
gait,  all  the  other  files  assume  the  walk  at  the  command 
MARCH,  and  resume  the  trot  as  they  break  from  the  pla- 
toon. 

The  same  course  is  observed  when  the  platoon  marches 
at  the  gallop:  the  first  files  continue  to  march  at  that 
gait,  the  others  resume  the  trot  at  the  command  march, 
and  resume  the  gallop  as  they  commence  to  oblique. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  the  left,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means, 
at  the  commands:  1.  By  fours  (or  by  twos)  froin  the  left; 
2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  right. 


The  platoon  marching  in  column  by 
twos  or  by  fours,  to  form  it  at  the 
same  gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column,  right  in  front,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Form  platoon.       2.  March.       3.  Guide  right. 

The  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  front 
into  line. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column"  a<  the  ^ro?,  right  in 
front,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Form  platoon.       2.  March.       3.  Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  (or  four)  first 
files  pass  to  the  walk ;  the  other  files  continue  to 
march  at  the  same  gait,  oblique  immediately  to  the 
left,  march  straight  forward  in  this  direction,  make 
a  quarter-turn  to  the  right  on  coming  opposite  the 


118  THE   PLATOON. 

place  they  are  to  occupy  in  the  platoon,  and  pass 
to  the  walk  on  arriving  upon  the  alignment  of  the 
first. 

At  the  command  guide  right,  they  dress  towards 
the  right. 

When  the  command  is  at  the  fjctllop,  the  platoon  is 
formed  on  the  same  principles.  The  two  (or  four)  first 
files  take  the  trot,  at  the  command  march  ;  the  other  files 
continue  to  march  at  the  gallop,  and  take  the  trot  on 
arriving  upon  the  alignment  of  the  first. 

When  the  column  is  marching  by  file,  the  platoon  is 
formed  on  the  same  principles. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  platoon  is  formed 
on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  com- 
mand:  1.  Form  platoon ;  2.  Maucii;  3.  Guide  left. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break 
it  by  fours  or  by  twos,  doubling  the 
gait. 

The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Bi/  fours  (or  hy  twos) — trot. 

2.  March. 

3.  Quide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  (or  two)  first 
files  of  the  right  take  the  trot ;  the  others  continue 
to  march  at  the  walk,  and  take  successively  the  trot 
when  they  oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  enter 
the  column. 


THE   PLATOON.  119 

The  platoon  marching  at  the  troty  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

I 

1.  Bj/  fours  (or  hi/  twos) — gallop. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  lejt. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  by  file,  the 
movement  is  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

When  the  platoon  marches  at  the  gallop,  it  is  always 
broken  without  doubling  the  gait. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  the  left,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at 
the  commands:  1.  By  fours  (or  hy  twos)  from  the  left — 
trot  (or  gallop) ;  2.  March  ;  3.   Guide  right. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by 
twos  or  by  fours,  to  form  it,  doubling 
the  gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column,  right  in  front,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Form  platoon — trot. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  (or  four)  first 
files  coDtinue  to  march  forward  at  the  same  gait; 
the  other  files  take  the  troty  oblique  immediately  to 
the  left,  march  in  this  direction,  make  a  quarter- 
turn  to  the  right  on  coming  opposite  the  place  they 
are  to  occupy  in  the  platoon,  and  pass  to  the  walk 
on  arriving  upon  the  alignment  of  the  first. 


120  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  command  guide  riyhtj  thej  dress  towards 
the  right. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column,  at  the  trot,  right  ia 
front,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Form  platoon — gallop. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  the  platoon  is  always 
formed  at  the  same  gait. 

When  the  c(jlumn  is  marching  by  file,  the  platoon  is 
formed  on  the  same  principles. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  platoon  is  formed 
on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  com- 
mands: 1.  Form  platoon — trot  (or  gallop);  2.  March; 
3.   Guide  left. 

Movements  by  fours,  the  platoon  being 
in  column  or  in  line. 

The  platoon  being  in  column,  right  in  front,  the  in- 
structor commands : 

1.  By  fours--^left  (or  right)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  rank  of  four  exe- 
cutes its  wheel  to  the  left,  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot;  Nos.  4  turn 
upon  themselve?,  sustaining  with  the  left  leg  the 
haunches  of  their  horses,  in  order  not  to  constrain 
the  movement  of  the  rank  immediately  behind 
them ;  all  the  troopers  regulate  themselves  towards 
the  marching  flanks. 


*  THE   PLATOON.  121 

The  movement  being  nearly  completed,  the  instructor 
commands: 

1.  Halt. 

2.  Right  (or  ?e/?)— Dress. 

3.  Front. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  troopers  straighten 
their  horses  and  halt  with  steadiness. 

In  this  movement,  the  front  and  rear-rank  execute, 
separately,  a  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  Each  rank  of  fours 
belonging  to  the  rear-rank  is  placed  at  the  side  of  the 
rank  of  fours,  composed  of  its  file  leaders.  When  the 
movement  is  terminated,  the  platoon  is  in  one  rank. 

The  platoon  being  in  one  rank,  it  is  put  again  in  column 
by  the  commands  prescribed,  then  the  troopers  of  the 
rear-rank  are  placed  in  front  of  their  file-leaders.  In 
executing  again  two  ivheels  to  the  left  by  fours,  the  platoon 
is  put  in  its  natural  order. 

In  the  first  wheel  to  the  left  by  fours,  the  leading  rank  of 
fours  should  execute  its  movement  slowly,  in  order  to  give 
the  others  time  to  execute  theirs ;  but  in  the  second  wheel 
to  the  left  by  fours,  the  last  rank  of  fours,  which  becomes 
head  of  the  column,  should  execute  its  movement  in  length- 
ening a  little  the  gait,  so  as  not  to  retard  the  rear  of  the 
column. 

The  platoon  being  in  column,  and  having  executed  a 
wheel  to  the  left  by  fours,  which  puts  it  in  a  single  rank, 
to  face  it  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  instructor  com- 
mands: 

1.  By  fours  left-ahout  (or  riglit-alout)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

At   the   command   march,   each  rank  of  fours 
wheels  to  the  left-ahout  on  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  wheel  to  the  left  hy  fours. 
<  11 


122  THE   PLATOON.  * 

To  halt  after  being  wheeled  about,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Halt. 

2.  R!<jht  (or  /^/O— Dress. 

3.  Front. 

To  put  the  platoon  again  in  column  in  the  natural 
order,  the  instructor  causes  to  be  executed  a  wheel  to  the 
left  by  fours. 

When  the  column  is  marching,  the  movement  is 
executed  as  prescribed,  observing  that,  at  the  com- 
mand MARCH,  the  pivots  halt  immediately  and  turn 
upon  themselves,  supporting  with  the  loft  leg  the 
haunches  of  their  horses. 

The  movement  being  nearly  terminated,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Forward. 

2.  Guide  rujht  (or  left). 

At  the  first  command,  which  is  forward,  the 
pivots  and  all  the  other  troopers,  conforming  to  the 
principles  of  the  direct  march,  regulate  themselves 
towards  the  guide. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column,  and  having  made  one 
wheel  to  the  bfl  by  fours,  which  puts  it  in  single  rank,  the 
instructor  causea  to  be  executed  a,*tvheel  to  the  left-about 
(or  to  the  riyht-abovt)  by  fours  ;  the  movement  being  nearly 
terminated,  he  commands  : 

1.  Forward. 

2.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

To  put  the  platoon  again  in  column  in  the  natural  order, 
the  instructor  causes  to  be  executed  a  wheel  to  theieft  (or 
io  the  riyht)  by  fours,  and  indicates  the  guide  to  the  left. 


THE   PLATOON.  123 

The  platoon  marcliing  in  column  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  to  cause  it  to  march  to  the  rear,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Bi/  fours  hft-ahout  (or  riglU-ahout)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  right  (or  left).  ^ 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescribed, 
observing  that  the  ranks  of  fours  should  finish  the 
movement  at  the  same  time ;  that  they  should  com- 
mence the  last  half  of  the  wheel  gently,  regulating 
themselves  upon  the  last  rank  of  fours,  which  be- 
coming the  head  of  the  column,  lengthens  the  gait 
so  as  not  to  retard  the  others.  After  this  movement, 
the  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  are  placed  in  front  of 
their  file-leaders. 

To  put  the  column  again  in  the  natural  order,  Xhe  in- 
Btructor  causes  to  be  executed  a  wheel  to  the  right-about  (or 
to  the  left-about)  by  fours. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground 
towards  its  right  6r  towards  its  left,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  fours  right  (or  left)  wheeh 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

The  platoon  having  ivheeled  to  the  right  hy  fours j' 
the  troopers  are  formed  upon  a  front  of  eight. 
Each  rank  of  fours  having  executed  the  movement 
separately,  the  four  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  find 
themselves  on  the  right  of  the  four  troopers  of  the 


124  THE  PLATOON. 

front  rank.*     It  is  the  reverse  if  the  movement  is 
executed  by  the  left. 

The  platoon  having  wheeled  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left)  by 
fourx,  and  being  upon  a  front  of  eight,  to  change  the  di- 
rection, the  instructor  commands : 

Mead  of  column  to  the  left  (or  to  the  right^. 

At  this  command  the  assistant -instructor  commands  : 

1.  Left  (or  right) — Turn.  2.  Forward. 

AViiich  is  executed  as  prescribed,  each  rank  of 
eight  wheeling  upon  the  same  ground  with  the  first 
as  they  reach  it. 

To  put  the  platoon  again  in  line,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  B}/  fours  left  (or  right)  wheel. 

2.  March.; 
8.  Halt. 

4.  Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

5.  Front. 

*  When  it  is  necessary  to  break  a  platoon  by  fours,  and  there  is 
not  sufficient  space  in  front,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Bii  fours  right  (or  left)  wheel, 

2.  March. 

3.  B>/  fou7'S. 

4.  March. 

5.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

At  the  second  command,  the  platoon  wheels  to  the  right  b)'  fours. 
At  the  fourth  command,  the  first  set  of  fours  on  the  ri/j;ht  of  the 
front  rank  moves  forward  ;  wlien  the  crouj^s  of  their  horses  are  op- 
posite the  men  of  the  set  of  fours  of  the  rear  rank  on  their  right, 
this  set  turn  their  horses'  heads  to  the  left,  and  by  an  oblique 
march  cover  their  front  rank  men;  and  so  on  successively.  The 
Bets  of  fours  of  the  front  rank,  take  care  not  to  leave  more  space 
between  them  and  the  set  of  fours  of  the  front  rank,  which  pre- 
cedes them,  than  is  sufficient  to  admit  the  set  of  fours  from  the  rear 
rank. 

This  movement  to  the  left  is  executed  by  inverse  means. 


THE  PLATOON.  125 

The  platoon  having  wheeled  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left)  by 
fours,  and  being  formed  upon  a  front  of  eight,  to  march  to 
the  rear  in  this  order,  the  instructor  causes  to  be  executed 
a  wheel  to  the  right  or  left-about. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  march  to  the 
rear,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Bi/  fours  left-ahout  (or  right-about)  wheel, 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

After  this  movement,  the  rear  rank  is  before  the 
front  rank,  and  the  ranks  of  fours  are  inverted 
throughout  the  platoon. 

In  the  march  to  the  rear,  the  platoon  conforms  to 
the  principles  of  the  direct  march.  The  instructor  re- 
quires the  same  precision  as  when  they  march  in  the 
natural  order. 

The  platoon  is  faced  to  the  front  by  the  same  movement. 

Before  commencing  the  movements  by  fours,  the  in-< 
structor  assures  himself  that  the  troopers  know  their 
numbers,  and  that  those  of  the  rear  rank  are  at  their  pro- 
per distance.  He  observes  that  the  pivots  do  not  slacken 
the  gait  at  the  preparatory  command  ;  that  they  halt  and 
turn  without  reining-back,  at  the  command  march  ;  that 
they  gain  ground  to  neither  side,  and  sustain  the  haunches 
of  their  horses,  regulating  themselves  upon  the  marching 
flanks :  finally,  that  the  men  on  the  marching  flanks  turn 
their  horses  slightly  towards  the  pivots,  and  that  they 
commence  and  close  the  movement  gently. 

In  the  flank  movements,  the  assistant-instructor  places 
himself  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  abreast  of  the  leading 
rank  of  eight.  The  file  closer  ^wr/25  to  the  right  (or  to 
the  left),  and  marches  at  his  place  when  the  platoon  is  in 
line. 

In  the  wheels  to  the  right  or  left-about,  the  platoon 
being  in  line,  the  assistant-instructor  and  file  closer 
wheel  about  separately,    and  are  placed,  the  assistant- 


126  THE  PLATOON. 

instructor  behind  the  centre  of  the  platoon,  the  file- 
closer  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  rear  rank  become  the 
front. 

The  movements  by  fours  should  be  executed  to  the  right 
and  to  the  left  alternately,  and  at  all  the  gaits,  except  the 
gallop. 

When  the  column  is  marching  right  in  front,  it  wheels 
by  fours  to  the  left-about ;  and  when  left  in  front,  it  wheels 
by  fours  to  the  right-about.  ^ 

The  platoon  marching  in  line  with  open  rants,  and  the 
files  one  pace  apart,  the  troopers  are  made  to  execute  the 
manual  of  arms. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  file,  the  troopers 
having  the  distance  of  3  paces,  the  instructor  causes  the 
exercise  of  the  sabre  to  be  executed. 

The  exercise  being  terminated,  the  troopers  are  ordered 
to  dismount  and  file  off. 


To  charge  by  platoon. 

To  charge  by  platoon,  the  instructor  orders  the  sabre 
to  be  drawn.  The  platoon  is  commanded  by  the  assistant- 
instructor,  that  the  instructor  may  be  able  to  move  where 
ever  he  can  best  observe  the  faults. 

The  opposite  line  is  marked  out  200  paces  to  the  front, 
by  two  troopers,  the  distance  of  the  front  of  the  platoon 
apart,  and  facing  each  other. 

To  commence  the  move,  the  assistant-instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoon  foricard. 

2.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

3.  March. 

"When  the  platoon  has  marched  20  paces,  the  assistant- 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Trot.  2.  March. 


THE  PLATOON.  127 

At  60  paces  farther,  he  commands ; 
r    1.  Gallop.  2.  March. 

At  80  paces  further,  he  commands  :  Charge. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  of  both  ranks  take 
the  position  of  raise  sabre.  They  give  hand  and 
lengthen  the  gallop,  without  losing  control  of  their 
horses  or  disuniting. 

When  the  platoon  arrives  at  20  paces  from  the  troopers 
"who  trace  the  new  line,  the  assistant  instructor  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Platoon, 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Ri(jht  (or  left) — Dress. 

5.  Front. 

At  the  command  attention,  the  troopers  carry  the 
eabre  to  the  shoulder. 

At  the  comma,nd  platoo7i,  they  take  the  trot. 

At  the  command  halt,  they  stop. 

At  the  command  riffht — Dress,  they  align  them- 
selves to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front.  ♦ 

The  troopers  should  be  exercised  at  the  charge  with  the 
greatest  care,  without  being  required  to  repeat  it  too 
often.        • 

The  instructor  requires  the  gallop  to  be  kept  up  ;  he  sees 
that  the  troopers  preserve  ease  in  the  ranks,  that  they  hold 
a  light  hand,  so  that  the  horses  not  being  constrained  in 
their  movements  may  not  become  too  restive.  He  observes 
that  the  troopers  carry  the  upper  part  of  the  body  a  little 
forward,  in  order  to  aid  the  impulsion,  remaining  at  the 
Bame  time  well  seated,  which  gives  them  a  facility  in  con- 


128  THE  PLATOON. 

ducting  their  horses  and  using  the  sabre ;  finally,  that 
the  rear  rank  keeps  at  its  proper  distance.  It  is  better, 
however,  that  the  rear  rank  should  have  too  much  thaa 
too  little  room. 

;•  The  instructor  explains  to  the  troopers,  that  it  is  in 
keeping  their  horses  in  hand,  in  causing  them  to  feel  from 
time  to  time  the  effect  of  the  bit,  in  moving  parallel  to 
the  flank  files,  and  remaining  always  abreast  of  them,  that 
the  shock  of  the  charge  becomes  the  greatest.  Finally, 
the  instructor  directs  the  troopers  not  to  change  the  gait 
before  the  command,  and  to  lengthen  the  gallop  only  at 
the  command  chabgk. 

Rallying. 

• 

To  exercise  the  troopers  in  rallying,  the  platoon  is 
formed  at  the  extremity  of  the  ground,  the  sabres  are 
drawn,  and  the  signal  to  disperse  is  sounded ;  at  this  sig- 
nal, the  troopers  disperse  and  charge  as  foragers;  the 
instructor  and  the  flank  tiles  remain  in  place,  to  mark 
out  the  rallying  point.  When  the  troopers  have  marched 
150  or  200  paces,  the  instructor  orders  the  rally  *to  be 
sounded. 

At  this  signal,  the  troopers  wheel  to  the  left-abouty 
rejoin  the  platoon  by  the  shortest  line,  and  resume 
thei^  places  in  the  ranks. 

The  rallying  should  be  executed  rapidly,  but  with- 
out noise,  the  troopers  entering  the  ranks  always  by 
the  rear.  * 

As  soon  as  two-thirds  of  the  troopers  have  joined,  the 
instructor  commands  the  platoon  to  move  forward.  The 
first  time  the  platoon  is  rallied  at  the  trot.,  and  then  at 
the  gallop.  This  movement  is  repeated  without  retaining 
the  flank  files  ;  in  this  case  the  troopers  rally  behind  the 
instructor. 


THE   PLATOON.  129 


Skirmishing. 

The  platoon  being  supposed  to  form  a  part  of  the 
squadron,  it  is  dispersed  as  skirmishers,  in  order  to  cover 
the  front  and  the  flanks  of  the  squadron. 

The  platoon  being  in  line  at  the  extremity  of  the  ground, 
the  instructor  causes  the  schabraques  to  be  raised,  the 
holsters  uncovered,  and  the  arms  loaded  ;  he  marches 
the  platoon  forward,  and  when  he  wishes  to  disperse  the 
troopers  as  skirmishers,  he  commands : 

1.  Six  fles  from  right — as  skirmishers.'^ 

2.  March.  i 

3.  Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  file-closer  places  him- 
self in  front  of  the  six  files  of  the  left,  of  whom  he 
takes  command. 

These  six  files  are  destined  to  support  the  skir- 
mishers and  relieve  them. 

At  the  command  march,  the  file-closer  com- 
mands HALT,  to  the  six  files  of  the  left,  and  causes 
them  to  draw  the  sabre. 

At  the  same  command,  the  six  fiTes  of  the  right 
continue  to  march  forward ;  after  going  ten  paces, 
they  disperse  as  skirmishers,  extending  themselves 
BO  as  to  cover  the  supposed  front  of  a  squadron, 
passing  beyond  each  of  its  flanks.  The  right  trooper 
obliques  to  I  he  right,  the  left  trooper  to  the  left. 
The  troopers  of  the  rear  'lank  come  up  as  soon  as 


*Half  the  platoon  skirmish,  while  the^other  half  remain  as  a 
support;  if  possible,  le*  each  platoon  have  a  minimum  of  16;  then 
8  files  would  skirmish  with  8  in  reserve. 


130  THE  PLATOON. 

possible-,  abrejfst  of  the  front  rank*,  each  one  placing 
himself  on  the  left  of  his  file-leader,  and  as  soon  as 
they  are  in  line,  all  take  the  position  of  advance — 
CARI5INE,  or  rahe — pistol.  They  continue  to 
march  until  the  signal  halt,  No.  2. 

The  instructor  causes  tbe  halt  to  be  sounded  ■when  the 
8kirmislj«rs  are  at  100  or  150  paces  from  the  reserve. 

The  troopers  keep  at  5  paces  apart,  regulating 
themselves  towards  the  guide  during  the  whole  time 
they  act  as  skirmishers. 

The  assistant  instructor  places  himself  in  rear  of  the 
ekirmishers,  in  order  to  superintend  their  movements. 

The  chief  of  the  platoon,  followed  by  his  trumpeter, 
places  himself  halfway  between  the  skirmishers  and  the 
reserve  ;  he  moves  along  the  line  wherever  he  thinks  his 
presence  most  necessary.  The  reserve  and  the  skirmish- 
ers execute  their  movements  at  tbe  signals  of  the  trum- 
peter who  follows  the  officer. 

If  the  chief  of  the  platoon  wishes  the  skirmishers  to 
'move  forward,  he  causes  i\\Q forward.  No.  1,  to  be  sounded ; 
each  skirmisher  moves  forward,  regulating  his  movements 
by  those  of  the  guide,  and  preserving  his  interval  ;  the 
reserve  follows  them,  keeping  at  its  proper  distance. 

To  move  the  skirmishers  towards  the  right,  to  th;  right, 
No.  4,  is  sounded :  each  trooper  turns  to  the  right  and 
marches  in  the  direction  of  those  who  precede  him,  taking 
care  to  preserve  his  distance:  the  reserve  also  turns  to 
the  right. 

To  face  the  skirmishers  again  to  the  front,  to  the  left. 
No,  3,  is  sounded ;  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve  turn 
to  the  left. 

To  move  the  skirmishers  towards  the  left,  to  the  left. 
No.  3  is  sounded ;  e>ich  skirmisher  turns  to  the  left  and 
marches  in  the  direction  of  those  who  prcccdo  him,  taking 


THE   PLATOON.  131 

care  to  preserve  bis  distance.     The  reserve  also  turns  to 
the  left. 

To  face  the  skirmishers  again  to  the  front,  to  the  right, 
No.  4,  is  sounded ;  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve  turn 
to  the  right. 

If,  after  having  turned  to  the  right,  the  instructor 
wishes  the  skirmishers  to  move  towards  the  opposite 
side,  he  orders  the  about,  No.  5,  to  be  sounded  ;  the  skir- 
mishers and  the  reserve  turn  to  the  left-about,  and  move 
forward. 

If,  after  having  turned  to  the  left,  the  instructor  wishes 
the  skirmishers  to  move  towards  the  opposite  side,  he 
causes  the  about,  No.  6,  to  be  sounded;  the  skirmishers 
and  the  reserve  turn  to  the  right-about,  and  move  forward. 

During  the  flank  movements,  if  the  troopers  are  to  con- 
tinue firing,  they  leave  the  column  and  face  the  enemy 
for  that  purpose.  As  soon  as  they  have  fired,  they  resume 
their  places  in  the  column,  doubling  the  gait. 

The  skirmishers  are  marching  to  the  front  or  at  a  halt; 
if  the  instructor  wishes  the  line  to  move  to  the  rear,  the 
chief  of  platoon  orders  the  retreat  to  be  sounded.  At  this 
signal,  the  troopers  of  the  front  rank  move  forward  5 
paces,  fire,  then  turn  to  the  left-about,  in  order  to  move  to 
the  rear,  and  retire  loading  their  pieces.  When  they 
have  marched  50  paces,  or  more,  if  necessary,  the  chief 
of  platoon  causes  the  about,  No.  5,  to  be  sounded.  At  this 
signal,  the  troopers,  who  are  retiring,  face  to  the  front 
by  turning  to  the  right-about.  The  troopers  who  are  ia 
the  first  line  fire  and  turn  to  the  left-about,  retire,  loading 
their  pieces,  pass  in  the  interval  of  the  line  which  is  in 
rear,  move  50  paces  farther,  and  face  to  the  front  at  tAe 
signal  the  about,  No.  5. 

The  troopers  of  the  line  which  is  in  rear,  move  5  paces 
to  the  front  the  moment  the  troopers  who  retire  pass  into 
their  intervals;  they  then  commence  firing  by  the  flank 
indicated. 

The  alternate  movement  of  the  two  lines  continues  as 
long  as  the  skirmishers  move  to  the  rear.     When  the  in-* 
structor  wishes  the  retreat  to  cease,  the  chief  of  platooa 
orders /oru^arrf,  No.  1,  to  be  sounded.     The  skirmishers 


132  THE   PLATOON. 

who  fire  in  roar  move  up,  doubling  the  gftit,  abreast  of 
those  the  most  advanced,  and  all  march  forward  until  the 
signal  (0  halt.  No.  2,  is  sounded. 

If  the  instructor  wishes  the  whole  line  of  skirmishers  to 
retire  at  once,  he  orders  the  about.  No.  5,  to  be  sounded. 

The  reserve  retires  and  faces  to  the  front,  regulating 
its  raovemont  by  that  of  tbe  skirmishers,  so  as  to  remain 
always  at  CO  paces  from  the  second  line.  It  executes  its 
rear  movement  at  the  moment  the  retreating  line  passes 
into  the  intervals  of  the  line  which  moves  forward. 

The  rallying  of  skirmishers  is  always  made  on  the  point 
occupied  by  the  officer. 

To  rally  the  skirmishers,  the  officer  places  himself 
habitually  in  front  of  the  reserve,  and  causes  the  rally, 
No.  6,  to  be  sounded.  At  this  sig?ial,  the  skirmishers 
turn-about,  rally  on  the  reserve  by  tlie  shortest  route,  and 
draw  the  sfibre. 

If  the  officer  is  not  with  the  re-ervc  when  the  rally. 
No.  6,  is  sounded,  the  skirmishers  rally  upon  him,  and 
the  reserve  comes  up  and  joins  thoni.  The  troopers  are 
thus  exercised  to  raliy  upon  any  point  whatever  of  the 
line. 

If  a  defile  is  presented  in  advance  of  th?  front  of  the 
line,  and  orders  are  given  to  pass  it,  the  troopers  who  are 
opposite  first  enter  it ;  they  are  followed  at  some  distance 
by  the  other  troopers,  who  turn  by  tro"per  to  the  left,  and 
to  the  rif/ht,  in  order  to  put  themselves  in  file. 

As  soon  as  the  first  have  passed  the  defile,  they  move 
5^  or  GO  paces  to  the  front;  the  otiicrs  come  up  abreast 
of  them  obliquing,  those  of  the  right  to  the  right,  and 
those  of  the  left  to  the  left.  The  reserve  enters  the  defile 
when  the  first  skirmishers  have  reconnoitered  it. 

If  the  skirmishers  are  to  pass  a  defile  placed  in  rear, 
they  commence  by  approaching  it;  when  the  reserve  is 
at  a  suitable  distance  it  passes  rapidly,  and  posts  itself 
50  or  GO  paces  from  and  on  the  side  of  the  passage. 

Tlie  two  troopers  who  are  on  the  flunk,  turn-about  to  the 
left,  move  to  the  reur  so  as  to  arrive  together  at  the  en- 


THE   PLATOON.  133 

trance  of  the  dcfile.^which  they  pass  inimedifttely.  They 
are  followed  closely  by  the  other  troopers,  who  execute 
successively  the  same  movement  ;  the  centre  troopers, 
"who  cover  the  defile,  enter  it  the  last. 

At  the  going  out  of  the  defile,  the  two  troopers  who 
are  in  front  turn,  one  to  the  left,  and  the  other  to  the 
right;  and  when  all  the  troopers  have  passed  the  defile, 
they  stop  at  the  signal  to  halt,  No.  2,  and  face  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  sometimes  rallies  the  skirmishers  imme. 
diately  after  having  passed  the  defile,  either  to  the  front 
or  to  the  rear. 

These  movements  are  at  first  executed  at  the  walk,  then 
at  the  trot,  and  finally  at  the  gallop.  When  the  troopers 
have  learned  to  perform  these  movements  well,  they  are 
exercised  at  them,  in  executing  the  manual  of  arras,  and 
in  firing :  and  finally,  with  the  overcoats  rolled  and  car- 
ried over  the  shoulder.  When  the  troopers  are  at  the 
gallop,  and  the  instructor  wishes  thera  to  pass  to  the  trot, 
he  orders  the  trot,  No.  7,  to  be  sounded ;  when  they  are 
at  the  trot,  and  he  wishes  them  to  pass  to  the  walk,  he  or- 
ders the  halt,  No.  2,  and  then  the  forward,  No.  1,  to  be 
sounded. 

To  commence  or  to  cease  firing,  the  signal  is  sounded. 
All  the  troopers  do  not  fire  at  once,  but  one  after  another, 
commencing  on  the  side  of  the  guide.  They  afterwards 
continue  firing  without  waiting  for,  or  being  governed  by 
each  other.  Each  rear-rank  man  has  an  understanding 
with  his  file-leader  that,  as  far  as  practicable,  the  piece 
of  one  may  be  always  charged  while  the  other  is  loading; 
the  troopers  of  the  same  file  should  give  a  mutual  sup- 
port to  each  other. 

When  the  platoon  skirmishes  without  gaining  ground 
to  the  front,  the  skirmishers  should  nevertheless  keep  in 
motion  always ;  each  trooper  of  the  front  rank,  after 
Laving  fired,  moves  some  steps  to  the  rear,  at  the  same 
time  loading  his  piece  ;  and  as  soon  as  he  returns  to  the 
line,  the  rear-rank  man  of  the  same  file  fires,  and  moves 
in  his  turn  to  the  rear. 
12 


134  THE   PLATOON. 

In  the  charge  as  foragera,  the  men  of  the  rear-rank 
approach  within  one  or  two  paces  of  their  file-leaders,  to 
be  able  to  support  each  other  mutual!}'. 

As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  charge,  the  reserve  moves 
forwiird  to  support  them. 

The  skirmishers  retire  by  turnirig-about  to  the  left,  and 
face  again  to  the  front  by  turning-ahoiit  to  the  right. 
When  tliey  have  re-formed  in  platoon,  they  return  the 
pistol  to  the  holster,  or  drop  the  carbine,  and  draw  the 
gab  re. 

To  relieve  skirmishers,  the  instructor  commands  to  the 
reserve ; 

1.  Six  files  from  left — as  skirmishers. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right. 

*  At  the  command  march,  the  reserve  disperses 
and  moves  up  upon  the  line  of  old  skirmishers. 
The  right  trooper  of  the  front  rank  passes  on  the 
right  of  the  right  skirmisher  of  the  front  rank: 
the  right  trooper  of  the  rear  rank,  on  the  right  of 
the  right  skirmisher  of  the  rear  rank,  and  so  on 
throughout,  each  one  passing  to  tlie  right  of  the 
one  he  relieves,  and  5  paces  beyond  him.  The  old 
skirmishers  turn-about  and  rally  at  a.  gallop  on  the 
officer,  who  during  the  movement  is  placed  at  the 
point  whore  the  six  files  now  become  the  reserve 
should  re-form. 

.  The  non-commissioned  officer  who  commanded  the 
six  files  of  the  left  now  takes  command  of  the  six 
files  of  the  right. 

If  there  arc  two  non-commissioned  officers  with  the 
platoon,  each  one  follows  the  portion  of  the  platoon  to 
which  ho  is  attached. 


THE   PLATOON.  135 

Dragoons. — The  dragoons  having  been  sufficiently 
exercised  in  all  the  movements  of  skirmishing,  will  be 
taught  to  dismount  and  form  with  celerity  to  fight  on 
foot. 

At  the  commencement,  all  the  movements  of  this  in- 
struction will  be  decomposed,  in  order  to  make  them 
better  understood. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Prepare  to  fight — On  foot. 
1  timej  4  motions. 

1st.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  on 
FOOT,  prepare  to  dismount  as  prescribed. 

2d,  Execute  what  is  prescribed,  to  dismount ;  Nos.  4,  of 
each  rank,  will  remain  mounted. 

3d.  Return  to  the  ranks  as  prescribed,  face  to  the  right, 
pass  the  reins  with  the  right  hand  over  the  head  of  the 
horse,  seize  the  extremity  of  the  reins,  with  the  left 
hand,  seize  them  again  with  the  right  hand,  6  inches 
from  the  mouth  of  the  horse,  the  nails  upward;  face  to 
the  froflt,  and  hook  up  the  sabre  without  letting  go  tU^ 
reins. 

4th.  Face-about  to  the  right,  seizing  the  reins  with  the 
left  hand,  6  inches  from  the  mouth  of  the  horse,  the  nails 
downward  ;  slip  the  right  hand  to  the  extremity  of  the, 
rein  ;  Nos.  3,  of  each  rank,  give  the  reins  to  Nos.  4,  who 
remain  mounted  :  Nos,  2  and  1  engage  the  end  of  the 
reins  with  both  hands,  in  the  head-stall  of  the  bridle  of 
the  horse  which  is  on  the  left,  passing  then?  under  the 
nose  band  and  the  cheek  piece  of  the  bridlo,  and  tying 
them  in  a  slip  knot,  so  tliat  each  horse  may  be  about  one 
foot  from  the  one  to  which  he  is  tied  ;  face  again  to  the 
front  by  the  right,  unsling  the  carbine,  and  come  to  a 
carry.  .    . 

The  instructor  commands : 

Dragoons — Into  line. 
1  time. 


136  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  l.isl  part  of  tlie  commnn'l,  -which  is  into  line, 
move  twelve  paces  to  the  front,  turninp;  the  back  upon 
the  platoon  of  horses;  half  the  rear  rank  pass  to  the 
right  l»y  the  right  flank,  the  other  half  to  the  left  by  the 
left-flank,  and  place  themselves  behind  tlieir  file-leaders. 

Nos.  4,  who  remain  on  horseback,  have  charge  of  the 
dismounted  horses  ;  they  take  the  end  of  the  reins  of  the 
first  disTuounted  horse  in  the  left  hand,  holding  them 
near  the  bit  with  the  right  hand,  the  nails  downward;  aa 
assistant-instructor,  or  file-closer  of  the  platoon,  remains 
with  the  dismounted  horses  to  direct  them. 

The  dragoons  having  been  sufficiently  exercised  at  the 
diflf"erent  movements  of  this  instruction,  will  be  required 
to  execute  them  rapidly  without  stopping  at  the  several 
motions,  and  at  the  single  command,  prepare  to  fight  on 
foot,  given  by  the  instructor. 

The  two  ranks  being  formed,  the  platoon  will  be  con- 
ducted where  it  is  to  fight  on  foot,  and  will  there  ma- 
noeavre  as  light  infantry.* 

The  dismounted  horses  will  also  be  exercised  ia 
changing  position,  by  marching  by  rank  and  by  fours. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  the  dragoons  to  rsmount, 
he  will  rally  them  if  they  are  dispersed  as  skirmishers. 

The  platoon  being  rallied  aud  formed,  the  instructor 
commands : 

DragoonSy  about — Face. 

ITe  conducts  the  platoon  rear-rank  in  front ;  having 
come  within  12  paces  of  the  horses,  he  commands: 

Dragoons — Mount. 

At  this  command,  tlje  dragoons  return  to  their  horses 
rapidly,  without  alarming  them ;  they  sling  carbine, 
mount,  and  draw  tlie  sabre. 

The  command,  dragoons — mounts  at  the  commencement, 

♦  Draproons  are  armed  with  good  lonj?  range  puns,  nnd  should  be 
as  exfxTt  in  tlio  lif^ht  infantry  as  in  cavalry  tactics;  the  best  book  is 
that  uf  Col.  Haudek. 


THE  PLATOON.  13Y 

will  be  executed  in  4  motions,  and  from  a  halt,  that  the 
troopers  may  better  understand  it.  For  this  purpose,  the 
platoou  being  rallied  and  marching  with  the  rear-rank 
iu  front,  is  halted  12  paces  from  the  horses:  the  instruc- 
tor then  commands : 

Dragoons — Mount. 

1  time,  4  motions, 

l.'At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  mount, 
sling  the  carbine. 

2.  Rejoin  the  horses,  the  rear  rank  men  passing  to  the 
left  and  right,  as  prescribed  in  dismounting;  untie  the 
horse,  pass  the  reins  over  the  neck,  unhook  the  sabre, 
and  take  the  position  of  the  trooper  before  mounting. 

3.  Execute  the  two  times  of  prepdre  to  mount. 

4.  Execute  the  two  times  of  mount,  adjust  the  reins, 
return  to  the  ranks,  and  draw  the  sabre. 

To  sling  and   unsling  the  carbine  (or 
short  rifle.) 

The  piece  being  at  the  dragoon's  right  side,  butt  on  the 
ground,  that  is,  at  the  order  arms,  the  command  is : 

Sling — Carbine. 

1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  cakbine, 
raise  the  carbine  perpendicularly  with  the  right  h  and,  and 
place  it  in  the  left  hand,  which  seizes  it  below  the  lower 
band,  the  thumb  extended,  the  barrel  to  the  front ;  in- 
cline the  carbine  to  the  right,  that  the  rings  may  hang 
down,  the  left  hand  as  high  as  and  opposite  to  the  neck  ; 
slip  the  swivel  to  the  front  with  the  right  hand,  the 
thumb  pressing  upon  the  short  side  to  open  it,  insert  it  iu 
the  rings. 


138  THE  PLATOON. 

2.  Seize  the  carbine  at  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the 
right  hand,  let  it  go  with  the  left  hand,  which  is  dropped 
by  the  side  :  pass  the  carbine  behind  the  back,  lowering 
the  muzzle,  push  the  butt  to  the  rear,  and  drop  the  right 
hand  by  the  side. 

Unsling — Carbine. 

1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  carbine, 
seize  the  carbine  at  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand,  raise  it,  seize  it  again  with  the  left  hand  below  the 
lower  band,  the  thumb  extended,  the  hand  as  high  as, 
and  opposite  to  the  neck  ;  incline  the  carbine  to  the  right, 
free  the  swivel  from  the  rings  with  the  right  hand,  and 
push  the  swivel  to  the  rear. 

2.  Seize  the  carbine  with  the  right  hand,  above  and 
near  the  left  hand  ;  bring  it  down,  turning  it  at  the  same 
time,  and  resume  the  position  of  order. 

To  leap  the  ditch  and  the  bar. 

The  instructor  causes  the  troopers  to  leap  the  ditch  and 
the  bar  by  twos  and  by /ours,  and  then  by  platoon. 

To  leap  the  ditch. 

On  arriving  near  the  ditch,  give  the  hand  and  close  the 
legs,  to  force  the  horse  to  make  the  leap.  The  moment 
he  reaches  the  ground,  raise  slightly  the  hand  in  order  to 
sustain  him. 

To  leap  the  bar. 

On  arriving  near  the  bar,  rein  up  the  horse  slightly, 
and  close  the  legs.  At  the  moment  of  making  the  leap, 
give  the  hand,  and  elevate  it  slightly  as  soon  as  he  reaches 
the  ground  on  the  other  side. 


THE  PLATOON.  139 

The  trooper,  in  leaping,  should  cling  to  the  horse  "with 
the  thighs  and  calves  of  the  legs,  taking  care  to  lean  a 
little  forward  as  the  horse  is  in  the  act  of  springing,  and 
to  seat  himself  well  by  leaning  to  the  rear  at  the  moment 
the  horse  reaches  the  ground. 

Each  trooper,  after  having  made  the  leap,  continues  to 
move  a(  the  trot,  and  takes  his  place  in  the  rank  which  jis 
formed  thirty  paces  beyond  the  obstacle,  taking  care  to 
pass  to  the  walk  just  before  halting. 

During  the  first  days  of  this  exercise,  the  troopers  leap 
without  arms. 

When  the  troopers  have  leaped  without  arms,  they  re- 
peat the  same  exercise  with  arms,  and  finally  with  the 
sabre  drawn. 

.  The  horses  employed  should  be  trained  and  accustomed 
to  leaping.  If,  however,  a  horse  refuses  to  leap,  the  in- 
structor aids  the  trooper  with  the  whip. 

Remark. — The  last  four  lessons  belong  to  the  drill  of 
the  trooper,  but  in  most  cases  may  be  deferred  until  the 
close  of  the  platoon  exercises. 


CAVALRY  TACTICS. 


PART   THIRD. 


Jrill  of  tijt  S^iua^in'tfn. 

A  Squadron  is  composed  of  4  platoons,  and  is 
the  proper  tactical  unit  of  Cavalry. 

As  the  Cavalry  platoon  always  contains  12  or  10 
FILES,  and  is  subdivided  into  fours,  the  Squadron 
is  always  (in  rank  and  file)  a  multiple  of  4  and  of 
either  12  or  16.  The  rank  and  file  strictly  includes 
those  only  who  are  counted  or  told  off  in  the  fours. 

If  the  number  of  troopers  is  sufficient,  the  pla- 
toon of  16  files  is  preferable;  for  then  there^will 
be  in  each  platoon  suh-divisions  of  8  files,  called  sec- 
tions. 

Platoons  of  12  are  not  divisible  into  sections,  for 
the  cavalry  section  requires  2  fours. 

Two  platoons,  containing  24  or  32  files,  forming 
a  company,  division,  or  half-squadron,  is  drilled  on 
the  same  principles  as  tha  complete  squadron  ;  for 
which  purpose  officers,  guides  and  file-closers  will  be 
posted,  as  in  the  squadron  formation. 


THE   SQUADRON.  141 

The  senior  officer  is  1st  Captain  and  Chief  of 
the  squadron  ;  the  next  in  rank  is  2d  Captain.  He 
is  charged  with  the  alignment  and  supervision  of 
the  rear-rank  and  file-cIosers. 

The  \st  Lieutenant  commands  the  1st  platoon. 

The  Lieutenant  2d  in  rank  commands  the  4th 
platoon. 

The  Lieutenant  3d  in  rank  commands  the  2(1 
platoon. 

The  Lieutentant  4th  in  rank  commands  the  3d 
platoon. 

The  number  of  officers  and  non-commissioned 
officers  of  a  squadron  is  22 :  viz.  6  officers^  8  ser- 
geants and  8  corporals.  Vacancies,  if  any,  must 
be  filled  from  the  next  lower  grade.  In  assigning 
positions,  the  Chief  will  be  styled  No.  1,  the  2d 
Captain  No.  2,  and  so  on  to  the  8th  corporal,  who 
will  be  No,  22. 

The  positions  in  line  of  battle  are  as 
follows  : 

No.  1,  1  yard  in  front  of  centre  of  squadron. 

No.  2,  3  yards  in  rear  '*  ** 

No.  3,  1  yard  in  front  "  1st  platoon. 


No.  4,  1 

(t 

'«              "            4th        *' 

No.  5,  1 

i( 

<(              ((            2d         " 

No.  6,  1 

(( 

"                  u                3(1           a 

No.  7,  1 
No.  8,  1 

rear  of  3d  file  from  right  of  squadron. 
♦*               •'             left               '♦ 

No.  9,  on  1 
No.  10,  on 

[•IgHt  of  squadron — not  counted, 
left             "              »«         « 

No.  11, 
No.  12,  on 

right 

Ist  platoon — is  counted, 
of  2d       *'          ♦•        ♦' 

142  THE   SQUADRON. 

No.  13,  on  loft  of  3d  platoon — is  counted. 

No.  14,  ou  right  of  4tli     "  ♦« 

No.  15  "  1st     «'  «' 

No,  in,  on  left  but  one,  1st  platoon — is  counted. 

No.  17,  on  right       •'      2il        "  '♦ 

No.  18,  on  left  of  2iJ  platoon — is  counted. 

No.  19,  on  right  of  3d     ♦'  ♦♦ 

No.  20,  on  left  but  one,  3d  plntoon — is  counted. 

No.  21,  on  right      "      4th       '•  «♦ 

No.  22,  on  left  of  4th  platoon — is  counted. 

Remark. —  The  commamler  may  post  his  Corporals 
from  right  to  left,  either  by  their  height  or  according 
to  rank. 


Positions  in  columns  of  twos  and  fours. 

No.  1,  4  yards  from  flank,  on  side  of  guides,  abreast 
centre  of  squadron. 

No.  2,  4  yards  from  flank,  opposite  the  guides,  abreast 
centre  of  squadron. 

No.  3,  1  yard  in  advance  of  the  Icailing  files  of  squadron. 

Nos.  4,  5  and  G,  1  yard  from  tlu"  tlixnk,  on  side  of  guides, 
abreast  the  fro>»t  files  of  their  phitoons ;  this  is  when  the 
rijht  is  in  front. 

When  the  left  is  in  front,  No.  4  heads  the  column,  and 
Nos.  3,  5  and  G  are  one  yard  to  the  right  of  the  column, 
and  abreast  of  their  leading  files ;  Nos.  1  and  2  being  oa 
the  right  and  left,  at  4  yards  distance. 

Nos.  7  and  S  (file-closers)  one  yard  from  the  flank, 
opposite  to  the  guides,  and  abreast  the  centre  of  their 
platoons. 

Nos.  11  and  12,  c^c,  to  No.  22,  in  their  places  as 
counted  in  the  twos  and  fours. 

For  the  order  in  column  of  platoons  and  divisions,  see 

PLATOON  DRILL. 

The  music  is  25  yards  in  year  of  the  centre  when  in 
line;  the  same  distance  from  the  flauk,  opposite  to  the 


THE   SQUADRON.  143 

guides,  wben  in  column,  until  ordered  to  the  front  or  rear 
by  the  commanding  officer.  One  or  more  trumpeters, 
as  may  be  ordered,  accompany  the  commander  of  the 
squadron. 

The  captain  commanding  causes  the  officers  to  alternate 
in  the  command  of  the  platoons,  that  they  may  become 
familiar  with  all  the  positions  in  the  squadron. 

He  obi^erves  the  same  course  with  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  and  gives  them  sometimes  the  command 
of  a  nlatoou,  to  enable  them  to  replace  an  officer,  should 
it  become  necessary. 

To  make  the  formations  in  line  better  understood,  they 
are  executed  at  first  from  a  halt.  In  this  case  each  pla- 
toon performs  its  movements  separately  and  successively, 
at  the  command  of  its  chief,  on  receiving  notice  from  the 
captftin  commanding. 

Each  movement,  after  having  been  correctly  executed 
by  the  right,  is  repeated  by  the  left. 

When  the  squadron  has  acquired  calmness  and  confi- 
dence, and  one  article  is  well  understood,  this  article  is 
repeated  with  sabres  drawn,  and  alternately  at  all  the 
gaits,  except  the  wheels  to  the  right,  to  the  left,  to  the  right' 
about,  and  to  the  left-about  by  fours,  the  counter-march,  the 
wheels  on  a  moveable  pivot  by  squadron,  the  individual 
oblique  marches  when  inarching  by  squadron,  which  are 
executed  only  at  the  walk  and  at  the  trot. 

The  second  captain  is  charged  with  the  alignment  of 
the  rear-rank  and  the  rank  of  file-closers;  he  resumes 
his  place  in  line  at  the  command  front. 

The  ciiptain  comman(5ing  moves  wherever  his  presence 
is  most  required ;  the  troopers  are  required  to  observe 
absolute  silence,  and  all  rectifications  are  done  by  signs, 
or  in  a  low  voice. 

The  squadron  being  formed  in  two  ranks  opened,  the 
non-commissioned   officers  and    troopers  at  Iho    head  of 
their  horses,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  mounted,  at  JO  paces 
from  and  facing  the  centre  of  their  platoon,  the  ca|ptaia  ^ 
commanding  commands : 


144  THE   SQUADRON. 

*1.  Attention.  *         3.  Front. 

2.  Right — Dress. 

He  then  commands :  ,       '    » 

In  each  platoon — and  in  each  ranlc — Count  (hy^ 
fours. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  count  off  in  the 
four  platoons  at  once,  commencing  on  the  ri^t  of 
each  rank. 

The  captain  commanding  then  gives  the  command  to 
mount. 

At  the  command  form — ranks,  the  chiefs  of 
platoon  move  forward,  face  to  the  front  by  turning 
to  the  right-about,  and  place  themselves  before  the 
centre  of  their  platoons,  the  croup  of  their  horses 
one  pace  from  the  head  of  the  horses  of  the  front- 
rank.     The  file-closers  follow  the  rear-rank. 

Successive  alignment  of  platoons  in  the 
squadron. 

■I 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  captain-commanding 
places  the  two  non-commissioned  officers,  principal  guides 
of  the  right  and  left,  upon  a  line  parallel  to  the  front  of 
the  squadron,  at  30  paces  from  the  particular  guides, 
and  facing  each  other  as  if  they  were  placed  on  interme- 
diate points.       i;j 

On  receiving  notice  from  the  captain-commanding,  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  :  1.  Flatoon  forward; 
2.  Ouide  right;  3.  March. 

*  T!ie  orderly  sergeant  c»lls  the  roll,  and  reports  the  number  of 
absentees  to  the  commanding  officer,  as  soon  as  the  squadron  is 
formed. 


THE   SQUADRON.  145 

At  the  command  march,  the  platoon  moves  forward ; 
at  one  pace  from  the  point  which  marks  the  new  align- 
ment, the  chief  of  the  platoon  commands :  1.  Halt  ;  2. 
Right — Dress. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  and  the 
particular  guide  of  the  right,  continue  to  march  on  and 
establish  themselves  immediately,  the  latter  bringing  the 
head  of  his  horse  against  the  boot  of  the  principal  guide 
of  the  right. 

The  first  platoon  being  correctly  aligned,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  By  platoon — Right — Dress. 

2.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  commands :  1.  Platoon  forward ;  1.  Guide 
right;  3.  March.  The  platoon  having  arrived 
abreast  of  the  file-closers  of  the  platoon  which  forma 
the  base  of  the  alignment,  he  commands  :  1.  Halt; 
2.  Right — Dress,  and  at  the  same  time  moves  for- 
ward On  the  line  of  the  chief  of  that  platoon. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  platoon  stops.  At 
the  command  Right — Dress,  all  the  troopers  move 
forward  together  upon  the  alignment. 

Each  chief  of  platoon  executes  successively  the 
same  movement,  commanding  march  when  the  one 
who  precedes  him  has  commanded  halt. 

The  particular  guide  of  the  left,  at  the  command 
halt,  from  the  chief  of  the  fourth  platoon,  brings 
up  the  head  of  his  horse  against  the  boot  of  the 
principal  guide  of  the  left. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  captain  com- 
manding commands;  Front. 

This  alignment  being  correctly  executed, 'it  is  repeated, 
giving  the  new  base  o#  alignment  a  direction  oblique  to 
13 


146  THE   SQUADRON. 

the  front  of  the  squadron.  For  this  purpose,  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  on  receiving  notice  from  the  captain- 
commanding,  moves  his  platoon  24  paces  forward,  causes 
it  to  execute  a  half-wheel  to  the  right  at  the  commands  : 
1:  Right  half — Wheel;  2.  Forward  ;  and  after  march- 
ing it  6  paces  in  the  new  direction,  he  halts  and  aligns  it. 
The  first  platoon  being  correctly  aligned,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  By  platoon — Right — Dress. 

2.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  movement  is  executed 
successively ;  each  chief  of  platoon  moves  straight 
forward,  and  commands  :  1.  Right  half — Whej:l; 
2.  Forward,  so  that  his  platoon  may  finish  its 
wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot  at  the  moment  the  right 
arrives  opposite  the  left  of  the  platoon  which  pre- 
cedes it. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands:  Front. 

The  captain  commanding  causes  these  diflFerent  align- 
ments to  be  executed  by  the  left,  following  the  same  prin- 
ciples, but  by  inversQ  means. 

To  open  and  close  the  ranks. 

To  open  the  ranks,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Rear  rank  open  order, 

2.  March. 

3.  Right — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

"Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  platoon. 
The  troopers  of  the  rear  rauii  rein  back  6  paces; 


I 

i 


THE  SQUADRON.  147 

and  tlie  chiefs  of  platoons,  at  the  command  MARCH, 
move  forward  6  paces,  and  face  the  centre  of  their 
platoons  by  turning  to  the  left-ahout. 

To  close  the  ranks,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Rear  rank  close  order. 

2.  March. 

8.  Right — Dress. 
4.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon 
drill.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  move  forward  at  the 
command  MARCH,  face  to  the  front  by  a  turn  to  the 
right-about,  and  place  themselves  opposite  the  centre 
of  their  platoons. 

To  break  the  squadron  by  fours. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands: 

'   1.  B^  fours.  3.   Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon places  himself  in  front  of  the  four  files  of  the 
right,  the  right  particular  guide  places  himself  on 
his  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  first  files 
-march  straight  forward,  and  are  followed  by  all  the 
other  files  who  break  successively,  as  prescribed  in 
the  platoon. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  platoons  break  with  the 
four  first  files  of  their  platoons,  keeping  abreast  of 
them  and  at  one  pace  from  the  flank  of  the  column 


148  THE    SQUADRON. 

on  the  side  of  the  guide,  each  rank  of  fours  preserv- 
ing between  them  the  distance  of  2  feet. 

Change  of  direction. 

The  column  inarching  in  column  by  fours,  right  in  front, 
to  change  the  direction,  the  first  captain  commands : 

Head  of  column  to  the-  left  (or  to  the  right). 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  Platoon, 
the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  conforming  to  what  is 
indicated  for  the  assistant  instructor. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by 
fours,  to  form  it  to  the  front,  to  the 
left,  or  on  right  into  line. 

''•The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Front  into  line.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  first  files  con- 
tinue to  march  straight  forward;  when  they  have 
marched  30  paces,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
commands :  Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  four  first  files  halt  square* 
to  the  front,  the  particular  guide  of  the  right  re- 
turns to  the  right  of  the  squadron.  All  the  other 
files  come  up  successively,  and  without  the  com- 
mands of  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  form  to  the  left  and 
upon  the  alignment  of  the  first. 


THE   SQUADRON.  149 

The  first  captain,  who  moves  to  the  right  flank 
after  the  command  march,  commands  the  align- 
ment when  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands 

HALT. 

The  second  captain  moves  also  to  the  right 
flank,  after  the  command  march,  in  order  to  rec- 
tify the  alignment  of  the  rear  rank  and  of  the  file- 
closers. 

As  soon  as  the  chiefs  of  platoon  arrive  upon  the 
line,  they  place  themselves  at  the  centre  of  their 
platoons  and  align  themselves. 

The  particular  guide  of  the  left  returns  to  the 
left  of  the  squadron,  when  the  four  last  files  arrive 
upon  the  line. 

The  first  captain  commands  front  when  the  four  last 
files  are  aligned. 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  it  in  line 
on  its  left  flank,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Left  into  line.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  leading  files 
turn  to  the  left  and  march  straight  forward ;  when 
they  have  marched  30  paces,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  commands  :  Halt.  « 

At  this  command,  the  four  leading  files  halt, 
and  the  particular  guide  places  himself  on  the 
right  of  the  squadron.  All  the  other  files  come 
up  successively,  and  without  the  command  of 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  form  to  the  left  and  on 
the  alignment  of  the  first,  observing  to  keep  in 
the  same  direction,  before   turning  to  the   left,  so 


150  THE   SQUADRON. 

as  not  to  approach  the  new  line  until  the  proper 
time. 

The  first  and  second  captains,  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon, and  the  particular  guide  of  the  left,  con- 
form exactly  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  front  into 

line. 
* 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  line  upon 
the  prolongation  and  in  advance  of  its  right  flank,  the  first 
captain  commands: 

1.  On  right  into  line.  3.  7??'^7i^— Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  marcit,  the  four  leading  files 
turn  to  the  right,  and  march  straightforward  ;  when 
they  have  marched  30  paces,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  commands :  Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  four  leading  files  halt, 
and  the  right  particular  guide  takes  his  place  on 
the  right  of  the  squadron.  All  the  other  files 
continue  to  march  forward,  and  come  up  succes- 
sively without  the  commands  of  the  chiefs  of 
platoon,  forming  to  the  left  and  upon  the  align- 
ment of  the  first,  observing  to  keep  themselves 
square  in  the  same  direction  before  turning  to  the 
right,  so  as  not  to  approach  the  new  line  before  the 
proper  time. 

The  first  and  second  captains,  the  chiefs  of 
platoon,  and  the  left  particular  guide,  conform 
exactly  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  front  into  line. 

The  squadron  is  broken  by  the  left,  at  the  commands  : 
1.  By  fours  from  the  left;  2.  March;  3.  Guide  right. 
"When  the  principles  of  the  direct  march  in  column  by 


THE  SQUADRON.  151 

fours,  the  cbanges  of  direction,   the  obliques,  and   the 
different  formations  in   line    are   firmly   impressed,    all 
these  movements  are  executed  at  the  trot,  and  then  at  the 
.  gallop. 

To  regulate  the  rapidity  of  the  gaits. 

• 

When  the'  marclies  and  formations,  prescribed  above, 
have  given  sufficient  uniformity  and  precision  to  the  gait, 
the  captain  commanding  vf\\\  regulate  their  rapidity. 
For  this  purpose  he  measures  off  two  distances,  each  about 
1,000  paces,  and  causes  them  to  be  passed  over  succes- 
sively at  all  the  gaits,  to  assure  himself  that,  at  the  walk, 
from  100  to  110  paces  is  passed  over  per  minute,  at  the 
trot,  from  200  to  240  per  minute,  and  at  the  gallop,  about 
300  paces  per  minute. 

When  tlie  rapidity  of  the  gaits  has  been  properly  de- 
termined the  squadron  is  required  to  pass  successively 
from  the  walk  to  the  trot,  and  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop,  and 
if  the  column  becomes  disunited  at  the  gallop,  it  resumes 
the  trot,  and  then  the  walk. 

When  the  squadron  has  acquired  precision  and  regu- 
larity in  the  formations  at  the  different  gaits,  the  captain 
commandinff  exercises  the  squadron  in  breaking  by  fours 
from  a  halt^a^  the  trot,  and  at  the  gallop. 

In  very  even  ground,  the  distance  above  indicated  may 
be  passed  over  in  a  shorter  time,  but  the  rapidity  of  the 
gaits  should  be  increased  only  under  extraordinary  cir- 
cumstances. 

To  form  the  squadron  in  one  rank,  and 
to  form  it  in  two  ranks. 

To  form  the  squadron  in  one  rank,  and  to  re-form  it  in 
two  ranks,  the  captain  commanding  conforms  to  what  is 
prescribed  in  the  platoon. 

The  formation  of  the  squadron  in  one  rank,  is  employed 


152  THE   SQUADRON. 

for  inspections;  in  this  case,  the  officers  pass  to  the 
right  of  the  squadron,  and  after  them,  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  troopers,  and  trumpeters,  according  to 
their  rank. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  form  it  in 
■♦  column  with  distance. 

The  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Platoons  right  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  left  file  of  each  pla- 
toon prepares  to  step  ofi"  promptly,  and  the"  pivot  to 
turn  upon  its  own  ground. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  right,  following  the  principles  of 
the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  the  marching  flanks  tak- 
ing care  to  step  ofl"  and  wheel  together. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  marching  flanks  and 
all  the  troopers  halt  at  the  same  instant,  those  of 
the  rear  rank  resuming  their  places  behind  their 
file-leaders. 

The  first  captain  commands  halt,  when  the  platoons 
have  nearly  completed  the  wheels. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon,  without  leaving  the  centre  of  their 
platoons,  observe  that  the  movement  is  correctly  exe- 
cuted ;  after  the  wheels,  if  any  guide  finds  himself  not  in 
the  direction  of  the  one  preceding  him,  he  should  not  en- 
deavor to  correct  his  position  until  after  the  march  is 
commenced. 

During  the  movement,  the  particular  guide  of  the  left 
passes  as  file-cloger  behind  the  second  file  from  the  left  of 
the  fourth  platoon.  * 


THE   SQUADRON.  153 

The  first  captain  assures  himself  that  each  officer  and 
non-commissioned  officer  preserves  the  place  assigned  to 
him  in  this  order  of  column. 


To  march  in  column  with  distance. 

The  squadron  being  in  open  column,  right  in  front,  the 
first  captain  commands : 

1.  Column  forward. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  platoons  put  themselves 
in  motion  at  the  same  time. 

Before  the  column  commences  the  march,  the  first  cap- 
tain gives  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  a  point  of  direc- 
tion ;  this  non-commissioned  officer  selects  intermediate 
points,  so  as  to  be  sure  of  marching  straightii  The  fixed 
object  given  to  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon,  is  also 
pointed  out  to  the  guide  of  the  second.  These  two  non- 
commissioned officers  preserve,  during  the  march,  the  di- 
rection which  has  been  given  to  them. 

The  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  platoons  keep  ex- 
actly in  the  same  direction.    ' 

• 

Changes  of  direction  by  successive  wheels. 

In  the  open  column,  the  changes  of  direction  are  exe- 
cuted by  successive  wheels  on  a  moveable  pivot,  so  that  the 
march  of  the  column  may  not  be  retarded.  The  arc  of 
circle  described  by  the  pivots  should  be  of  5  paces. 

The  column  being  in  march,  to  change  the  direction, 
the  first  captain  commands : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  or  half  left  (or  to  the 
right  or  half-right.^ 


154  THE  SQUADRON. 

At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
commands:  1.  Left — Turn;  2.  Forward;  which 
is  executed  on  the  principles  of  "the  wheel  upon  a 
moveable  pivot. 

Each  chief  of  platoon  gives  the  same  commands 
successively,  so  that  his  platoon  may  turn  upon  the 
same  ground. 

In  this  change  of  direction  while  marching,  the 
principal  guide  of  the  right,  at  the  command  htad 
of  column  to  the  left,  moves  rapidly  to  the  side  of 
the  pivot,  and  places  himself  so  that  the  head  of  his 
horse  will  mark  the  centre  point  of  the  arc  described 
by  the  pivots.  ' 

All  the  platoons  commence  their  wheel  at  2 J 
paces  before  arriving  abreast  of  the  head  of  the 
horse  of  the  principal  guide  of  the  right,  so  as  to 
prevent  th* column  from  being  thrown  out.  This 
non-commissioned  officer  resumes  his  place  when 
the  last  platoon  has  completed  its  wheel. 

Immediately  after  having  changed  the  direction  of  tho 
column,  the  first  captain  givefe  a  new  point  of  direction  to 
the  guide  of  the  first  platoon. 

The  exact  preservation  of  distances,  after  the  changes 
of  direction,  depends  upon  the  equality  of  the  increase 
given  to  the  gait  by  the  marching  flanks ;  it  is  then  im- 
portant that  the  leading  platoon  should  turn  neither  too 
rapidly  nor  too  slowly,  and  that  each  platoon  should 
regulate  the  rapidity  of  its  wheel  upon  that  of  the  one 
which  precedes  it. 

When  the  change  of  direction  is  executed  from  the  side 
opposite  to  the  guide,  the  pivot  becomes  the  guide  during 
the  wheel.  •  ' 


THE   SQUADRON.  155 


Individual  oblique  march. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column,  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground  towards  one  of  its 
flanks,  without  changing  the  front  of  the  column,  the  first 
captain  commands: 

1.  Lpft  (or  right)  oblique. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  at  the  same  time,  in  each 
platoon,  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon.   ' 

The  guides  of  the  three  last  platoons  pay  atten- 
tion to  march  on  the  same  line,  to  preserve  their 
distances,  and  keep  it  in  a  direction  exactly  parallel 
to  that  of  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon. 

To  resume  the  primitive  direction,  the  first  captain 
commands : 

.    Forward. 

Which  is  executed  at  the  same  time,  in  each 
platoon. 

,  When  the  oblique  march  is  executed  towards 
the  side  opposite  to  the  guide,  the  file-closers  pre- 
serve their  places,  notwithstanding  the  change  of 
guide. 

Change  of  gait,  being  in  column  with 
distance. 

The  column  is  made  to  pass  from  the  walk  to  the  trot^ 
and  from  the  trot  to  the  walk^  and  when  the  platoons  exe- 


156  THE  SQUADRON.  ' 

cute  these  changes  of  gait  with  uniformity  and  steadiness, 
the  column  is  made  to  commence  the  march  at  a  trot,  and 
to  halt  while  marching  at  the  trot. 

The  first  captain  observes  that  the  platoons  halt,  step 
oflp,  and  change  the  gait  at  the  same  instant. 

He  directs  the  head  of  the  column  sometimes  to  in- 
crease or  diminish  the  gait  slightly,  without  command,  to 
judge  of  the  attention  of  the  guides,  and  to  habituate 
them  to  conforming  to  the  movements  of  the  guides  who 
precede  them. 


To  break  by  fours,  by  twos,  and  by  file ; 
to  form  twos,  fours   and   platoons  at 
,  the  same  gait. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to'  break  by  fours  at  the  same  gait,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  Bi/  fours,  3.   Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  this  officer,  and  the  particuUr 
guide  of  the  right,  place  theinselves  as  prescribed, 
in  breaking  by  fours  from  a  halt. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  breaks  by  fours, 
and  the  chiefs  of  the  three  last  platoons  command : 
Halt. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command  It/  fours,  in 
sufiicient  time  to  command  march,  the  moment 
the  four  last  files  of  the  preceding  platoon  com- 


THE   SQUADRON.  157 

mence  their  oblique  movement  in  order  to  enter  the 
column. 

The  squadron  marches  in  column  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  to  break  by  twos,  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  By  twos.  3.   Guide  left, 

2.  March. 

Th«  chiefs  of  platoon  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  order  to  break  by  fours,  and  give  the 
commands:  Halt,  and  then— 1.  By  twos;  2. 
March,  so  as  to  cause  no  confusion  in  the  column. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in 
front,  to  break  by  file  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  By  file.  2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  in  order  to 
break  by  twos,  the  particular  guide  of  the  right 
placing  himself  behind  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  at  the 
trot,  right  in  front,  to  break  by  fours,  at  the  same  gait, 
the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  By  fours.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  this  oflBcer,  and  the  particular 
guide  of  the  right,  place  themselves  as  prescribed 
in  breaking  the  squadron  by  fours  from  line,  and 
the  chiefs  of  the  three  last  platoons  command: 
Walk. 

14 


158  THE   SQUADRON. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  first  platoon  breaks  by  fours, 
and  the  three  last  platoons  take  the'ivalk. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command  hf/  fours — 
trot,  in  sufficient  time  to  command  march,  when 
the  four  last  files  of  the  preceding  platoon  com- 
mence their  oblique  movement  in  order  to  enter  the 
column. 

The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  breaking  by  twos 
and  by  file. 

When  the  column  is  nt  the  gallop,  these  movements  are  * 
executed  on  the   principles  just   prescribed,   the  whole 
column  except  the  four  first  files  passing  to  the  trot  and 
resuming   successively  the  gallop,   as  the  files  break  in 
order  to  enter  the  column. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  file,  right  in 
front,  to  form  twos  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  Form  twos.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  form  twos  and  march,  succes- 
sively repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  this 
platoon  executes  its  movement  as  prescribed  iu 
the  platoon  drill ;  the  particular  guide  of  the  right 
moves  to  the  right  of  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
vpho  commands  halt,  after  having  -  marched  10 
paces. 

The  three  other  platoons  continue  to  march  by 
file,  and  execute  successively  their  formation  at  the 
commands  of  their  chiefs,  who  do  not  command 
MARCH,  until  the  first  files  of  their  platoons  arrive 
at  their  proper  distance. 


THE   SQUADRON.  159 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in 
front,  to  form  platoon  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  Form  fours.  2.  March. 

Whicli  is  executed  as  prescribed,  in  order  to  form 
twos. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  to  form  platoon  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands : 

'     1.  Form  platoons.  2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands :  Form  platoon. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  the  particular  guide  of  the  right 
places  himself  on  the  right  of  this  platoon,  which 
forms  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon  drill ;  the  chief  of 
the  platoon  commands  halt,  after  having  marched 
20  paces. 

The  other  platoons  continue  to  march  in  column 
by  fours,  and  form  successively  at  the  commands : 
1.  Form  platoon;  2.  March,  given  by  their  chiefs 
in  sufficient  time  to  command  halt,  when  the  four 
first  files  of  their  platoon  arrive  at  6  paces  from  the 
platoon  which  precedes. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  the  same  principles  are 
conformed  to,  except  that  instead  of  halting,  the  two  or 
four  first  files  of  the  first  platoon  pass  to  the  walk,  at  the 
commaTid  mabch  given  by  their  chief.  The  other  platoons 
continue  to  march  at  the  trot,  and  execute  their  move- 
ment at  the  same  gait,  the  two  or  four  first  files  of  each 
platoon  passing  also  to  the  walk^  at  the  command  march 


160  THE   SQUADRON. 

given  by  their  chiefs,  when  they  arrive  at  their  proper 
distance. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  to  form  twos,  fours, 
&c.,  the  same  principles  are  observed,  the  two  or  four 
first  files  of  each  platoon  passing  to  the  trot  at  the  com- 
mand MARCH,  given  by  their  chief. 

When  these  formations  are  executed  at  the  trot,  and  at 
the  gallop,  the  guide  is  announced  by  the  first  captain  as 
soon  as  the  first  files  have  doubled,  or  the  first  platoon  is 
formed ;  in  the  last  case  only,  each  chief  of  platoon  re- 
peats the  command  of  the  guide  as  soon  as  his  platoon  is 
formed. 

In  these  formations  at  the  walk,  the  guide  is  not  an- 
nounced, as  the  head  of  the  column  halts. 

To  break  by  fours,  by  twos,  and  by  file ; 
to  form  twos,  fours,  and  platoons, 
doubling  the  gait. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  break  by  fours,  doubling  the  gait,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  By  fours — trot.       2.  March.       3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  this  officer  and  the  particular  guide 
of  the  right,  place  themselves  as  prescribed  in 
breaking  by  fours  from  line. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  breaks  by  fours, 
as  prescribed  in  the  platoon  drill. 

The  other  platoons  continue  to  march  at  the 
•  xoalk  ;  their  chiefs  command  successively  hi/  fours 


THE   SQUADRON.  161 

— troty  in  sufficient  time  to  command  march,  the 
moment  the  four  last  files  of  the  preceding  platoon 
commence  their  oblique  movement,  in  order  to  enter 
the  column. 

These  principles  are  applicable  to  breaking  by  twos  and 
by  file. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  break  at  the  gailop, 
the  same  principles  are  observed  at  the  commands:  1. 
By  fours — gallop;  2.  March;  3.   Guide  left. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  these  movements  are 
always  executed  at  the  same  gait. 

The  Tsquadron  marching  in  column  by  file  to  form  twos, 
doubling  the  gait,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Form  twos^trot     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  command  form  twos — trot  and  march, 
successively  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
this  platoon  executes  its  movement  as  prescribed  in 
the  platoon  drill,  and  the  particular  guide  of  the 
right  moves  to  the  right  of  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  three 
last  platoons  command :  trot.  At  the  command 
march,  repeated  by  them,  the  three  last  platoons 
take  the  trot. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command :  Form 
twos,  in  sufficient  time  to  command  march,  the 
moment  the  first  file  of  their  platoons  is  nearly  at 
its  proper  distance ;  the  first  file  then  passes  to  the 
walk.  * 


162  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  twos,  to  form 
fours,  doubling  the  gait,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Form  fours — trot.  3.   Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed  in  order  to 
form  twos. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  fours,  to  form 
platoon,  doubling  the  gait,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  platoons — trot.  3.   Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands:  Form  platoon — trot. 

The  chiefs  of  the  three  last  platoons  command 
trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, the  first  platoon  forms  as  prescribed  in  the 
platoon  drill,  and  the  particular  guide  of  the  right 
places  himself  on  the  right  of  this  platoon. 

The  three  last  platoons  take  the  trot,  and  form 
successively  at  the  command  form  platoo7i,  given 
by  their  chiefs  in  sufficient  time  to  command 
march,  when  the  four  first  files  arrive  at  their 
proper  distance  from  the  platoon  which  precedes 
them ;  then  these  four  first  files  take  the  walk. 

The  first  captain  commands  guide  left  when  the  first 
platoon  is  formed,  and  gives  a  point  of  direction. 

Each  chief  of  platoon  repeats  successively  the  com- 
mand of  the  guide  as  soon  as  his  platoon  is  formed. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  these  formations  are 


THE   SQUADRON.  163 

executed  at  the  gallop,  following  the  same  principles, 
at  the  commands:  1.  Form  twos,  or  form  fours,  or  fortn 
platoons — gallop;  2.  March. 

When  the  .column  is  at  the  gallop,  these  movements  are 
executed  as  prescribed,  in  forming  at  the  same  gait,  the 
head  of  the  column  passing  to  the  trot  at  the  command 
MARCH.  , 

The  foregoing  movements  are  employed  in  passing  de- 
files, the  first  captain  placing  himself  always  at  the  head 
of  his  squadron  in  order  to  direct  the  movements  of  it 
according  to  the  localities.  If  it  happens  that  the  chiefs 
of  the  last  platoons  do  not  hear  the  command,  they  con- 
form immediately  to  the  movements  of  the  platoons  which 
precede  them.   * 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with 
distance,  to  face  it  in  the  opposite 
direction,  and  to  face  it  again  to  the 
front. 

The  squadron  marching  in  open  column,  right  in  front, 
the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons  left'dbout  loTieel.  2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  trooper  on  the  left  of 
each  platoon,  who  becomes  the  pivot,  prepares  to 
halt,  "without,  however,  slackening  his  pace. 

At  the  command  march,  the  pivots  halt,  and 
the  marching  flanks  wheel  at  the  gait  in  which  the 
column  was  marching,  regulating  themselves  upon 
the  outer  flank  of  the  platoon  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  so  as  to  complete  the  first  half  of  the 
movement  at  the  same  instant. 


164  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  marcbing  flanks  are  then  governed  by  the 
platoon,  which  becomes  the  head  of  the* column 
after  the  movement  is  completed. 

The  movement  being  nearly  finished,  the  first  captain 
commands : 

1.  Forward.  2.   Guide  right. 

During  this  movement,  the  particular  guide  of  the  left 
places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  fourth  platoon;  the 
particular  guide  of  the  right  takes  his  place  as  file-closer 
in  rear  of  the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the  first  pla- 
toon, and  the  other  file-closers  pass  to  the  side  opposite  to 
the  guide. 

To  cause  the  squadron  to  resume  its  primitive  direc- 
tion, the  first  captain  commands:  1.  Flatoons,  righi-ahout 
wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  left;  which 
is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means. 

The  wheel-about  is  usually  commanded  towards  the 
side  of  the  guide;  it  may,  however,  be  towards  the  other 
side  when  it  becomes  necessary. 

To  halt  the  column. 

The  column  being  on  the  march,  to  halt  it,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  Column.  2.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  all  the  platoons  prepare  to 
halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  all  the  platoons  halt  at 
the  same  time. 

After  the  command  kalt,  there  shjould  be  no  movement 


THE   SQUADRON.  *165 

in  the  platoons,  the  distances  and  directions  should  be 
corrected  only  in  marching. 

The  first  captain  places  himself  behind  the  guide  of 
the  second  platoon,  to  see  if  the  guides  of  the  first  and 
second  platoon  have  marched  upon  the  point  indicated ; 
he  also  observes  if  the  prescribed  distances  have  been 
preserved.  If  they  have  not  been,  and  if  the  guides  have 
not  marched  upon  the  point  indicated,  the  column  is  put 
again  in  march,  in  order  to  correct  their  distances  and 
direction. 


To  form  line  on  the  left. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in 
front,  to  form  it  in  line  on  its  left  flank,  the  first  captain 
commands  : 

1 .  Left  into  line  wheel.         4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  6.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  particular  guide  of  the 
right  moves  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  direction 
of  the  guides  of  the  column,  at  the  distance  of  the 
front  of  a  platoon,  facing  the  side  towards  which 
the  line  will  be  formed. 

At  the  command  march,  the  squadron  wheels 
into  line,  the  trooper  on  the  left  flank  of  each 
platoon  serving  as  pivot,  and  turning  upon  his  own 
ground. 

The  first  captain  commands  halt,  the  moment 
the  marching  flanks  have  nearly  completed  their 
movement,  and  then  right — dress. 

At  this  command,  all  the  platoons  align  them- 
selves. 


166     *  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands  FRONT. 

During  the  wheel,  the  particular  guide  of  the 
left  resumes  his  place  in  line. 

The  first  captain,  after  haviug  commanded  left  into  line 
wheel,  assures  himself,  before  commanding  march,  that 
the  particular  guide  of  the  right  is  exactly  upon  the 
direction  of  the  guides  of  the  column. 

Immediately  after  commanding  halt,  he  moves  rapidly 
to  the  right  flank  of  the  squadron,  to  observe  that  the 
pivots  execute  their  movements  properly,  and  that  the 
oflBcers  and  troopers  align  themselves  correctly. 

The  particular  guide,  who  moves  upon  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  guides  of  the  column,  should  take  rather  too 
much  ground  than  not  enough.  The  conductor  of  the 
maiching  flank  of  the  leading  platoon  should  align  him- 
self upon  this  guide,  without  endeavoring  to  approach 
him. 

To  form  the  squadron  in  column  with  distance,  left  in 
front,  the  first  captain  commands:   1.  Platoon  left  tvheel; 

2.  March;   3.  Halt;   which  is  executed  as  prescribed, 
■when  riffht  in  front,  but  by  inverse  means. 

To  march  in  column  with  distance,  left  in  front,  the 
first  captain  commands:   1.  Column  forward;  2.  March; 

3.  Guide  right;  which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  when  the 
column  has  the  right  in  front. 

The  changes  of  direction  by  successive  wheels,  and  the 
individual  oblique  march,  when  the  column  has  the  left 
in  front,  are  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  when  the 
right  is  in  front;  except  that,  in  the  changes  of  direc- 
tion, it  is  the  principal  guide  of  the  left  who  marks  the 
point  of  the  wheel,  placing  himself  as  has  been  prescribed 
for  the  principal  guide  of  the  right,  when  the  right  is  in 
front. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  it  is  made  to  break  by  fours,  by  twos,  and  hy  file, 
to  form  twos,  fours,  and  platoons,  at  the  same  gait,  or 


THE    SQUADRON.  167 

doubling  the  gait,  following  the  principles  prescribed 
"when  the  right  is  in  front,  but  by  inverse  means. 

To  break  by  fours,  twos,  &c.,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands :  1.  By  fours  (or  by  twos,  or  by  file)  from  the  left; 
2,   March. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  to  face  it  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  same 
principles  are  followed  as  when  the  right  is  in  front,  but 
by  inverse  means. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
t*in  front,  to  halt  it,' conform  to  the  principles  prescribed 
when  the  right  is  in  front. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  left  in 
front,  to  form  it  in  line  on  the  right,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands :  1.  Right  into  line  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Halt; 
4.  Left — Dress;  5.  Front. 

To  break  by  the  right  to  march  to  the 

left. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands ; 

1.  Platoons  hrealc  hy  the  right — to  march  to  the 
left 

2.  March. 

■ 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  flie  first 
platoon  commands:  1.  Platoon  forward;  2.  Guide 
left. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  marches  10  paces 
to  the  front,  turns  to  the  left,  and  moves  forward 
at  the  commands:  1.  Left — Turn;  2.  Forward. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command :  1.  Platoon 


168  THE    SQUADRON. 

forward;  2.  Guide  Ifft;  when  the  chief  of  the 
phitoon  on  their  right  commands  march  ;  and  they 
command  march,  when  the  chief  of  that  platoon, 
after  having  turned  to  the  left,  commands :  For- 
ward. 


To  form  line  to  the  right  by  inversion. 

The  squadron  marching  in  open  column,  right  in  front, 
to  form  it  in  line  upon  its  right  flank  by  inversion,  the 
first  captain  changes  the  guide;  for  this  purpose,  he  com- 
mands : 

Guide  right. 

The  second  captain  passes  by  the  rear  of  the  column 
to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guides  ;  the  first  captain  passes 
by  the  head  of  the  column  to  the  side  of  the  new  guides, 
rectifies  their  direction,  then  halts  the  column,  and  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  inversion  right  into  line  icheel. 

2.  March.  4.  Left — Dress. 

3.  Halt.  5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  bul  by  inverse 
ineans,''as  in  forming  line  on  the  left. 

During  the  movement,  the  particular  guide  of  the 
left  places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  fourth  platoon, 
and  the  particular  guide  of  the  rii^ht,  who  moves  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  new  guides  of  the  column, 
remains  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

To  put  the  squadron  again  in  column,  right  in  front,  the 
first  captain  commands:  1.  Platoon  left  wheel;  2.  Maecu; 
3.  Halt  (or  Foeward)  ;  4.   Guide  left. 


THE   SQUADRON.  169 

The  first  captain  passes  to  the  side  of  the  guides,  the 
second  captain  passes  to  the  opposite  side. 

The  squadron  may  also  be  put  in  line  in  natural  order, 
by  wheeling  the  platoons  to  the  left  (or  to  (he  right)  about. 
The  secqnd  captain  follows  the  marching  flank  of  the 
platoon  behind  which  he  is  placed. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the  left  to 
inarch  to  the  right,  on  the  piinciples  prescribed,  but  by 
inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Platoons  break  by  the 
left — to  march  by  the  right;  2.  March. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  it  is  formed  in  line  ou  its  left  flank  by  inversion, 
(after  having  changed  the  guide  and  halted  the  column,) 
on  the  principles  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the 
commands:  1.  By  inversion  left  into  line  loheel ;  2.  March; 
3.  Halt;  4.  Right — Dress;  6.  Front. 

To  put  the  squadron  again  in  column,  left  in  front,  the 
first  captain  commands:  1.  Platoon  right  icheel ;  2.  March; 
3.  Halt  (or  Forward)  ;  4.   Guide  right. 

The  squadron  may  also  be  put  in  natural  order,  by 
wheeling  the  platoons  to  the  right  (or  left)  about. 


To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  to 
march  to  the  left. 

The  BquadroQ  being  in  line,  the  first  captain   com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoons  hreaJc  hy  the  right  to  the  rear — to 
march^o  the  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands  :  Platoon  right-about  wheel. 
15 


1.70  THE   SQUADRON. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  executes  its  wheel 
to  the  right-ahout ;  when  nearly  terminated,  its 
chief  commands  :  1.  Forward  ;  2.  Guide  hft ; 
and  after  marching  10  paces  straight  foi*ward,  he 
commands:  1.  Right — Turn;  2.  Forward. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively; 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command  :  Flatoon 
right-ahout  icheel,  when  the  chief  of  the  platoon  on 
their  right  commands  march,  and  they  command 
MARCH,  when  that  platoon  has  passed  over  three- 
fourths  of  its  first  wheel. 

To  form  on  right  into  line. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  form  it  in  line  on  the  prolongation  and  in 
advance  of  its  right  flank,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  On  right  into  line.  3.   Guide  right. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands,  Right. 

At  the  command  march,  he  commands,  Turn; 
the  platoon  turns  to  the  right  and  moves  forward 
at  the  command  Forward  ;  when  it  has  marched 
30  paces,  its  chief  commands,  Halt,  and  then 
Right — Dress. 

The  other  platoons  continue  to  march  forward, 
without  approaching  the  line;  as  soon  as  ^ch  one 
arrives  abreast  of  the  fourth  file  from  the  left  of 
the  platoon  which  should  be  on  its  right,  its  chief 
commands:  1.  Right — Turn;  2.  Forward;  this 


THE   SQUADRX)N.  171 

platoon  then  directs  itself  towards  the  place  it  is 
to  occupy  in  line,  and  on  arriving  abreast  of  the 
file-closers,  its  chief  commands,  Halt,  and  then 
Right — Dress. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands,  Front. 

To  form  on  left  into  line  by  inversion. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  form  it  in  line  upon  the  prolongation  and  in 
advance  of  its  left  flank,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  inversion  on  left  into  line. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  left. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands.  Left. 

At  the  command  march,  he  commands,  Turn  ; 
the  platoon  turns  to  the  left,  and  moves  forward 
at  the  command  forward  ;  when  it  has  marched 
30  paces,  its  chief  commands,  Halt,  and  then 
Left — Dress. 

The  other  platoons  continue  to  march  forward, 
without  approaching  the  line ;  as  each  platoon 
arrives  abreast  of  the  fourth  file  from  the  right  of 
the  platoon  which  should  be  on  its  left,  its  chief 
commands:  1.  Left — Turn;  2.  Forward;  this 
platoon  directs  itself  towards  the  place  it  is  to 
occupy  in  line,  and  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  file- 
closers,  its  chief  commands.  Halt,  and  then  Left — 
Dress. 


172  THE 'SQUADRON. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands :  Front. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the  left  to 
the  rear  to  march  to  the  right,  on  the  principles  pre- 
Bcribed,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  Pla- 
toons break  by  the  left  to  the  rear — to  march  to  the  right; 
2.  March. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  to  form  it  in  line  on  the  prolongation  and  in  ad- 
vance of  its  left  flank,  follow  the  principles  prescribed, 
but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1.  On  left  into 
line;  2.  March;  3.  Guide  left;  4.  Front. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  to  form  it  in  line  upon  the  prolongation  and  in 
advance  of  its  right  flank,  conform  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1.  By 
inversion  on  right  into  line ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  right ; 
4.  Front. 


To  break  by  platoons  to  the  front. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  By  platoons  to  the  front.* 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands :  Platoon  forward,  and  the  chiefs 
of  the  three  other  platoons :  Platoon  right  half 
wheel. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  offi- 

•  The  words  "to  the  front,"  are  superfluous;  it  is  better  to  com- 
mand: By  platoons,  March,  Guide  left. 


THE   SQUA*DRON.  173 

cers,  the  first  platoon  moves  forward;  its  chief 
repeats  the  indication  of  the  guide. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  platoon,  when  their 
half-wheel  to   the   right   is   executed,  commands  : 

1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  left,  and  then  marches 
straight  forward.  When  the  left  of  his  platoon 
arrives  in  the  direction  of  the  platoon  which  pre- 
cedes, he  commands:  1.  Left  half-wheel;  2. 
March  ;  3.  Forward,  in  order  to  enter  the 
column. 

The  first  captain  does  not  announce  the  guide  until  the 
first  platoon  has  broken  to  the  front ;  and  he  gives  the 
guide  a  point  of  direction. 

To  form  front  into  line. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in 
front,  to  form  it  in  line  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  the 
first  captain  commands : 

1.  Front  into  line.  3.    Guide  right, 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands :  Platoon  forward,  and  the  chiefs 
of  the  three  other  platoons  command  :  Platoon  left 
half -wheel. 

At  the  command  MARCH,^epeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, the  first  platoon  moves  forward ;  its  chief 
repeats  the  indication  of  the  guide,  and  when  it 
has    marched  30  paces,  he  commands:  1.  Halt; 

2.  Right — Dress. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  platoon,  when  the  left 
half  wheel  is  executed,  commands:  1.  Forward; 


174  THE   feQUADRON. 

2.  Guide  rightj  and  marches  straight  forward. 
When  the  right  of  his  platoon  arrives  opposite 
the  left  of  the  platoon  which  precedes,  he  com- 
mands: 1.  Ri(jlU  half  ichcd ;  2.  Fqrward  ;  and 
when  he  arrives  abreast  of  the  file-closer  :  1.  Halt  ; 

2.  Ri(/Ju — Dress. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands  :  Front. 

This  formation  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  when 
the  column  is  on  the  march  ;  in  this  case,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon,  continuing  to  march  on,  does  not  command 
platoon  forward,  nor  march,  but  repeats  the  indication  of 
the  guide. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the  left  by 
platoons  to  march  to  the  front,  on  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  ;  1.  lif/ 
the  left-^bi/  platoons  to  the  front ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Guide 
right.* 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  it  is  formed  in  line  on  the  head  of  column,  fol- 
lowing the  principles  just  prescribed,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Front  into  line;  2.  March; 

3.  Guide  left ;  4.  Front. 

This  formation  is  executed,  when  the  column  is  march- 
ing, as  prescribed  above. 

To  break  by  platoons  to  the  right,  and 
to  move  forward  after  the  wheel. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Platoons  right  wheel.  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.  Guideleft. 

*  It  is  better  to  command,  By  platoons  from  the  left. 


THE  SQUADRON.  176 

At  the  first  command,  the  left  file  of  each  platoon 
prepares  to  step  ofi"  promptly,  and  the  pivot  to  turn 
upon  itself. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  right,  following  the  principles  of  the 
wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

At  the  third  command,  the  platoons  march 
straight  fc>rward. 

The  first  captain  cotntnanrls  forward,  when  the  wheels 
are  nearly  completed,  and  gives  a  point  of  direction  to  the 
guide  of  the  column  ;  he  observes  that  the  marching  flanks 
step  off  at  the  same  instant,  wheel  and  arrive  together  in 
column,  and  that  the  pivots  commence  the  march  together 
at  the  command  forward. 

To  form  line  to  the  front  by  inversion. 

The  squadron  being  in  open  column,  right  in  front,  to 
form  line  by  inversion  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  the 
first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Bi/  inversion  front  into  line.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands,  P/a^ooii  ybrt^aro?;  and  the  three 
other  chiefs  of  platoon  command,  Platoon  right  half 
wheel. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for 
forming  front  into  line,  but  by  inverse  means. 

This  formation  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  when 
the  column  is  marching  ;  in  this  case,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  does  noi  command  platoon  forward,  nor  march, 
but  repeats  the  indication  of  the  guide. 


176  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  platoons  to 
tlie  left,  in  order  to  move  forward  after  the  wheel,  follow- 
ing the  principles  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means,  at 
the  commands:  1.  Platoons  left  wheel;  2.  Marcu; 
8.  Forward;  4.   Guide  right. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  to  form  line  by  inversion  upon  the  head  of  the 
column,  follow  the  principles  just  prescribed,  but  by  in- 
verse means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  By  inversion  front  into 
line;  2.  March;  3.   Guide  right:  4.  Front. 

This  formation  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  when 
the  column  is  marching ;  in  this  case,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  does  not  command  platoon  forward^  nor  march, 
but  repeats  the  indication  of  the  guide. 

To  break  by  platoons  to  the  right,  head 
of  column  to  the  left  or  half  left. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons*riglit  wheel — head  of  column  to  the 
left  or  half  left. 

2.  March. 
8.  Forward. 
4.    Guide  left. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  right. 

At  the  third  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands,  1.  Left — Turn;  2.  Forward; 
the  other  platoons  move  on  and  turn  successively  at 
the  command  of  their  chiefs,  on  the  ground  upon 
which  the  first  had  turned. 

The  first  captain  commands,  forwariH  when  the  wheels 
are  nearly  completed,  and  gives  a  point  of  direction. 


THE   SQUADRON.  177 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the 
rear  of  the  column. 

The  squadron  bein^  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  form  Hne  faced  to  the  rear,  the  first  captain 
commands : 

1.  Platoons  left  about  wheel.  4.  MARCH. 

2.  March.  5.  Guide  left. 

3.  Front  into  line,  6.  Front. 

At  the  second  command,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  left  about. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
platoon,  which  becomes  the  head  of  the  column, 
when  its  wheel  is  nearly  completed,  commands  : 
1.  Forward;  2.  G^iide  left;  and  when  it  has 
marched  30  paces,  1.  Halt  ;  2.  Left — Dress. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  platoons,  on  completing 
three-fourths  of  their  wheel,  command  :  1.  For- 
ward ;  2.  Guide  left ;  and  direct  themselves 
towards  the  place  they  are  to  occupy  in  line,  con- 
forming in  other  respects  to  what  is  prescribed  for 
front  into  linej  when  the  column  has  its  left  in  front. 

The  first  captain  commands  front  into  line,  in  sufficient 
time  to  command  march,  and  (/vide  left,  when  the  pla- 
toons have  completed  three-fourths  of  their  wheel. 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  by  inver- 
sion, on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in 
front,  and  obstacles  are  presented  upon  its  left  flank,  to 
form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  the  first  captain  commarnds  : 


178  THE   SQUADRON. 

1.  Platoons  right-about  wheeL         4.  March. 

2.  March.  5.   Guide  right. 

3.  By  inversion  front  into  line.       6.  Front. 

At  the  second  command,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  right-about. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
platoon,  which  becomes  the  head  of  the  column, 
when  its  wheel  is  nearly  completed,  commands  : 
1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  right;  and  when  it  has 
marched  30  paces,  1.  Halt  ;   2.  Right — Dress. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  platoons,  at  three  fourths 
of  the  wheel,  command  :  1.  Forward;  2.  Guide 
rijht ;  and  direct  themselves  towards  the  place  they 
are  to  occupy  in  line,  conforming,  in  other  respects, 
to  what  is  prescribed  for  Ijj  inversion  front  into 
line,  when  the  left  is  in  front. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  break  it  by  platoons  to 
the  left,  head  of  column  to  the  right  (or  half  right),  fol- 
low the  principles  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means,  at 
the  commands  :  1.  Platoons  left  wheel — head  of  column  to 
the  right  (or  half  right)  ;  2.  Marcu  ;  3.  Forward  ;  4. 
Guide  right. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  left  in 
front,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  follow  the  principles 
prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands; 
].  Platoons  right-about  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Front  into 
line;  4.  March;  5.   Guide  right ;  6.  Front. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  left  in 
front,  and-  obstacles  are  presented  on  its  right  flank,  to 
form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  follow  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  Pla- 
toons left-about  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Bg  inversion  front 
into  line ;  4.  March  ;  5.   Guide  left ;  6.  Front. 


i 


THE   SQUADRON.  179 

To  break  by  platoons  to  the  right,  head 
of  column  to  the  right  (or  half  right.) 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoons  riyht  loheel—head  of  column  to  the 
right  (or  half  right^ 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  le)t. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  riyht. 

At  the  third  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands  :  1.  Right — Turn;  2.  Forward. 
The  other  platoons  move  on,  and  turn  successively 
at  the  command  of  their  chief,  on  the  same  ground. 

The  first  captain  commands  Forwaed,  when  the' wheels 
are  nearly  completed. 

To  form  hne  faced  to  the  rear  on  the 
head  of  the  column. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in 
front,  to  form  line  upon  the  head  of  the  column  faced  to 
the  rear,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  By  inversion  front  into  line.  3.   Guide  left, 

2.'  March.  ^ 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  hy  inversion 


180  THE    SQUADRON. 

front  into  line,  right  in  fronty  but  without  rectify- 
ing the  alignment. 

The  squadron  being  formed,  the  first  baptain  immedi- 
ately commands  : 

1.  Platoon  le/t-ahout  wheel,         4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt.  • 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  by  inver- 
sion, on  the  head  of  the  column. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in 
front,  and  obstacles  are  presented  on  its  right  flank,  to 
form  line  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  faced  to  the  rear, 
the  first  captain  commands ; 

1.  Front  into  line.  3.   Guide  right. 

2.  March. 

"Wtich  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  front  into 
line,  right  in  front,  but  without  rectifying  the 
alignment. 

The  squadron  being  formed,  the  first  captain  immedi- 
ately commands  : 

1.  Platoons  right-ahout  wheel.         4.  Left — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 


I 


The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  break  by  platoons  to  the 
left,  head  of  column  to  the  left  or  half  left,  follow  the 
principles  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  com-  ^ 
mands  :  1.  Platoons  left  wheel — head  of  column  to  the  left 
(or  half  le/l)  ;  2.  March;  8.  Foewabd;  4.   Ouide  right. 


THE    SQUADRON.  181 

The  squadron  being  in  column  ^ith  distance,  left  ia 
front,  to  form  line  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  faced  to 
the  rear,  follow  the  principles  prescribed,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands  :    1.  By  inversion  front  into  line; 

2.  March;  8.  Guide  right;  and  the  squadron  being 
formed,  1.  Platoons  right-about  wheel;  2.  MaHcu;  8. 
Halt;  4.  Left — Dress;  6.  Front. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  left  ia 
front,  and  obstacles  are  presented  upon  its  left  flank,  to 
form  in  line  upon  the  head  of  the  column  faced  to  the 
rear,  follow  the  principles  prescribed,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Front  into  line;  2.  March; 

3.  Guide  left;  and  the  squadron  being  formed,  1.  Pla- 
toons left-about  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Halt;  4.  Right — 
Dress  ;  5.  Front. 

All  these  formations  faced  to  the  rear  are  executed  in 
the  same  manner,  when  the  column  is  marching. 

Movements  by  fours,  the  squadron  being 
in  column  with  distance. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  ia 
front,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground  towards  its  left  flank, 
the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  fours  left  wheel.        3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  wheels  are  executed 
in  each  rank  by  fours,  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon. 

If,  instead  of  moving  forward,  after  having  wheeled  to 
the  left  by  fours,  the  first  captain  wishes  to  halt  the 
column,  he  commands:  Halt. 

To  take  a  direction  parallel  to  the  first,  and  return  to 
column  with  distance,  the  first  captain  commands: 
•  16 


182  THE    SQUADRON. 

1.  Bt/  fours  right  wheel.  3.  Halt. 

2.  Marcu. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  but 
by  inverse  means. 

If,  instead  of  halting,  the  first  captain  tpishes  the 
column  to  march  forward,  he  commands :  1.  Forward  ; 

2.  Guide  left. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  -with  distance,  right  in 
front,  it  is  caused  to  gain  ground  towards  its  right  flank, 
by  the  commands:   1.  By  fours  right  wheel;  2.   March; 

3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  left-,  and  to  resume  the  primitive 
direction  at  the  commands:  1.  By  four g  left  wheel;  2. 
March;  3.  Forward;  4.   Guide  left;  (or  3.  Halt.) 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in 
front,  to  cause  it  to  march  to  the  rear,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  By  fimrs  left-ahout  wheel.  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.    Guide  right. 

At  tlie  command  march,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted, in  each  rank,  by  fours. 

If,  instead  of  moving  forward  after  the  wheel  to  the  left' 
about  by  fours,  the  first  captain  wishes  to  halt  the  column, 
he  commands:  Halt. 

To  return  to  the  primitive  direction,  the  first  captain 
commands : 

1.  By  fours  right-ahout  wheel.  3.  Halt.     • 

2.  March. 

"Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  but  by  in- 
Terse  means. 


THE   SQUADRON.  183 

If  the  first  captain  wishes  the  column  to  march  for- 
ward, he  commands:   1.  Forward;  2.   Guide  left. 

In  all  the  movements  to  the  left^  and  to  the  right  by 
fours,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  move  up  abreast  of  the  first 
rank  of  their  platoons,  on  the  side  of  the  guide. 

The  first  and  second  captains,  the  file-closers,  and  the 
partieuhvr  guides  of  the  right  and  left  preserve  their 
places  after  the  wheel  to  the  left  or  right  by  fours  is  com- 
pleted, facing  in  the  new  direction. 

In  the  wheels  to  the  left  or  right-about  by  fours,  the 
chiefs  of  platoon  march  behind  the  centre  of  their  pla- 
toons, and  the  file-closers  in  front.  The  particular  guide 
of  the  right  is  on  the  left  of  his  platoon,  and  the  partic- 
ular guide  of  the  left  in  front  of  his. 

During  the  march  by  flank,  the  first  captain  observes 
that  all  the  ranks  march  on  the  same  line,  regulate  their 
movements  towards  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  preserve  a 
direction  parallel  to  that  of  the  first  platoon;  that  the 
troopers  keep  exactly  at  the  distance  of  two  feet  from, 
and  follow  those  who  precede  them ;  he  observes  that  the 
chiefs  of  the  three  last  platoons  preserve  their  proper  in- 
tervals on  the  side  of  the  guide,  so  that  it  may  not  be 
necessary  to  correct  distances  when  the  squadron  returns 
to  the  order  in  column. 

The  movements  by  fours  are  executed  in  the  same  man" 
ner,  when  the  column  is  marching. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  all  these  movements  are  executed  on  the  same 
principles. 

Direct  march  of  the  squadron  in  Hne. 

The  troopers,  to  keep  aligned,  should  feel  lightly  tha 
boot  of  the  men  on  the  side  of  the  guide  ;  this  principle 
is  borne  constantly  in  mind,  as  it  is  the  only  means  of 
being  at  ease  in  the  ranks,  and  preserving  the  individual 
alignment.  With  respect  to  the  general  alignment,  the 
non-commissioned  officers  and  flank  files  endeavor  to  re- 
main aligned  between  each  other;  consequently  they  will 


184  THE   SQUADRON. 

not  be  required  to  keep  the  eyes  to  the  front,  but  from 
time  to  time  will  give  a  glance  towards  the  guide,  in  or- 
der to  keep  on  the  eame  line,  avoiding  to  carry  the  bridle 
hand  in  that  direction,  that  there  may  be  no  crowding  in 
the  ranks. 

It  has  already  been  stated  that  the  guide  of  a  troop 
should  never  put  himself  in  motion  suddenly;  the  guide 
of  the  squ^vdron  should  then  commence  the  gait  indicated, 
slowly.  He  should  also  pass  gradually  fr^ra  a  slow  gait 
to  a  quick  gait,  and  from  a  quick  to  a  slow  gait;  this 
principle  is  applicable  also  to  the  troopers,  who  should 
correct  their  positions  with  respect  to  the  alignment  by 
degrees,  quickening  or  slackening  the  pace. 

The  direction  given  to  the  guide  having  a  great  in' 
fluence  upon  the  regularity  of  the  march,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  fixed  point  should  be  always  chosen  in  a  direc- 
tion exactly  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the  squadron ; 
if  the  localities  do  not  permit  the  particular  guide  to  take 
intermediate  points  sufficiently  prominent,  they  are  sup- 
plied by  the  file-closers,  who  are  placed  facing  the  guide, 
at  60  paces  apart ;  they  replace  themselves  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  same  direction,  as  the  squadron  reaches 
them. 

The  first  captain,  after  having  announced  the  guide* 
moves  to  the  rear,  and  gives  him  a  fixed  point  of  direction 
upon  which  the  squadron  is  to  march,  and  indicates  it 
also  to  the  non-commissioned  officer,  who  replaces  tho 
particular  guide  in  the  front  rank,  the  latter  serving  as 
an  intermediate  point  for  the  former.  The  fixed  point  is 
also  made  known  to  the  second  captain.  ' 

The  first  captain,  if  he  thinks  proper,  may  charge  the 
second  captain  with  giving  the  direction. 

The  point  of  direction  being  given,  the  first  capta^^n 
moves  to  the  centre  of  his  squadron,  and  faces  it,  to  assure 
himself  that  the  troopers  step  oflF  together  at  the  com- 
mand of  execution.  He  afterwards  moves  wherever  he 
thinks  his  presence  is  most  required. 


THE  SQUADRON.  185 

The  officers  Bhould  remain  constantly  aligned  upon  the 
particular  guide  placed  on  their  line,  keep  at  one  pace 
from  the  centre  of  their  platoons,  and  march  straight 
forward  ;  for  it  is  upon  their  alignment  that  that  of  the 
squadron  depends. 

The  particular  guide,  who  marches  abreast  of  the  offi- 
cers, should  march  always  at  an  even  gait,  so  as  not  to 
oblige  the  opposite  flank  to  increase  or  diminish  its  pace. 

This  guide,  as  he  advances,  should  take  new  interme- 
diate points,  to  be  able  to  direct  himself  upon  the  given 
points  without  deviating. 

The  file-closer,  who»  replaces  the  particular  guide, 
marches  so  that  the  latter  may  conceal  from  him  the 
given  point  of  direction.  He  should  keep  the  head  of 
his  horse  constantly  at  one  pace  from  the  croup  of  the 
horse  of  the  guide,  and  inform  the  guide  if  he  departs 
from  the  given  point,  as  he  is  more  especially  charged 
with  the  direction  of  the  march. 

During  the  march,  the  second  captain  should  superin- 
tend the  guide  charged  with  the  direction,  and  for  this 
purpose  he  marches  at  10  or  15  paces  in  rear  of  this 
guide. 

If,  after  commencing  the  march,  he  percfiives  that  the 
troopers  carry  the  bridle  hand  to  the  left,  it  is  a  proof, 
almost  certain,  that  the  point  of  direction  is  the  left  of 
the  perpendicular  line :  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  troopers 
are  obliged  to  open  to  the  right,  it  is  an  evidence  that  the 
point  of  direction  is  to  the  right  of  the  perpendicular 
line ;  the  second  captain  then  gives  a  point  of  directioa 
more  to  the  right  or  more  to  the  left. 

The  second  captain  observes  that  the  rear-rank  men  are 
exactly  at  their  proper  distance,  and  that  the  file-closers 
inarch  well  aligned. 

The  regularity  of  the  march  in  line  depending  much 
upon    the    attention  which  the  flank   files   pay  to  their 


186  THE   SQUADRON. 

ftlignment,  these  files  should   be  at  first  exercised  sep- 
arately. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  and  correctly  aligned/tho 
first  captain  commands: 

1.  Flank  Jiles  forward.  3.  March. 

2.  Guide  right. 

At  the  second  command,  the  particular  guide  of 
the  righl  moves  up  abreast  of  the  chiefs  of  platoon  j 
he  is  immediately  replaced  by  the  file-closer  of  the 
first  platoon. 

At  the  command  march,  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  flank  files,  (right  and  left  file  of  each  platoon,) 
and  the  particular  guides,  move  straight  forward, 
the  flank  files  preserving  between  each  other  the 
necessary  interval,  in  ord[er  to  receive  the  troopers 
of  their  platoons,  and  when  they  have  marched  30 
paces,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Flank  Jiles.  2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the 
flank  files  and  the  particular  guides,  halt. 

The  first  captain,  after  being  assured  that  the  flank  files 
have  marched  in  a  direction  perpendicular,  and  upon  a 
line  parallel  to  the  front  of  the  squadron,  commands : 

1.  Squadron  forward,  3.  March. 

2.  Guide  rujht. 

At  the  command  march,  the  flank  files  and  the 
Bquadron  move  forward. 


i 


4 

THE   SQUADEON.  187 

The  flank  files  and  the  squadron  having  marched  cor- 
rectly in  the  given  direction,  to  halt  them,  the  first  cap- 
tain commands: 

1.  Squadron,  2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  squadron  and  the 
flank  files  halt. 

To  cause  the  platoons  to  re-enter  their  places,  the  first 
captain,  after  giving  notice  to  the  flank  files  to  stand  fast, 
commands: 

1.   Squadron  forward.  2.  March. 

And  when  at  one  pace  from  the  flank  files,  he  com- 
mands : 

^  1.   Squadron.  2.  Right — Dress. 

3.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  second  command,  the  troopers  halt. 

At  the  third  command,  the  particular  guide  and 
the  file-closer,  who  replaced  Jjim  in  the  front  rank 
of  the  squadron,  resume  their  places  in  the  line; 
the  troopers  return  to  their  intervals  together,  and 
dress  to  the  right. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands,  Front. 

This  exercise  having  been  executed  several  times  at  the 
walk,  is  repeated  at  the  trot. 

"When  fhe  flank  files  have  become  habituated  to  regulate 
their  movements  upon  each  other,  the  entire  squadron  is 
marched  in  line,  first  at  the  walk,  and  progressively  at  the 
trot  and  gallop. 


188  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  move  forward,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  Squadron  forward.  3.  March. 

2.  Guide  right. 

At  the  second  command,  the  particular  guide  and 
file-closer  of  the'  first  platoon  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed. 

At  the  command  march,  the  squadron  moves 
forward. 

To  halt  the  squadron,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Squadron.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  second  command,  the  squadron  halts. 
At  the  third  command,  the  squadron  aligns  itself 
The  squadron  being   aligned,   the  first   captain 
commands,  Front. 

The  squadron  marching  at  the  walk,  before  passing  to 
the  trot,  the  fii'st  captain  assures  himself  that  the  point 
of  direction  is  good,  and^hat  the  squadron' marches  with 
uniformity  and  steadiness. 

When  the  squadron  marches  steadily  at  the  irot,  it 
passes  to  the  gallop. 

The  first  captain  observes  that  the  troopers  keep  their 
horses  quiet,  and  do  not  quicken  the  gait  more  than  ne- 
cessary, a  common  fault  in  the  march  at  the  gallop.  For 
this  purpose,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  guide  and  the 
flank  files  pay  attention  to  kee^  their  horses  at  an  even 
and  moderate  gallop. 

In  the  marches  at  the  trot,  and  pa^icularly  at  the  gaU 
lop,  it  is  necessary  to  slacken  the  pace  as  sooil  as  any 
disorder  is  discovered. 

To  march  at  the  gallop,  the  squadron  commences  at  the 
walkj  then  passes  to  the  trot;  the  same  progression  is 


THE   SQUADRON.  189 

observed  in  order  to  halt  when  marching  at  the  gallop  ; 
the  squadron  is  then  exercised  in  moving  off  from  a  halt 
at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop,  and  in  halting  when  march- 
ing at  these  gaits. 

The  squadron  is  exercised  in  marching  with  the  guide 
on  the  left,  as  with  the  guide  on  the  right. 

Counter-march. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  face  it  in  the  opposite 
direction,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Counter-march  hy  the  right  JlanJc, 

2.  By  file  to  the  right. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  tbe  chiefs  of  platoon 
turn  to  the  right j  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
placing  himself  in  front  of  his  first  file;  the  file- 
closers  turn  to  the  left,  and  pass  to  the  left  of  the 
squadron;  those  of  the  second  division  abreast  of 
the  front  rank,  the  second  captain  on  their  left; 
those  of  the  first  division  abreast  of  the  rear  rank. 

The  particular  guide  of  the  right  places  himself 
promptly  behind  tbe  particular  guide  of  the  left, 
facing  to  the  rear,  the  croup  of  his  horse  at  6  paces 
from  the  rear  rank.   - 

Af  the  command  march,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  the  platoon. 

"When  the  first  file  is  at  2  paces  from  the  particular 
guide  who  indicates  the  place  where  it  is  to  form,  the  first 
captain  commands: 

1.  Front.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 


190    .  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  61e-closers  follow  the  movement,  and  resume 
their  places  as  they  arrive  at  them. 

After  havinp:  commanded  march,  the  first  captain  moves 
rapidly  to  the  flank  by  which  the  movement  is  executed, 
in  order  to  direct  the  head  of  the  column,  and  to  re-form 
the  squadron  to  the  rear  upon  a  line  parallel  to  the  one  it 
at  first  occupied. 

At  the  commands  halt  and  right — dress,  the 
second  captain  turns-ahout  and  places  himself  abreast 
of  the  rear  rank  to  align  it. 

The  squadron  beiog  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands,  front.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs 
of  platoon  face  to  the  front,  by  a  turn  to  the  left. 

The  counter-march  should  be  executed  generally  at  the 
trot.  For  this  purpose,  after  the  second  command,  the 
first  captain  indicates  the  gait. 

This  movement  is  executed  by  the  left  flank,  following 
the  same  principles  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  com- 
mands: 1.  Counter-march  by  the  left  flank ;  2.  By  file  to 
the  left;  3.  March;  and  1.  Front;  2  Halt;  8.  Left — 
Dress  ;  4.  Front. 

Wheelings. 

The  principles  prescribed  for  the  platoon,  are  applica- 
ble to  the  squadron  wheeling  on  a  fixed  or  moveable 
pivot.  The  execution  of  it  becomes  more  difficult  as  the 
front  is  extended;  it  requires  on  the  part  of  oflicers  and 
troopers,  a  particular  and  constant  attention. 

During  the  wheel,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  keep  at  the 
centre  of  their  platoons,  and  correctly  alif^ned  upon  each 
other,  keeping  their  horses  upon  the  arc  of  circle  more  or 
less  great,  in  proportion  to  their  distance  from  the  pivot. 
The  chief  of  the  platooa  on  which  the  wheel   is  made, 


THE   SQUADRON.  191 

regulates  himself  upon  the  chief  of  the  platoon  on  the 
marchitig  flank,  observing  to  move  progressively,  as  the 
latter  advances  in  the  new  direction. 

The  chief  of  the  platoon  on  the  marching  flank,  describes 
his  circle  so  as  neither  to  move  from,  nor  approach  the 
other  chiefs  of  platoon. 

The  files  on  the  flanks  of  platoons  dress  upon  each 
other,  all  observing  the  progression  of  the  marching  flank, 
and  keeping  upon  the  arcs  they  should  describe. 

The  particular  guide  placed  on  the  sides  of  the  pivot 
is  the  actual  pivot,  although  he  is  not  counted  in  the 
rank. 

In  every  kind  of  wheel,  the  marching  flank  of  a  squad- 
ron should  measure  with  accuracy  its  arc  of  circle ;  if 
it  is  too  great,  the  files  are  made  to  open  and  disunite, 
and  the  wheel  becomes  longer;  if  it  is  too  small,  the 
files  are  crowded,  there  is  confusion,  and  the  pivot  is 
forced. 

To  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  squadron  is  exercised  in  wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot, 
first  at  the  walk,  then  at  the  trot ;  also  at  the  gallop,  when 
the  troopers  are  confirmed  in  all  the  principles. 

The  squadron  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned,  the 
first  captain  commands: 

1.   Squadron  in  circle  right  wheel.  2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  plato6n. 

To  halt  the  squadron  during  the  wheel,  the  first  captaia 
commands; 

1.  Squadron.  3.  Left — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  troopers  of  the  rear 


192  THE    SQUADRON. 

rank  straighten  their  horses,  and  resume  their  places 
behind  their  tile-leaders. 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  troopers  halt. 

At  the  third  command,  the  squadron  dresses  to 
the  left. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands.  Front. 

If,  instead  of  halting,  the  first  captain  wishes  to  resume 
the  direct  march,  he  commands  : 

1.  Forward.  2.   Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  troopers  of  the  rear 
rank  straighten  their  horses,  and  place  themselves 
behind  their  file-leaders,  and  the  whole  squadron 
moves  forward  at  the  gait  in  which  it  was  marching 
before  the  wheel. 

The  squadron  is  halted,  if  the  slightest  confusion  arises 
during  the  wheel;  the  first  captain  explains  the  origin  of 
the  fault,  and  the  means  of  repairing  it. 

When  the  troopers  begin  to  understand  these  move- 
ments, the  whole  circle  is  passed  over  several  times 
without  halting. 

If  the  first  captain  wishes  to  halt  the  squadron  during 
the  wheel,  it  is  necessary,  particularly  in  the  quick  gaits, 
to  command  squadron  in  sufficient  time  to  enable  the 
troopers  to  prepare  to  halt,  and  halt  when  the  marching 
flank  is  in  the  act  of  arriving  upon  the  new  direction,  so 
that  the  pivot  may  not  be  required  to  move.* 

The  squadron  wheeling  steadily  at  the  walk,  to  pass  to 
the  trot,  the  first  captain  chooses  a  moment  in  which  the 
horses  are  perfectly  calm.  After  one  or  two  turns,  the 
squadron  is  made  to  resume  the  walk.  The  squadron 
wiieeling  well  at  the  trot,  is  exercised  to  wheel  at  the 
gallopy  upon  the  same  principles.  After  ono/or  two  turns, 
it  passes  to  the  irotf  then  to  the  walk. 


THE   SQUADRON.  193 

The  troopers  being  habituated  to  these  movements, 
are  exercised  in  changing  the  side  of  the  vrheel,  with- 
out halting.  These  changes  of  wheel  to  both  hands 
are  executed  at  the  walk  and  at  the  trot,  but  never  at  the 
gallop. 

The  squadron  wheeling  to  the  right,  at  the  walk  or  at 
the  trotf  the  first  captain  commands ; 

1.   Squadron  in  circle  left  wheel.  2.   MARCH. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  platoon. 

The  wheels  at  the  gallop,  and  the  changes  of  wheel 
without  halting  require  much  attention  on  the  part  of 
the  troopers  and  non-commissioned  officers ;  the  correct 
execution  of  these  movements  depends  upon  their  measur- 
ing properly  the  arc  to  be  passed  over,  and  regulating 
the  rapidity  of  the  gait. 

The  squadron  is  afterwards  exercised  to  wheel  at  the 
trot  and  at  the  gallop,  commencing  from  a  halt,  and  to 
halt  while  wheeling  at  these  gaits. 

The  squadron  being  halted,  the  first  captain  commands : 

C  right  (or  left)  wheel. 

1.  JSquadroUf  <  riijht-ahout  (or  left-ahout)  wheel, 

(_  right-half  (or  left-half)  wheel. 

2.  March.  5.  Left  (or  right)— Dress, 

3.  Squadron.  6.  FRONT. 

4.  Halt. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  platoon. 

The  first  captain  allows  suflBcient  time  to  elapse  between 
the  first  and  second  command,  for  the  troopers  to  gather 
their  horses,  that  they/may  commence  the  move  together. 

These  movements  are  executed  at  the  different  gaits; 
but  they  should  not  be  repeated  too  frequently  at  the 
gallop,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  hoDses. 

17 


194  THE   SQUADRON. 

« 

To  eicrd'C  the  squadron  while  mnrcliing  at  the  wheels 
on  a  fixed  pivot,  the  first  captain  commands: 

C  right  (or  If/t)  ichcel. 

1.  Squadron,  <  rijht-abont  (or  Irftahnut)  wheel. 

{^right-half  {CT  hft-half)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  left  (or  guide  right.) 

The  squadron  being  on  the  march,  to  cause  it  to  wheel, 
doubling  the  gait,  the  first  captain  gives  the  commaud 
trot  or  gallop  before  that  of  march. 

At  the  command  march,  the  pivot  stops  short;  the 
inarching  flank  takes  the  gait  indicated. 

At  the  command  forward,  both  move  forward  at  the 
gait  indicated  lor  the  wheel. 

To  wheel  on  ti  moveable  pivot. 

In  the  wheels  on  a  moveable  pivot,  the  pivot  should 
describe  an  arc  of  circle  of^Opac.f,  at  the  same  time  slack- 
ening the  gait;  the  marching  flank  increases  its  gait.  The 
sixth  file  of  the  second  platoon,  which  is  the  middle  of 
the  radius  of  the  wheel,  preserves  the  gait  at  which  the 
squadron  was  marching.  The  tronptM's  placed  between 
this  file  and  the  pivot  diminish  proportionally  their  gait ; 
those  placed  between  this  file  and  the  marching  flank 
augment  proportionally  theirs. 

The  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot  ia  executed  upon  the 
guide,  or  upon  the  opposite  flank. 

After  a  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot,  the  guide  remains 
where  it  was  before  the  wheel,  and  is  given  a  new  point 
of  direction. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  change  direction  to 
the  right,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Right — Turn.  2.  Forward. 


\ 
THE   SQUADRON.  195 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  platoon, 
the  pivot  describing  an  arc  of  circle  of  20  paces. 

When  this  wheel  is  executed  properly  at  the  walk,  the 
marcliing  flank  taking  the  trot,  it  is  repeated  at  the  irotf 
the  manihing  flank  taking  the  gallop. 

To  change  the  direction  to  the  left,  the  movement  is 
executed  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at 
the  commands  :  1.  Left — Turn  ;  2.  Forwabd. 

Individual  oblique  march. 

The  squadron  marcWng  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain 
ground  towards  its  right  flank,  without  changing  the 
front  of  the  squadron,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Riyht  oblique.  2.  MARCH. 

To  resume  the  primitive  direction,  the  first  captaia 
commands : 

Forward. 
Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  it  is  made  to  gain 
ground  towards  its  left  flank,  without  changing  the  front, 
on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  com- 
mands: 1.  Left  oblique ;  2.  March;  it  resumes  the  primi- 
tive direction  at  the  command  Forward. 

During  the  oblique  march,  the  first  captain  observes 
that  the  chiefs  of  platoon  keep  on  the  same  line,  preserve 
between  them  the  same  interval,  and  follow  parallel 
directions  in  order  to  preserve  the  general  alignment. 

The  particular  guide  who  marches  abreast  of  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  after  having  executed  a  quarter  turn  to  the 
right,  moves  straight  forward. 

This  movement  is  executed  at  the  walk,  or  at  the  irotf 
but  never  at  the  gallop. 


196  THE   SQUADRON. 


Oblique  march  by  platoons. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground 
towards  its  right  flank,  by  the  oblique  march  by  platoons, 
the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoon  right  half-wheel.         3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes 
its  half-wheel  to  the  right,  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

At  the  third  command,  each  platoon  moves 
forward,  conforming  to  the  principles  of  the  direct 
march. 

To  cause  the  squadron  to  resume  the  primitive  direc- 
tion, the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons  left-half  wheel.         3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  right. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  but  by  in- 
verse means. 

In  the  oblique  march  by  platoons,  the  pivots  of  the  pla- 
toons should  all  halt  at  the  same  instant,  at  the  command 
MARCH,  80  that  all  the  wheels  may  terminate  at  the  same 
time. 

During  this  march,  the  right  guide  of  the  first  platoon 
marches  directly  upon  the  point  which  has  been  indicated 
to  him.  The  guides  of  the  other  platoons  preserve  their 
distances,  take  for  file-leader  the  fourth  trooper  from  the 
left  of  the  platoon  which  precedes  them,  and  keep  at  two 
paces  from  him. 

The  first  captain  places  himself  habitually  at  two 
paces  outside  and  abreast  of  the  front-rank  of  the  second 
platoon. 


THE  SQUADRON,  197 

The  second  captain  behind  the  guide  of  the  first  pla- 
toon in  order  to  superintend  bis  direction; 

The  chiefs  of  platoon  at  the  centre  of  their  platoons, 
the  head  of  their  horses  on  a  line  with  the  boot  of  the 
rear-rank  man  of  the  platoon  which  precedes  ; 

The  particular  guides,  and  the  file-closers,  remain  at 
their  places  in  line. 

If  the  squadron  is  marching,  and  this  movement  is 
executed,  the  particular  guide  who  marches  abreast  of 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  makes  a  half-turn  to  the  rights  and 
then  marches  straight  forward. 

The  oblique  march  by  platoons  is  executed  at  the  walJcy 
at  the  trot,  and  at  the  gallop,  the  squadron  being  halted 
or  in  motion. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  it  is  made  to  gain  ground 
towards  its  left  flank  on  the  same  principles,  but  by 
inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Platoon  left  half- 
tcheel ;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  GuUe  left,  and  re- 
sumes the  primitive  direction  at  the  commands:  1.  Fla^ 
toons  right  half-wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide 
right. 

Movements  by  fours. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground 
towards  its  right  flank,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  B^  fours  right  wheel.  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  left. 

"Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon. 
The  chiefs  of  platoon  march  on  the  side  of  the 
guide,  at  one  pace  from,  and  abreast  of  the  leading 
files  of  their  platoons. 

The  particular  guide  of  the  right  marches  in 
front  of  the  column,  at  one  pace  from  the  leading 


198  THE   SQUADRON. 

rank  of  eight,  the  particular  guide  of  the  left  behind 
the  last  rank  of  eight  of  the  fourth  platoon. 

The  squadron  having  wheeled  to  the  right  by  fours, 
and  being  in  column,  to  change  direction  to  the  left,  the 
first  captain  commands : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left. 

The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands:  1.  Left — 
Turn;  2.  Forward. 

•  To  change  direction  to  the  right,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted Qn  the  same  principles,  but  by  in^rerse  means,  at 
the  command :  Head  of  column  to  the  right. 

To  put  the  squadron  again  in  line,  the  first  captain 
commands : 

1.  Bj/  fours  left  wheel,        4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon, 
the  particular  guides  resuming  their  places  in  line. 

These  movements  are  executed  by  the  left,  on  the  same 
principles,  at  the  commands:  1.  Bi^  fours  left  wheel;  2. 
March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  right;  and  1.  By  four t 
right  wheel ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Halt  ;  4.  Left — Dress  ;  5. 
Front. 


The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  cause  it 
to  gain  ground  to  the  rear,  and  to  face 
it  again  to  the  front. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  face  it  in  the  opposite 
direction,  the  captain  commands  : 


THE   SQUADRON.  199 

t 

1.  By  fours  right-about  wheel,  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.  Guide  left. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  file-closers,  and  the 
particular  guides,  wheel-about  individually  and 
inarch,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  behind  the  centre  of 
their  platoons,  the  file-closers  in  front,  and  the 
particular  guides  abreast  of  the  rear  rank,  become 
the  front. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  file-closer  nearest 
the  guide  passages  to  the  left,  in  order  to  place 
himself  in  front  of  the  particular  guide;  the  first 
captain  gives  *him  a  point  of  direction,  which  is 
also  indicated  to  the  particular  guide,  who,  in  this 
movement,  remains  on  the  flank  of  the  squadron. 

The  squadron  \{  faced  again  to  the  front,  by  a  movement 
similar  to  the  one  just  stated. 

The  wheels  to  the  left-about  by  fours  are  executed  on 
the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means. 

These  movements  by  fours  are  executed  from  a  halt, 
and  in  marching  at  the  walk  and  at  the  trot. 


The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  break 
it  by  platoons,  to  the  right,  and  to 
form  it  again  in  line. 

# 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain 
ground  towards  its  right  flank,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands: 

1.  Platoons  right  wheel.  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.  Guide  left. 


200  THE   SQUADRON. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  the  pivots  halt- 
ing short,  and  the  left  file  of  each  platoon  stepping 
out  promptly  and  regulating  its  movements  upon 
that  of  the  platoon  which  is  in  front,  so  as  to  arrive 
together  in  column. 

To  put  the  squadron  again  in  line,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  Platoons  left  wheel.  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.  Guide  right. 

The  marching  flanks  regulate  their  movementa 
upon  those  of  the  platoon  at  the  head  of  the  column, 
so  as  to  arrive  together  in  line.  * 

The  second  captain  gives  a  point  of  direction  to  the 
particular  guide,  who  moves  up  on  the  line  of  officers, 
and  indicates  it  also  to  the  file-closer,  who  replaces  him 
on  the  flank  of  the  squadron. 

These  movements  are  executed  on  the  same  principles, 
when  the  squadron  is  marching  at  the  trot  and  at  the 
gallop. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  it  is  made  to  gain 
ground  towards  its  left  flank,  on  the  same  principles,  but 
by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Platoons  left 
wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  right;  and  is 
put  again  in  line  at  the  commands:  1.  Platoons  right 
wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  left. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  march 
it  to  the  rear  by  wheeUng  the  platoons 
about. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  guide  right,  the  first 
captain  commands : 


THE   SQUADRON.  201 

1.  Platoons  right-about  wheel.  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  pivots  halt  short, 
and  turn  upon  themselves;  the  marching  flanks 
step  oflf  at  the  same  instant,  regulating  themselves 
by  the  right  during  the  first  half  of  the  wheel,  so 
as  to  arrive  together  in  column,  and  by  the  left 
during  the  second  half,  so  as  to  arrive  together  in 
line.  In  each  platoon,  the  rear  rank  and  the  file- 
closers  carry  the  hand  towards  the  marching  flank, 
in  order  to  facilitate  the  movement. 

At  the  third  command,  the  squadron  resumes 
the  direct  march. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  particular  guide  on 
the  side  indicated  moves  up  on  the  line  of, officers; 
he  is  immediately  replaced,  and  a  point  of  direction 
given. 

If,  after  ■wheeling  about,  the  first  captain  wishes  to 
halt  the  squadron,  instead  of  commanding  forward,  he 
commands  :  3.  Halt  ;  4.  Left — Dress  ;  6.  Front. 

This  movement  is  executed  by  the  left,  on  the  same 
principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands :  1. 
Platoons  left-about  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4. 
Guide  right. 

In  these  movements,  the  particular  guide  of  the 
right  turns  to  the  riyhty  moves  straight  forward  the 
extent  of  the  front  of  a  platoon,  and  turns  again 
to  the  rights  in  order  to  place  himself  on  the  left 
of  the  squadron.  The  particular  guide  of  the  left 
executes  the  same  movement,  to  place  himself  on 
the  right  of  the  squadron. 


202  THE   SQUADRON. 

« 
These   movements  are   executed  from  a  halt,  and  in 
marchiug  at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  break 
it  to  the  front  by  platoons,  and  to  re- 
form it. 

The  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Bi/ platoons  to  the /rant.         3.  Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  breakinc:  from 
a  halt,  except  that  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
continuing  to  inarch  on,  does  not  command  platoon 
/oricardij  nor  MARCH,  but  repeats  the  indication 
of  the  guide. 

This  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  at  the 
trot  and  at  the  gallop. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  form  it  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands:  4 

1.  Form  squadron.      2.  March.      3.  Guide  right. 

The  squadron  marching  at  the  (rot,  this  movement  is 
executed  on  the  same  principles,  excopt  that  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon  commands:  1.  }V'alk ;  2.  March;, the 
right  particular  guide,  at  the  command  guide  right,  moves 
up  on  the  line  of  officers,  and  each  of  the  other  chiefs  of 
platoon  commands:  1.  Walk;  2.  March:  on  arriving  in 
line.  The  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner 
"when  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  each  platoon  passing 
successively  to  the  trot. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the 


THE   SQUADRON.  203 

left,  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at 
the  commands  :   1.  By  the  left — by  platoons  to  the  front:  * 

2.  March;  3.   Guide  right.     It  is  re-formed  at  the  same 
gait  at  the  commands:  1.  Form  squadron;  2.  March; 

3.  Guide  left. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  break 
it  to  the  front  by  platoons,  doubling 
the  gait,  and  to  re-form  it. 

The  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Bi/  platoons  to  the  front — trot.        3.  Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands,  Trot ;  and  those  of  the  three  other 
platoons  command,  Platoon  right  halfxche.el — trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in 
breaking  from  the  line  halted. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line  at  the  trot,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  at  the  gallop  on  the  same  principles. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  form  it,  doubling  the  gait,  the  first  captaia 
commands: 

1.  Form  squadron — trot.  3.  Guide  right, 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  three 

*  It  is   bettor   to  command:  1.   "5y  platoons  from   the  left; 
2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  right." 


204  THE   SQUADRON. 

last  platoons  command,  Platoon  left  Imlf-wliecl — 
trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  the  three  last  platoons,  the  first  platoon  con- 
tinues to  march  straight  forward  at  the  loalk,  and 
its  chief  repeats  the  indication  of  the  guide. 

The  three  other  platoons  execute  their  half-wheel 
to  the  left  at  the  trot,  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  half-wheels  being  nearly  terminated,  the 
chiefs  of  these  platoons  command:  1.  Forward; 
2.  Guide  right;  they  move  straight  forward,  and 
as  soon  as  the  right  file  of  the  platoon  is  in  the 
direction  of  the  left  file  of  the  platoon  which 
precedes,  they  command:  1.  Right  half-wheel;  2. 
March;  3.  Forward;  and  then,  walk;  in  suffi- 
cient time  to  command  MARCH,  when  their  platoon 
arrives  in  line  ;  then  the  troopers  resume  the  walkf 
and  align  themselves  in  marching. 

Each  platoon,  after  its  half-wheel  to  the  lefty 
moves  straight  forward  on  the  point  where  it  is  to 
turn,  and  without  obliquing  towards  the  platoons 
which  precede  it. 

The  second  captain  gives  a  point  of  direction  to  the 
particular  guide  of  the  right,  who  moves  upon  the  line  of 
officers  at  the  command,  guide  right. 

The  column  being  at  the  trot,  this  movement  is  exe- 
cuted at  the  commands:  1.  Form  squadron — gallop;  2. 
March  ;  3.  Guide  right ;  the  first  platoon  continues  to 
march  at  the  trot^  and  the  three  last  platoons  take  the 
gallop,  and  resume  the  trot  when  they  arrive  on  the  lino 
of  the  first. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  the  squadron  is 
formed  at  the  same  gait  as  prescribed,  each  platoon 
passing  successively  to  the  trot. 


THE   SQUADRON.  205 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the  left 
by  platoons,  doubling  the  gait,  on  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands,*  1.  By 
the  left — by  platoons  to  the  front — trot  (or  gallop)  ;  2.  March; 

3.  Guide  right.     The  squadron  is  re-formed,  doubling  the  * 
gait,  at  the  commands,  1.  Form  squadron — trot  [ot  ^llop)  ; 
2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  left. 

Passage  of  obstacles. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  execute  the  passage 
of  obstacles,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

.  1.   Obstacle.       2.  First  platoon.       3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  halts,  and  its 
chief  immediately  commands,  1.  Left  oblique — trot; 

2.  March  ;  and   this   platoon   doubles  upon   the 
second. 

When  the  platoon  which  has  obliqued  is  in  rear 
of  the  one  upon  which  it  has  doubled,  its  chief  com- 
mands,^!. Forward;  2.  Guide  right;  3.  Walk; 

4.  March. 

To  cause  the  'platoon  "which  has  obliqued  to  return  to 
its  place,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  First  platoon.  2.  Into  Line. 

At  the  command  into  line,  the  chief  of  the  pla- 
toon commands,  1.  Right  oblique — trot;  2.  March; 
when  opposite  the  ground  the  platoon  is  to  occupy, 
he     commands,     1.  Forward;     2.   Guide   left; 

3.  Walk;  and  when  the  platoon  is  in  line,  4.  March. 

*  Bxj   platoons    from    the   left— Trot    (or  gallop);    2.   March; 
3.  Guide  right. 

18 


206  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  chief  of  the  platoon  commands,  Forward,  a 
little  before  its  left  file  has  passed  beyond  the  right 
file  of  the  platoon  on  which  it  is  to  form. 

'  If  the  guide  is  to  the  right,  as  soon  as  the  first  platoon 
has  re-entered  upon  the  line,  the  first  captain  indicates 
the  new  guide  ;  he  does  the  same  as  soon  as  the  fourth 
platoon  is  in  line,  if  the  guide  is  to  the  left. 

The  second  platoon,  executes  the  sanje  movement,  in 
obliquing  to  the  rightt>chind  the  first  platoon;  the  third 
in  obliquing  to  the  left  behind  the  fourth,  and  the  fourth 
in  obliquing  to  the  right  behind  the  third:  each  platoon 
should  always  double  upon  that  with  which  it  forms  the 
division. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon  give  the  prescribed  commands 
rapidly,  and  cause  the  degree  of  obliquity  to  be  a  lit- 
tle increased,  that  the  movement  may  be  more  prompt- 
Ip  executed,  and  to  enable  the  platoons  to  take  their 
distances. 

All  these  movements  are  executed  first  at  the  walk. 
When  the  squadron  is  at  the  trot,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted at  the  gallop. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  execute  the  passage 
of  obstacles  upon  the  head  of  each  platoon,  the  first  cap- 
tain commands : 

1.  In  each  platoon  hy  fours   (or  hy   twos) — trot, 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  com- 
mand :  Bf/  fours  (or  by  twos) — trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  ofii- 
cers,  each  platoon  breaks  by  fours  as  prescribed,  the 
chiefs  of  platoon  march  at  the  head  of  their  platoons; 
the  particular  guide  of  the  right,  who  marches  on 
the  line  of  ofiicers,  places  himself  on  the  right  of 
the  chief  of  the  first  platoon;  the   particular  guide 


THE   SQUADRON.  207 

of  the  left,  in  rear  of  the  fourth  platoon,  and  the 
file-closers  upon  the  right  flank  of  their  platoons. 

Each  platoon  being  thus  broken  in  column,  should 
preserve  a  direction  parallel  to  that  of  the  one 
which  is  the  guide,  keeping  on  the  same  line,  and 
always  at  the  distance  of  its  front,  to  be  able  at  any 
moment  to  re-form  in  line. 

If  the  ground  requires  a  platoon  to  deviate  from 
its  direction,  it  should  return  to  it  as  soon  as  possi- 
ble, and  recover  its  proper  distance  with  respect  to 
the  side  towards  the  guide. 

In  marching  thus,  the  first  captain  may  cause  the 
squadron  to  break  by  twos  and  by  file,  observing  to  form 
twos  and  fours  as  soon  as  the  ground  will  permit. 

These  movements  are  executed  when  the  squadron  is 
inarching  at  the  trot  or  at  the  gallop. 

This  formation  being  only  momentary,  the  guide  re- 
mains on  the  side  it  was  during  the  march  in  line,  that 
the  base  of  the  alignment  may  not  be  changed. 

To  re-form  the  squadron,  each  platoon  having  broken  by 
fours  or  by  twos  at  the  trot,  right  in  front,  the  first  cap- 
tain commands : 

1.  Form  platoons.  3.   Guide  right. 

2.  Marcu. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  com- 
mand :   Form  platoon. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, each  platoon  forms  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon 
drill. 

If  the  ground  does  not  permit  all  the  platoons 
to  form  at  once,  the  one  before  which  the  obstacle 
is  presented,  forms  in  rear  of  the  other  platoon  of 


208  THE   SQUADRON. 

its  division,  and  retakes  its  place  in  line  as  soon  as 
practicable. 

These  movements  are  executed  by  the  left,  on  the  same 
principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  :  1,  In 
tach  platoon — by  fourt  (or  by  twos) — from  the  left — trot  ; 
2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  left ;  and  to  re-form  the  squadron, 
1.  Form  platoons ;    2.  Marcu;    8.   Guide  left. 


CHARGE.— RALLYING.— SKIRMISHING. 


Charge. 

In  the  charge,  as  in  every  other  direct  march,  it  is  im- 
portant to  keep  the  horses  straight.  As  soon  as  any  con- 
fusion is  observed,  it  is  necessary  to  halt  and  recommence 
the  movement. 

The  squadron  is  exercised  at  the  charge:  1.  In  line; 
2.  In  column ;    3.  As  foragers. 

The  charge  in  line  is  executed  by  the  squadron  when  in 
line  :  it  should  be  as  short  as  possible,  so  as  to  arrive  in 
good  order,  and  without  fatiguing  the  horses. 

The  charge  in  column  is  executed  by  the  squadron  broken 
in  column  with  distance. 

To  execute  the  charge  as  foragers,  all  the  troopers  of  - 
the  squadron  disperse,  and  direct  themselves  each  upon  t 
the  point  he  wishes  to  attack,  observing  not  to  lose  sight 
of  their  officers,  who  charge  with  them. 

The  line  upon  which  the  squadron  should  re-form  after 
the  charge  is  marked  out,  as  prescribed,  (see  Platoon 
Drill,)  by  two  non-commissioned  officers,  who  are  file- 
closers,  and  who  are  placed  240  paces  in  front,  facing, 
and  at  a  distance  from  each  other  equal  to  the  front  of 
the  squadron. 


THE   SQUADRON.  209 

Non-commissioned  officers  are  also  placed  opposite  the 
right  flank  at  the  different  points  where  the  changes  of 
gait  should  take  place. 

If  the  guide  is  on  the  left,  they  are  placed  opposite  the 
left  flank. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  orders  the 
sabres  to  be  drawn,  and  the  platoons  to  charge  one  after 
another,  commencing  by  the  right. 

For  this  purpose,  the  first  captain  advances  24Q^  paces 
to  the  front,  taking  a  trumpeter  with  him  ;  and  when  he 
wishes  the  movement  to  commence,  he  causes  a  signal  to 
be  given. 

The  first  platoon  then  moves  forward  at  the  commands 
of  its  chief.  It  passes  successively  from  the  walk  to  the 
trot,  from  the  trot  to  the  gallopj  and  from  the  gallop  to  the 
charge. 

The  three  other  platoons  break  in  their  turn,  when  the 
preceding  one  has  halted. 

To  execute  the  charge  by  the  entire  squadron,  the  first 
captain  places  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  squad- 
ron, and  commands : 

1.  Squadron  forward.  3.  MARCH. 

2.  Guide  right  (or  left.) 

When  the  squadron  has  marched  forward  20  paces,  he 
commands : 

1.  Trot.  2.  March. 

At  60  paces  farther,  he  commands  : 

1.  Gallop.  2.  March. 

At  80  paces  farther,  he  commands  : 

Charge. 

At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon, the  troopers  take  the  position  of  raise  sabre. 


210  THE   SQUADRON. 

"When  the  squadron,  after  having  passed  over  60  paces 
at  the  charge,  is  20  paces  from  the  non-commissioned 
officers  who  mark  the  line,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Attention.  4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  Squadron,  5.  FRONT. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  attention,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  the  troopers^repare  to  slacken  the  pace, 
and  carry  the  sabre  to  the  shoulder. 

At  the  command  squadron,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
command,  Platoon,  and  the  troopers  pass  to  the 
trot. 

At  the  command  halt,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  the  troopers  halt. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  they  align  them- 
selves to  the  right. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands. Front. 

To  assure  himself  that  the  principles  prescribed  are 
exactly  followed,  the  first  captain  sometimes  places  him- 
self in  front  of  the  squadron,  facing  it,  and  at  the  distance 
that  will  enable  him  to  remark  better  the  faults.  In  this 
case  he  is  replaced  on  the  line  of  officers  by  the  second 
captain,  who  gives  the  commands. 

When  the  squadron  executes  the  charge  correctly,  in- 
stead of  halting  when  the  charge  is  finished,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  Attention.  2.  Trot.  3.  March. 

At  these  commands,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  squadron  passes  to  the  trot,  and  at  20  paces  beyond 
the  line  marked  out,  he  commands  : 


OfiE   SQUADRON.  211 

1.  First  (or  fourtli)  platoon — as  foragers, 

2.  March. 

At  these  commands,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  platoon 
designated,  the  platoon  moves  forward  at  the  gallop,  and 
dispei^es  as  foragers.  A  trumpeter  follows  the  chief  of 
the  pmtoon. 

The  squadron  follows  this  platoon  at  the  trot ;  when  it 
has  passed  over  160  paces,  the  first  captain  causes  the 
rally  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal,  repeated  by  the 
trumpeter  of  the  platoon  dispersed  as  foragers,  the  latter 
rally  upon  the  squadron,  as  prescribed  in  the  Platoon 
Drill ;  and  when  three-fourths  of  the  platoon  have  rallied 
and  are  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Attention.  3.  March. 

2.  Gallop.  4.  Charge. 

The  squadron  executes  again  the  charge  in  line ;  the 
troopers,  who  have  not  been  able  to  rally,  charge  upon 
the  flanks  of  the  squadron. 

To  exercise  the  troopers  in  rallying  upon  any  point 
whatever,  the  first  captain,  during  the  march  at  the  trot^ 
causes  the  squadron  to  gain  ground  towards  one  of  its 
flanks,  by  executing  a  half-wheel  to  the  right  or  to  the  left^ 
or  by  breaking  by  platoons  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  and  re- 
forming immediately  in  a  new  direction. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  at  the 
troty  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.   To  the  charge.  2.  March.         i 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
commands,  Gallop. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  commences  the 
gallop. 


212  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  other  platoons  follow  at  the  trotj-esLch  taking 
the  ^aZ/op,  when  the  platoon  which  precedes  is  at 
the  distance  of  50  paces. 

When  the  first  platoon  has  passed  over  80  paces 
at  the  gallopy  its  chief  commands,  Charge. 

At  this  command,  the  platoon  executes  the  change ; 
and  when  it  has  passed  over  60  paces,  its  chief  causes 
it  to  pass  to  the  trot,  by  the  commands  :  1.  Atten- 
tion;   2.  Trot;    3.  March. 

The  other  platoons  pay  attention  to  the  movements  of 
the  platoon  which  precedes  them,  so  as  to  change  the  gait 
in  time,  and  to  I'esume  their  ordinary  distance :  the  first 
captain  halts  the  column  when  he  thinks  proper. 

These  charges  are  executed,  each  platoon  taking  in  its 
turn  the  head  of  the  column. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  at  the 
trotf  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  First  platoon — as  foragers. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  disperses  as  foragers. 
The  squadron  continues  to  march  at  the  troty  and 
when  it  has  passed  over  100  or  150  paces,  the  first 
captain  causes  the  rally  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  siojnal,  the  platoon  rallies  and  re-forms  at 
the  rear  of  the  column,  or  at  its  place  in  line,  if  the 
squadron  has  been  put  in  line. 

Rallying. 

To  give  the  troopers  the  habit  of  rallying  promptly, 
after  having  been  dispersed  as  foragers,  the  first  captain 


THE   SQUADRON.  213 

places  the  squadron  at  the  extremity  of  the  ground ;  and 
after  giving  notice  to  the  files  on  the  flank  of  platoons,  the 
file-closers  and  the  trumpeters,  to  remain  upon  the  line 
■with  him,  he  causes  the  disperse  to  be  sounded.  At  this 
signal,  the  troopers  disperse  and  charge  as  foragers ;  when 
they  are  at  the  distance  of  160  or  200  paces,  the  first  cap- 
tain causes  the  rallj/  to  be  sounded. 

The  first  captain  observes  that  the  troopers  disperse 
■without  confusion;  that,  in  rallying,  they  direct  them- 
selves to  the  right  and  to  the  left,  outside  of  the  flanks  of 
the  squadron,  in  order  to  unmask  promptly  the  front  of 
the  squadron,  and  to  re-form,  passing  by  the  rear. 

When  the  troopers  rally  without  confusion,  this  move- 
•ment  is  repeated  without  requiring  the  flank  files,  &c.,  to 
remain  on  the  line  of  the  squadron. 

At  the  signal  to  disperse,  the  squadron  disperses  in  every 
direction  to  the  front. 

When  the  squadron  is  dispersed,  the  first  captain  causes 
the  rail]/  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  signal,  the  officers,  the  non-commissioned  offi- 
cers and  the  troopers  rejoin  rapidly ;  the  officers  aliga 
themselves  promptly  upon  the  first  captain,  and  the  non- 
commissioned officers  mark  immediately  the  flanks  of  the 
platoons. 

As  soon  as  the  first  captain  has  formed  two-thirds  of 
the  squadron,  he  moves  forward,  charges  again,  and 
halts. 

W^en  the  squadron  is  dispersed  as  foragers,  the  first 
captain  should  sometimes  establish  himself  to  the  right  or 
to  the  left  of  the  direction  followed  by  the  troopers,  and 
then  order  the  rallj/  to  be  sounded,  to  accustom  them  to 
rally  upon  any  point  he  may  select. 

These  movements  are  first  executed  at  the  irot,  and 
then  at  the  gallop. 

Light  cavalry  should  be  particularly  exercised  in  charge 
ing  as  foragers  and  in  rallying. 


214  THE   SQUADRON. 


Skirmishing. 

When  the  squadron  is  in  sight  of  the  skirmishers,  the 
first  captain  orders  no  signal  except  the  rally.  The  chief 
of  the  skirmishers  observes  the  movements  of  the  squad- 
ron he  covers,  and  conforms  to  them  as  soon  as  practicable, 
requiring  his  trumpeter  to  sound  the  necessary  sigtmls. 

When  the  squadron  changes  front,  the  chief  of  the  skir- 
mishers moves  upon  the  new  front,  unless  the  first  captain 
gives  orders  to  the  contrary. 

If  the  squadron  is  out  of  sight  of  the  skirmishers,  the 
first  captain  causes  the  signals  which  correspond  to  the 
movements  he  executes  to  be  sounded,  in  order  to  give 
notice  to  the  chief  of  the  skirmishers,  who  conforms  to 
them  as  soon  as  practicable. 

The  trumpeter  who  follows  the  chief  of  the  skirmishers 
should  give  the  signals  only  upon  the  order  of  that  officer. 
The  skirmishers  should  execute  their  movements  only  by 
the  signals  of  the  trumpeter  who  accompanies  the  officer 
■who  commands  them.    . 

With  respect  to  the  signals,  as  well  as  to  commence  and 
to  cease  firing,  the  troopers  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
in  the  Platoon. 

When  several  platoons  act  as  skirmishers,  the  firing  is 
commenced  by  the  right  of  each  platoon. 

When  a  squadron  is  acting  as  skirmishers,  the  first  cap- 
tain is  always  followed  by  a  trumpeter.  The  others  are 
placed  several  steps  in  rear  of  the  line  of  skirmishes,  at 
equal  distances  from  the  centre  to  the  extremities,  in  order 
to  repeat  as  soon  as  possible  the  signals  given  by  the 
trumpeter  of  the  first  captain. 

The  squadron  being  in  *  line,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  First  (ox  fourOi)  platoon — as  skirmishers. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon orders  the  sabres  to  be  returned,  the  holsters 


THE   SQUADRON.  215 

to  be  uncovered,  and  the  arms  to  be  loaded ;  he  then 
commands:  \.  Platoon  forward  ;  2.  Guide  right ; 
3.  Trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  platoon,  this  platoon  moves  forward.  After 
marching  100  paces  to  the  front,  the  chief  of  the 
platoon  commands:  1.  Six  files  from  ri(/ht  (or  from 
left) — as  skirmishers  ;  2.  March;  3.  Guide  right; 
(or  guide  left);  which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in 
the  Platoon. 

When  the  first  captain  "wishes  the  skirmishers  to  re- 
enter the  squadron,  he  causes  the  ralli/  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  signal,  the  chief  of  the  skirmishers  rallies  his 
platoon,  as  prescribed  in  the  Platoon,  and  then  rejoins  the 
squadron  at  the  gallop,  directing  himself  upon  one  of  the 
flanks  to  resume  his  place  in  line. 

When  the  first  captain,  wishes  to  relieve  a  platoon 
"which  is  skirmishing,  the  chief  of  the  new  platoon,  after 
causing  the  arras  to  be  loaded,  moves  forward  upon  the 
reserve  of  the  platoon  which  is  acting  as  skirmishers. 
On  coming  up  abreast  of  it,  he  orders  out  6  files  as  skir- 
mishers, as  has  been  explained ;  the  remaining  6  files  halt 
and  draw  sabres. 

As  soon  as  the  new  skirmishers  have  passed  5  paces 
beyond  those  they  are  to  relieve,  the  latter  iurn-about  and 
rally  upon  their  reserve.  The  platoon  having  rallied,  is 
conducted  back  to  the  squadron  at  the  trot. 

When  the  entire  squadron  is  to  act  as  skirmishers,  the 
first  captain  orders  the  sabres  to  bo  returned,  the  holsters 
to  be  uncovered,  and  the  arms  to  be  loaded ;  he  then  com- 
mands : 

1.  Squadron  forward.  3.   Trot. 

2.  Guide  right.  4.  March. 


216  THE   SQUADRON. 

Having  arrived  at  the  point  where  the  reserve  is  to  be 
established,  about  100  paces  from  the  front  of  the  body 
to  be  covered,  and  more  if  it  has  been  commanded,  the 
first  captain  commands : 

1.  Three  first  (or  three  last)  platoons  as  skir- 
rmshers. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  platoon 
■which  is  to  support  the  skirmishers,  halts  that  pla- 
toon, and  orders  the  sabres  to  be  drawn.  The  chiefs 
of  the  three  other  platoons  continue  to  march  on, 
each  directing  himself  by  the  shortest  route,  100 
paces  to  the  front  towards  the  part  of  the  line  his 
platoon  is  to  occupy,  and  having  reached  it,  ho 
disperses  his  platoon  as  skirmishers. 

The  right  platoon  covers  the  right  of  the  regi- 
ment, and  extends  30  or  40  paces  beyond  it ;  an- 
other platoon  covers  the  centre,  and  the  left  platoon 
covers  the  left,  extending  also  30  or  40  paces 
beyond.  The  chiefs  of  these  platoons  remain  25 
paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  skirmishers,  and  pass 
over  the  extent  occupied  by  the  troopers  of  their 
platoons. 

The  reserve  remains  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the 
line  of  skirmishers.  If  the  first  captain  thinks 
proper  to  divide  it,  each  fraction  moves  upon  the 
point  designated,  the  first  commanded  by  the  officer, 
the  oiher  by  the  non-commissioned  officer  who  waa 
the  file-closer. 

The  squadron  having  moved  forward  to  cover  the  regi- 
ment, if  the  first  captain  wishes  only  one  division  to  act 
as  skirmishers,  he  commands:    1.  First  (or  second)  divi- 


THE  SQUADRON.  217 

sion — as  skirmishers  ;    4.  March  ;    which  is  executed  as 
prescribed  above. 

The  division  which  serves  as  a  reserve  remains  as  a 
single  troop,  or,  if  the  first  captain  thinks  proper,  it  is 
divided  into  two  parts. 

The  first  captain,  followed  by  the  first  sergeant,  keeps 
habitually  half  way  between  the  reserve  and  the  skir- 
mishers, to  direct  the  movements. 

The  second  captain,  followed  by  the  second  sergeant, 
passes  the  line,  and  gives  notice  to  the  first  captain  of 
every  thing  that  it  Is  important  for  him  to  know. 

If  the  first  captain  wishes  to  rally  the  skirmishers 
upon  themselves,  he  causes  the  rally  of  skirmishers,  No. 
6,  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  signal,  each  platoon  rallies  as  rapidly  as 
possible  upon  its  chief. 

If  the  first  captain  then  wishes  to  rally  the  squad- 
ron, he  moves  upon  the  point  where  he  intends  it 
shall  form,  and  causes  the  raUj^  to  be  sounded  when 
three-fourths  of  each  platoon  have  rallied. 

At  this  new  signal,  the  reserve  and  each  platoon 
of  skirmishers  move  at  a  gallop  upon  the  point 
where  the  captain  commanding  is  placed.  The 
troopers,  who  did  not  rejoin  their  platoon  when  it 
rallied  upon  itself,  direct  themselves  towards  the 
squadron. 

The  squadron  being  dispersed  as  skirmishers,  if  the 
first  captain  wishes  it  to  rally  immediately,  he  orders  the 
ralli/  to  be  sounded  ;  at  this  signal,  the  officers,  the  skir- 
misliers  and  the  reserve  rally  upon  the  point  occupied 
by  the  first  captain. 

The  troopers  being  dispersed  as  skirmishers,  if  the  first 
captain  wishes  them  to  charge  as  foragers,  he  orders  them 
to  cease  firing,  and  causes  the  disperse  to  be  sounded,    i 
19 


218  THE   SQUADRON. 

At  this  signal,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  move  for- 
ward in  line,  and  the  skirmishers  draw  sabres;  they* 
charge  immediately.     The  reserve    follows  at  the 
trot  or  at  the  gallop ^  as  may  be  necessary. 

After  the  charge,  the  first  captain  orders  the  rally  to 
be  Bounded,  when  the  troopers  rally  in  rear  of  the  reserve. 

The  skirmishers  being  rallied  by  platoons,  as  pre- 
scribed above,  if  the  first  captain  wishes  to  charge,  he 
orders  the  charge  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  signal,  each  chief  of  platoon  conducts 
his  platoon  to  the  charge  in  good  order;  the  re- 
serve supports  the  movement  at  the  trot  or  at  the 
gallop. 

The  first  captain  places  himself  so  as  to  be  able  to 
direct  the  general  movement. 

The  second  captain  charges  with  the  platoon  nearest 
to  him. 

The  platoons  rally  behind  the  reserve:  the  first  captain 
noves  upon  that  point  at  the  same  time  that  he  orders 
the  rally  to  be  sounded. 

If,  in  a  squadron  of  dragoons,  one  platoon  dismounts 
to  fight  on  foot,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1 .  First  (or  fourth)  platoon — prepare  to  fight  on  foot. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  orders 
the  sabres  to  be  returned. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the 
platoon,  this  platoon  moves  forward,  having  marched^  12 
paces,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  halts  it  and  commands: 

Prepare  to  fight — on  foot. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  dragoons,  in  the 
platoon  drill. 


THE   SQUADRON.  219 

The  platoon  being  formed  on  foot,  it  is  conducted  to 
the  point  it  is  to  defend,  and  is  exercised  as  light  in- 
fantry. 

Tlie  horses  without  riders  will  bo  led  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  squadron. 

When  the  first  captain  wishes  the  dismounted  platoon 
to  remount,  he  orders  the  rally  to  be  sounded.  At  this 
signal,  the  chief  of  this  platoon  places  himself  at  the 
point  on  which  he  wishes  the  dragoons  to  rally,  if  dis- 
persed as  skirmishers,  and  the  rally  is  executed  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  dragoons. 

The  platoon  being  formed,  is  conducted  by  the  rear 
rank  to  within  12  paces  of  the  ground  occupied  by  their 
horses,  and  the  chief  of  this  platoon  gives  the  command, 
dragoons  mounts  which  having  been  executed,  it  resumes 
its  place  in  the  squadron. 

If  the  first  captain  wishes  a  division  to  dismount,  he 
commands  : 

First  (or  second)  division — prepare  to  fight  on  foot. 

"Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescribed  for 
the  platoon.  The  2d  lieutenant  commanding  the  second 
platoon  of  the  division  remains  with  the  horses  of  the 
dismounted  men;  the  1st  lieutenant  commands  the  dis- 
mounted dragoons ;  he  forms  two  platoons  which  are 
exercised  on  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  the 
platoon. 

If  i\ie  whole  squadron  dismounts  to  fight  Stl  foot,  the 
first  captain  commands  : 

Prepare  to  fight — ON  FOOT. 

Which  is  executed  by  the  whole  squadron,  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  platoon. 

The  second  captain  and  an  officer  remain  with  the 
horses  of  the  dismounted  men  :  the  first  captain  moves 
his  dismounted  squadron  upon  the  point  it  is  to  defend, 
and  conforms  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  light  infantrj 
tactics. 

The  squadron  remounts  by  the  commands  and  on  the 
principles  prescribed  for  the  platoon. 


220  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  right  file  of  the  squadron  remftins  raounted. 

The  pirticulnr  guides  dismount,  and  also  the  two 
trumpeters  who  follow  the  first  captain  and  the  lieuten- 
ant commanding  the  skirmishers. 

The  file-closers  who  remain  mounted  take  their  places 
in  front  of  their  platoons. 

The  horses  of  the  oflicers  who  dismount  are  held  as 
follows : 

Those  of  the  first  captain  and  the  lieutenant  com- 
manding the  first  platoon,  by  a  trumpeter  who  remains 
mounted  on  the  right  of  the  squadron.  He  holds  the 
captain's  horse  on  his  right  and  the  other  on  his  left. 

The  trooper  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  holds  tho 
horses  of  the  two  other  commandants  of  platoons. 

The  trooper  on  thcright  of  the  rear  rank,  holds  with 
his  right  hand  the  horse. of  the  particular  guide  of  the 
right,  and  the  horses  of  the  two  trumpeters  are  linked 
on  his  left. 

The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  holds  the 
horse  of  the  particular  guide  of  the  left  with  his  left 
hand. 

The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  holds  the  horse 
of  the  file-closer  who  dismounts. 


THE  COLUMN  BY  DIVISIONS. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  if  the  first  captain  wishes 
to  form  it  in  column  by  divisions,  he  commands: 

1.  Divisions  right  (or  left)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt  (or  Forward.) 

4.  Guide  left  (or  right.) 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  in  order  to  break  the 
squadron  by  platoons  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  halting 
after  the  wheels  or  without  halting. 


THE   SQUADRON.  221 

The  same  movements  are  executed,  when  the  squad- 
ron is  marching  in  line. 

The  principles  prescribed  for  the  column  by  platoons, 
are  applicable  to  the  march  in  column  by  divisions,  the 
diflFercnt  modes  of  passing  from  line  into  column,  and 
from  column  into  line. 

To  gain  ground  towards  its  flanks  or  to  the  rear,  cm- 
ploy  the  means  proscribed  for  the  column  by  platoons. 
The  wheels-about  can  be  also  executed  by  divisions. 

The  distance  measured  from  the  croup  of  the  horses  of 
the  rear  rank  of  one  division,  to  the  head  of  the  horses 
of  the  division  which  follows,  should  bo  equal  to  the 
front  of  the  division,  minus  the  depth  of  the   two   ranks. 

In  the  wheels  on  a  moveable  pivot  by  divisions,  the 
ninth  file  of  the  platoon  upon  which  the  wheel  is  exe- 
cuted, is  the  middle  point  of  the  radius  of  the  wheel. 
The  pivot  describes  an  arc  of  circle  of  ten  paces. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  platoons,  right 
in  front,  to  form  the  divisions  at  the  same  gait,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  Form  divisions.  2.  March, 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  second 
and  fourth  platoons  command,  Platoon  left  TialJ- 
whed. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  same 
officers,  the  second  and  fourth  platoons  execute  a 
half-wheel  to  the  left  on  a  fixed  pivot.  The  first 
and  third  platoons  continue  to  march  straight  for- 
ward, and  after  having  marched  30  paces,  their 
chiefs  command  :  Halt. 

The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  platoons, 
when  the  half-mheel  to  the  left  is  nearj^y  terminated, 
command,  1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  ri<jht ;  they 
move  straight  forward,  and  as  soon  as  the  right 
file  of  their  platoon  arrives  in  the  direction  of  the 


222  THE  SQUADRON. 

left  file  of  the  platoon  which  precedes,  they  com- 
mand, 1.  Riyhthalf-ichecl ;'  2.  March;  3.  For- 
ward ;  they  raove  forward,  and  command  halt, 
on  arriving  abreast  of  the  platoon  belonging  to  the 
same  division. 

The  lieutenants  commanding  divisions  then  com- 
mand, Riyht — Dress,  move  to  the  left  of  the  divi- 
sion, rectify  the  alignment,  command,  FRONT,  and 
return  to  the  centre  of  their  platoons. 

"When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  form  divisions  at 
the  same  gait,  conform  to  the  principles  just  prescnbed, 
except  that  the  chiefs  of  tlie  fiust  and  third  platoons,  at 
the  first  command,  command  M^alk ;  at  the  command 
MARCH,  repeated  by  them,  their  platoons  pass  to  the  walk, 
continue  to  march  on,  and  that  the  chiefs  of  the  second 
and  fourth  platoons,  which  execute  their  movements  in 
marching  at  the  trot,  command  Walk,  in  suflicient  time 
to  command  march  when  their  platoons  come  up  abreast 
of  those  on  which  they  are  to  form. 

The  first  captain  then  commands  :    Guide  left. 

"When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  to  form  the  divi- 
sions at  the  same  gait,  conform  to  the  same  principles, 
the  first  and  third  platoons  passing  to  the  trot  at  the  com- 
mand MARCH,  and  the  second  and  fourth  platoons  taking 
the  trot,  as  they  come  up. 

The  column  having  the  left  in  front,  conform  to  the 
same  principles,  the  first  and  third  platoons  executing  in 
an  inverse  sense  wliat  has  been  prescribed  for  the  second 
and  fourth  ;  and  the  latter  conforming  to  what  has  heea 
prescribed  for  the  first  and  third.  * 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  divisions,  right 
in  front,  to  break  the  divisions  by  platoons,  the  first  cap- 
tain command^ 

1.  By  platoons,  3.   Guide  left. 

2.  March. 


THE   SQUADRON.  223 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  second 
and  fourth  platoons  command,  Platoons  riyht-half 
wheel. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  same 
officers,  the  second  and  fourth  platoons  execute  a 
half  icheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and  the  first 
and  third  platoons  continue  to  march  on. 

The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  platoons,  the 
half  wheel  to  the  right  being  nearly  terminated, 
command,  1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  left;  they 
move  straight  forward,  and  as  soon  as  the  left  file 
of  their  platoon  arrives  in  the  direction  of  the  left 
file  of  the  platoon  which  precedes,  they  command, 
1.  Left  half-wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward; 
and  move  forward  taking  their  proper  distances. 

The  divisions  are  broken  by  platoons,  on  the  same 
principles,  in  marching  at  the  trot  or  at  the  gallop. 

The  column  having  the  left  in  front,  the  first  captain 
commands,  1.  By  the  left — by  platoons;*  2.  March; 
8.  Guide  right ;  wliich  is  executed  on  the  same  princi- 
ples, the  first  and  third  platoons  executing  in  an  inverse 
sense  what  is  prescribed  for  the  second  and  fourth,  and 
the  latter  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  first 
and  third  platoons. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  platoons,  right 
in  front,  to  form  divisions,  doubling  the  gait,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  Form  divisions — trot.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  the  first 


♦  It  is  better  to  command—"  By  platoons  from  the  left." 


224  THE   SQUADRON. 

and  third  platoons  continuing  to  march  at  the  same 
gait,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  pla- 
toons commanding  :  1.  Flaloon  left  half  wheel — 
trot;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  right; 
and  1.  Riyht  half -wheel ;  2.  March;  3.  For- 
ward ;  4.  Walk.  When  they  arrive  alareast  of 
the  platoon  on  which  they  form,  they  command : 
5.  March. 

The  columa  marching  at  the  trot,  the  divisions  are 
formed  at  the  gallop,  on  the  same  principles,  at  the  com- 
mands:  1.  Form  divisions — gallop;  2.  March;  3.  Guide 
left. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  the  divisions  are 
formed  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  and  third  platoons  taking 
the  trot  at  the  command  march. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  divisions,  right 
in  front,  to  break  the  divisions  by  platoons,  doubling  the 
gait,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Biy  platoons — trot.  3.   Guide  right. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and 
third  platoons  command,  Trot;  those  of  the  sec- 
ond and  fourth  platoons  command,  Platoons  right 
hd  If -wheel —  trot . 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  the  first  and  third  platoons  move  for- 
ward at  the  trot.  The  second  and  fourth  execute 
their  half  wheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot,  at  the 
troty  and  the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed 
above? 

The  column  being  at  the  trot,  to  break  by  platoons 
at  the  gallop,  conform  to  the  same  principles,   at  the    i 


THE   SQUADRON.  225 

commands:  1.  Br/ platoons — gallup ;  3.  March;  4.  Guide 
left. 

When  the  column  marches  at  the  gallop,  the  divisions 
are  broken  at  the  same  gait. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  break  it  by  divisions 
by  the  right  to  march  to  the  left,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands: 

1.  Divisions  break  hy  the  right — to  march  to  the 
left. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  column 
by  platoons,  each  first  lieutenant  commanding  suc- 
cessively, MARCH,  when  the  division  which  pre- 
cedes arrives  opposite  the  centre  of  the  second 
platoon  of  his  own  division. 

The  same  principles  are  observed,  to  break  by  the  left 
to  march  to  the  right. 

To  break  the  squadron  by  divisions  to  the  rear  by  the 
right,  to  march  to  the  left,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Divisions  hreak  hy  the  right  to  the  rear — to 
march  to  the  left. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  column 
by  platoons,  each  first  lieutenant  commanding  suc- 
cessively, MARCH,  when  the  chief  of  the  division 
which  was  on  his  right  has  commanded  forward, 
after  having  executed  his  wheel  to  the  right-about. 

To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left  to  march  to  the  right, 
follow  the  same  principles. 


226  THE    SQUADRON. 


THE   SQUADRON  OF  SIXTY-FOUR   FILES. 

The  principles  establislied  for  the  squadron  of  forty- 
eight  files  are  applicable  to  the  squadron  of  sixty-four 
files,  with  the  following  modifications  :  ♦ 

The  platoons  being  of  sixteen  files,  the  distance  mea- 
sured from  the  croup  of  the  rear  rank  of  one  platoon  to 
the  head  of  the  horses  of  the  front  rank  of  the  platoon 
which  follows,  is  ten  paces. 

For  the  changes  of  direction,  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed when  the  platoons  are  composed  of  twelve  files, 
except  that  the  arc  described  by  the  pivot  is  six  paces. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  platoons,  it  is 
broken  by  sections,  on  the  principles  indicated  to  break 
by  fours  at  the  commands:  1.  By  sections:  2.  March. 
The  same  movements  are  executed  doubling  the  gait. 
The  sections  are  commanded  as  prescribed.* 

In  the  movement  to  break  by  platooixs  by  the  right  to 
march  to  the  left,  each  chief  of  platoon  gives  the  com- 
mand MARCH,  when  the  platoon  which  precedes,  after 
having  turned  to  the  left,  arrives  opposite  the  centre  of 
his  own  platoon. 

In  the  movement  to  break  by  platoons  to  the  rear  by  the 
right  to  march  to  the  left,  each  chief  of  platoon  gives  the 
command  march,  when  the  chief  of  the  platoon  which 
precedes,  after  having  executed  his  wheel  to  the  right- 
about, commands:  Forward. 

In  the  wheels  of  a  division  on  a  moveable  pivot,  the 
arc  of  circle  is  of  12  paces ;  the  twelfth  file  from  the  pivot 
shouM  preserve  the  gait  at  which  the  division  was 
marching;  for  the  squadron,  the  arc  of  circle  described  by 
the  pivot  being  of  24  paces,  the  eighth  file  of  the  second 
platoon  from  the  side  of  the  pivot  should  preserve  the 
gait  at  which  the  squadron  was  marching. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  break  by  section,  con- 

*  See  paragraph  (in  first  part  of  platoon  drill)  on  col- 
umn of  sections. 


I 


THE   SQUADRON.  227 

form  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  order  to  break  by 
platoons,  at  the  commands:  1.  Sections  riflht  wheel;  2. 
March;  3.  Halt  (or  Forward);  4.  Guide  left;  or  I. 
Sec/ions  right  wheel — head  of  column  to  the  right  (or  to  the 
left.) 

In  the  column  by  sections,  the  distance  from  one  sec* 
tion  to  another  is  two  paces.* 

The  changes  of  direction  of  the  column  by  sections  are 
executed  on  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  column 
marching  by  fours,  the  pivot  describing  an  arc  of  circle 
of  !i  paces,  without  slackening  the  gait. 

For  the  oblique  march,  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
for  the  column  by  fours. 

The  sections  are  broken  by  fours  on  the  principle  to 
break  the  platootis  by  fours,  at  the  same  gait  and  doubling 
the  gait.  . 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  sections,  it  is 
formed  to  the  front,  or  on  right  into  line,  on  the  principles 
prescribed  for  these  formations,  when  marching  in  col- 
umn by  fours. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  sections,  it  is 
formed  at  the  same  gait,  or  doubling  the  gait,  by  the 
means  prescribed  for  the  formation,  front  into  line  when 
inarching  by  fours. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  sections,  it  is 
formed  l<ft  into  line,  on  the  principles  prescribed  for  the 
squadron  marching  in  column  by  platoons. 

The  squadron  is  broken  by  sections  for  the  formation 
of  close  column  and  for  the  passage  of  lines, 

*  2  yards.  " 


CAVALRY  TACTICS. 


PART    FOURTH. 


Single  |lanli  .^farmations. 

The  principles  which  govern  the  movements  of 
mounted  forces  formed  in  two  ranks  are  equally 
applicable  when  there  is  but  one  rank. 

The  words  of  command  remain  the  same,  except 
that  those  which  can  be  only  executed  by  two  ranks, 
are  omitted. 

At  the  signal,  "  hoot  and  saddle"  the  horses  are 
saddled,  bridled  and  prepared  to  be  led  out  to  the 
parade  or  drill  ground. 

The  call  "to  horse"  being  sounded  the  1st 
Sergeant  orders  the  troopers  to  "  lead  out." 

When  the  last  call  only  is  sounded,  (as  is  proper 
in  cases  of  sudden  alarm,)  the  troopers  saddle,  bri- 
dle and  mount  with  the  utmost  celerity ;  and  form 
mounted  at,  the  place  of  assembly,  which  must  al- 
ways be  previously  designated. 

The  platoon  is  composed  of  16  troopers  as  a  max- 
imum, 12  as  a  minimum. 


SINGLE   RANK    FORMATIONS.  229 

It  is  preferable  to  divide  into  platoons  of  16,  al- 
though this  may  require  the  number  of  platoons  to 
be  diminished ;  platoons  of  16  are  divisible  into 
sections,  but  not  those  of  12. 

Two,  three  or  four  platoons  united  may  practice 
the  squadron  exercises. 

A  company  divided  into  4  platoons  of  16  men 
will  require  1  Captain,  2  Lieutenants,  4  Sergeants, 
4  Corporals,  and  60  Privates.  When  the  latter  fall 
below  60  in  number,  they  may  be  divided  into  3 
platoons  and  one  section,  of  8 ;  or  into  4  platoons  of 
12  men  each. 

When  the  number  is  more  than  sufficient  for  a 
front  of  48  or  64,  some  of  the  more  expert  troopers 
will  act  as  Corporals,  the  latter  then  acting  as  Ser- 
geants. If  the  strength  is  sufficient,  the  number 
of  non-commissioned  officers,  (and  troopers  acting 
as  such,)  will  equal  the  number  prescribed  in  the 
Squadron  Drill,  and  their  posts  will  be  the  same  as 
there  indicated.  (See  first  pages  of  Squadron 
Drill.) 

In  the  assignment  of  posts  with  the  supposition 
that  48  or  64  rank  and  file  are  present,  we  will 
designate  the  Captain  as  No.  1,  the  next  in  rank 
No.  2,  and  so  on  to  the  4th  Corporal,  who  will  be 
No.  11. 

The  company,  formed  as  squadron  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  positions  will  be  as  follows : 

No.  1,  1  yard  in  front  of  centre  of  company.     . 

"    2,  ♦♦         ♦«         "         ♦«         ««  1st  platooon. 

"    3,  **         •*         ♦<         «'         ««  4th         ♦• 

<•    4,  "        "         '*        '*         *<  '^d          << 

20 


t 


230  SINGLE   RANK    FORMATIONS. 

No.  5,  1  yard  in  front  of  centre  of  od  platoon. 

•'  G,  on  the  rfght  Hank,  not  counted. 

11  7^         a      left       •♦         "         •' 

«•  8,         ♦*        '*       of  the  Ist  platoon. 

4«  9,         "      right      "       2d         " 

•'  10,         "      left         "       3d         " 

««  11,         '«      right      "       4th        " 

Experienced  troopers  should  be  assigned  to  the 
flanks  of  platoons  and  sections. 

The  horses  are  conducted  to  the  drill  ground  as 
directed  in  the  first  pages  of  the  Drill  of  the 
Trooper,  and  having  arrived  there,  the  Captaia 
commands : 

Attention  !    In  one  rank — Form   Squadron.* 

The  Captain  and  chiefs  of  platoons  are  now  mounted  ; 
ftll  the  rest  ^^  stand  ^o  horse,"  that  is  to  say,  they  take  the 
position  of  the  trooper  dismounted.  The  Captain  and  chiefs 
of  platoon  face  the  centres  of  their  respective  commands 
at  10  yards  distance  measured  from  head  to  head. 

At  the  above  command,  the  company  is  formed 
with  the  tallest  on  the  right.  The  Captain  having 
ascertained  that  the  positions  have  been  taken  as 
directed,"!"  he  commands : 

Attention  !  Ri(/ht — Dress. 

*  In  practising  the  squadron  movements,  the  word 
•'Squadron"  is  used  in  the  commands. 

f  The  positions  of  all  besides  the  Captain  and  chiefs  of 
platoon  are  the  same  as  in  line  of  batile  ;  the  trumpeters 
25  yards  (unless  otherwise  ordered)  in  rear  of  the  cen- 
tre ;  the  file-closers  1  yard  in  rear  of  the  3d  files  from 
the  flanks.  For  further  directions,  see  first  pages  of 
riatoon  Drill. 


SINGLE   RANK   FORMATIONS.  231 

The  dress  being  completed,  he  commands: 
Front,  and  directs  the  Orderly  Sergeant  to  call 
the  roll ;  which  having  been  done,  and  the  absentees 
reported,  the  Captain  commands : 

In  each  platoon — Count  by  fours. 

This  is  executed  as  directed  in  the  platoon  and 
squadron,  omitting  what  is  prescribed  for  the  rear 
rank. 

The  captain  cautions  the  troopers  to  recollect 
tTieir  numbers,  and  then  commands  : 

prepare  to  mount. 

At  the  command  prepare  to  mount,  all  other  cav- 
alry than  mounted  riflemen  will  be  governed  by  the 
principles  laid  down  in  the  Drill  of  the  Trooper. 

Mounted  Riflemen  will  observe  the  principles 
explained  in  the  Mounted-Rifle-Drill. 

The  same  remarks  are  applicable  to  the  execution 
of  the  next  following  command,  viz  :  Mount;  also 
to  the  execution  of  the  commands,  ^^  Prepare  to 
Dismounf,"  and   *'  Dismount." 

Haying  mounted,  all  will  take  posts  as  above 
prescribed,  for  battle  order;  mounted  riflemen  con- 
forming to  the  rules  prescribed  for  that  class  of 
mounted  troops. 

The  company  being  in  line,  to  execute  a  move- 
ment by  files  from  one  of  the  flanks,  the  Captafti 
cou^ands : 

1.  B^/ files  to  the  right  (or  left.)     2.  March. 
At  the  1st  command,  the   chief  of   the  platoon 


232  SINGLE  RANK   FORMATIONS. 

which  should  begin  the  movement,  with  the  right 
(or  left)  particular  guide  following  him,  will  place 
himself  facing  in  the  direction  indicated,  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  flank,  the  croup  of  the  Ser- 
geant's horse  being  one  yard  from  the  boot  of  the 
flank  man. 

At  the  word  march,  the  trooper  on  the  flank  in- 
dicated will  turn  and  follow  the  Sergeant  guide  of 
that  flank.  All  the  others  will  turn  in  succession, 
each  one  opening  the  rein  and  closing  the  leg  on 
the  side  indicated,  promptly,  so  as  to  take  and  pre- 
serve the  distance  of  2  feet  from  the  file  in  front  of 
him. 

The  chiefs  of  (all  except  the  leading)  platoon 
will  march  one  yard  from  their  leading  files,  abreast 
of  them  and  on  the  side  of  the  guides.* 

The  guide  of  that  flank  which  has  now  become 
the  rear  will  march  2  ffeet  behind  the  last  file  in  the 
column. 

The  Captain  will  march  on  the  side  of  guides  4 
yards  from  the  centre. 

When  3  Lieutenants  are  present,  the  3d  in  rank 
will  command  the  2d  platoon,  and  a  corresponding 
change  will  be  made  in  the  posts  of  the  non-com- 
missioned officers.  The  music  will  turn  to  the 
right  (or  left)  when  the  centre  files  turn,  maintain- 
ing the-  Bame  relative  position  as  in  line,  except 
when  ordered  to  the  front  or  rear,  or  when  obsta- 
cles require  a  change. 

One  bugler  will  follow  the  Captain  at  3  ^rds 
distance. 

*  The  "  side  of  the  ffuide^^'  is  the  left  when  the  riffht  is 
in  frout,  and  the  ri^hl  when  the  left  is  iu  front. 


SINGLE   RANK  FORMATIONS.  233 

In  the  column  of  route,  passing  along  highways 
or  streets,  or  marching  iu  review,  the  music  will 
move  6  yards  in  front  of  the  leading  officer. 

Columns  of  fours,  twos,  and  files  are  formed  to 
the  front  from  either  flank,  by  the  commands  and 
on  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  drills  of  the 
Platoon  aud  Squadron. 

The  column  of  files  being  in  motion,  right  in 
front,  to  form  line  facing  to  the  left  without  gain- 
ing ground  to  that  flank,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Front.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  wmd  fronty  the  leading  officer  and  ser- 
geant turn  promptly  to  the  left,  aud  halt  at  the 
word  halt.  All  the  rest  move  forward  in  the 
original  direction  of  the  column,  each  trooper  com- 
mencing his  turn  to  the  left  when  2  yards  from  his 
place  in  the  new  line,  halting  1  yard  short  of  the 
line,  and  then  gradually  dressing  up,  without  pass- 
ing over  it. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon  will  take  their  posts  as 
soon  as  half  of  their  platoons  have  come  up  to  the 
line. 

The  captain  taking  position  near  the  right  flank, 
will  direct  the  alignment,  not  giving  the  word/ron^ 
until  the  last  file  is  aligned. 

The  column  of  files  left  in  front  will  be  formed 
facing  to  the  right  of  the  column,  without  gaining 
ground  to  the  right,  on  the  same  principles,  but  by 
inverse  means,  at  the  commands  : 


234  SINGLE  RANK  FORMATIONS. 

1.  Front.  3.  Left — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

The  movements  ^^ right  into  line^^  and  ''^left  into 
line,"  are  executed  as  directed  in  the  second  and 
third  parts  of  this  volume.  The  latter  movements 
require  30  yards  to  be  gained  to  the  flank,  but 
in  other  respects  are  similar  in  execution  to  the 
'<  Front,  halt." 

All  other  movements  of  cavalry  are  fully  ex- 
plained in  the  first  three  parts  of  this  work,  or  in 
the  following  instructions  for  Mounted  Riflemen. 

Corps  of  cavalry  designed  exclusively  for  the 
latter  branch  of  service  will  form  and  manoeuvre 
altogether  on  the  following  principles,  supplying 
what  is  wanting  in  the  following  rules  and  explana- 
tions from  the  1st,  2d  and  od  parts. 

With  such  corps,  the  actual  engagement  being 
principally  on  foot,  the  Light  Infantry  exercises  of 
the  schools  of  the  soldier  and  company  should  be 
well  understood. 

Remark. — The  large  size  bowie-knife,  or  the  sword- 
bayonet,  is  perhaps  preferable  to  the  sabre  for  the 
mounted-rifle  service,  and  the  rifles  should  be  breech- 
loaders of  long  range. 


SKIRMISH 

gnll  of  itflunftir  'gihs, 

ARTICLE  I. 

I  ^-T^^^P^s^^'on  of  a  company   acting   sinciv    and 
•    posts  of  officers,  non-commissioned  officers5&c.lc 

A  com^ny  consists  of  one  captain,  one  first 
lieutenant,  one  second  lieutenant,  one  brevet*  sec- 
ond lieutenant,  four  sergeants,  four  corporals,  one 
farrier,  one  blacksmith,  two  buglers,  and  sixty-four 
privsites  miDimum,  seventy-four  maximum 

A  company  is  divided  into  two  platoons,  which 
are  numbered  from  the  right,  first  platoon  and 
SECOND  platoon. 

Each  phitoon  contains'  two  sections.  The  first 
and  second  sections  make  up  the  first  platoon  :  the 
third  and  fourth  sections  make  up  the  second  pla- 
toon.  ^ 

The  sections  are  called  from  the  right  in  the 
order  in  which  they  stand-first,  second,  third  and 
lourtn  section. 

Each  section  is  made  up  of  "sets  of  four,"  which 
are  called  in  the  order  in  which  they  stand  in  their 
respective   sections,    from    the   right,    -  first   set,"  ' 
'^  second  set,"  ''  third  ^et,"  &c.  &c 

Post  of  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of 
a  company  in  line  of  hattle,  viz  : 

*  Or  junior  second  lieutenant.  - 


236  SKIRMISH  DRILL   FOR 

No.  1.  Captain,  ten  yards  in  front  of  cen-^  g 
ire  of  company.  |  ^  S 

No.  2.  1st  lieutenant,  five  yards  in  front  I '2**^ 
of  centre  of  1st  platoon.  (  s  "^ 

No.  3.  2d  lieutenant,  five  yards  in  front  |  |  § 
of  centre  of  2d  platoon.  J  S 

No.  4.  Brevet  2d  lieutenant,  five  yards  in  rear  of 
centre  of  company,  (not  replaced  when  absent.) 

No.  5.  1st  sergeant,  on  right  of  1st  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  6.  2d  sergeant,  on  right  of  2d  |pction,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  7.  3d  sergeant,  on  right  of  3d  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  8.  4th  sergeant,  on  right  of  4th  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  9.  1st  corporal,  on  left  of  1st  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  10.  2d  corporal,  oa  left  of  2d  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  11.  3d  corporal,  on  left  of  3d  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  12.  4th  corporal,  on  left  of  4th  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

Farrier  and  blacksmith  in  the  rank  ;  bugler  near 
and  behind  the  captain,  or  on  right  of  1st  sergeant, 
and  one  yard  from  him. 

4th  section.      3d  section.      2d  section.      1st  section. 


12  8     II  7     10  6     y 

V , '4> , — 


2d  platoon.  1st  platoon. 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  237 

In  line  of  battle  there  will  be  an  interval  of  one 
yard  between  the  corporal  on  the  left  of  each  sec- 
tion and  the  sergeant  on  the  right  of  next  section. 
In  column  of  platoons  the  same  interval  will  be 
observed. 

In  column  of  platoons  the  captain  will  be  habit- 
ually on  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  about  ten  yards 
outside  the  centre  of  the  column.  The  other  offi- 
cers, non-commissioned  officers,  &c.,  will  occupy  the 
positions  above  indicated. 

In  column  of  sections  the  captain  will  be  ten 
yards  ouiside  the  flank  of  the  column  on  the  side 
of  the  guide. 

The  first  lieutenant  will  be  five  yards  outside  the 
flank  of  the  column  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  and 
opposite  the  centre  of  the  interval  between  the  1st 
and  2d  sections. 

The  second  lieutenant  will  be  five  yards  outside 
the  flank  of  the  column  on  the  side  of  the  guide, 
and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  interval  between  the 
3d  and  4th  sections. 

The  sergeants  will  be  one  yard  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  their  respective  sections,  and  will  com- 
mand them.  The  corporals  will  be  in  the  rank  of 
their  respective  sections. 

The  buglers  will  accompany  the  captain,  or  will 
be  on  the  right  of  the  leading  sergeant  of  the 
column. 

In  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  file,  the  oaptain  will 
be  ten  yards  outside  the  centre  of  the  flank  of  the 
column,  on  the  side  of  the  guide. 

The  1st  lieutenant  will  be  five  yards  outside  of 


238  SKIEMISH    DRILL   FOR 

the  centre  of  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  on  the  side 
of  the  guide. 

The  2d  lieutenant  will  be  five  yards  outside  of 
the  centre  of  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  on  the  side 
of  the  guide. 

The  sergeants  (except  "the  sergeant  of  the  lead- 
ing section)  will  be  abreast  of  the  leading  four,  two, 
or  file  of  their  respective  sections,  and  on  the  side 
opposite  the  guide. 

The  sergeant  of  the  leading  section  will  be  iff 
front  of  its  leading  four. 

In  all  columns  the  brevet  2d  lieutenant,  when 
there  is  one  serving  with  the  company,  will  be  five 
yards  outside  of  the  centre  of  the  flank  of  the 
column,  and  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

The  corporal  will,  in  all  columns  of  fours,  twos, 
and  files,  be  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  abreast 
of  the  last  set,  two,  or  file.  In  columns  of  com- 
panies, platoons,  or  sections,  he  remains  in  the 
rank. 

The  company  having  been  thus  formed,  will  be 
drilled  by  the  means  and  directions  laid  down  in 
Calvary  Tactics  for  the  squadron. 

The  section  will  be  drilled  by  the  means  and 
directions  laid  down  in  Calvary  Tactics  for  the 
platoon. 

The  only  changes  necessary,  in  order  to  make  the 
one  answer  for  the  other,  are  those  which  result 
from  the  diminished  depth  of  the  rank  and  the  use 
of  the  words  "company"  and  "section,"  instead  of 
'^squadron"  and  "platoon  :" — (c.  g.) 

In  forming  to  left  into  line  from  column  of  fours, 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  239 

the  command  must  be  changed  to,  ''  By  fours  left 
wheel." 

To  mount. 

^  2. — The  command  being  dismounted  in  line  of  bnttle, 
the  men  standing  to  horse,  tu  mount,  the  commands  of 
the  chief  are : 

1.  Prepare  to  mount.  2.  Mount. 

At  the  first  command,  the  sergeant  and  numbers 
two  and  four  of  each  section  move  five  yards  to  the 
front,  stepping  off  with  the  left  foot,  and  regulating 
by  the  riglit.  The  corporals  and  numbers  one  and 
three  stand  fast  until  the  others  have  cleared  them; 
all  then  prepare  to  mount  according  to  the  princi- 
ples laid  down  in  Cavalry  Tactics,  except  tha«  they 
take  the  end  of  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  draw 
them  through  the  left,  which  holds  them  above  the 
middle  of  the  neck  of  the  horse  between  the  thumb 
and  hand,  with  the  palm  down,  until  the  horse  just 
feels  the  bit;  then  with  the  right  hand  adjust  the 
stirrup  to  the  left  foot,  and  with  the  left  hand  take 
up  a  lock  of  the  mane  so  that  its  end  comes  out  by 
the  thumb;  then  take  the  surplus  part  of  the  reins 
in  the  right  hand  between  the  thumb  and  hand, 
with  the  palm  up,  and  seize  the  right  side  of  the 
pommel  with  the  right  hand. 

At  the  second  command,  all  mount  together, 
and  the  corporals  and  numbers  one  and  three 
immediately  move  forward,  and  place  theOiselves 
boot  to  boot  with  the  sergeants  and  numbers  two 
and  four. 


240  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

t 

The  chief  corrects  the  alignment,  if  it  be  neces- 
sary, commanding  '*  Right — dress."  The  assistant 
places  himself  at  this  command  on  the  right  of  the 
line,  looking  along  it,  and  correcting  the  files  who 
are  out  of  place. 

The  chief  remains  in  front,  in  order  to  super- 
intend the  alignment.  The  assistant  commands 
"Steady,"  when  the  files  are  all  corriectly  aligned; 
and  then  the  chief  commands  "  Front." 

To  dismount. 

^  3. — The  command  being  mounted  in  line  of  battle, 
to  dismount  it  the  commands  are  : 

1.  Prepare  to  dismount.  2.  DISMOUNT. 

At  the  first  command,  the  sergeant  and  numbers 
two  and  four  in  each  section  move  to  the  front  five 
yards;  the  corporals  and  numbers  one  and  three 
stand  fast.  All  then  prepare  to  dismount  in  other 
respects  as  laid  down  in  Cavalry  Tactics,  except 
that  they  take  the  reins  in  the  left  hand  with  a  lock 
of  the  mane,  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  right 
side  of  the  pommel. 

At  the  second  command  all  dismount,  leaving  the 
reins  over  the  pommel;  the  sergeants  and  numbers 
two  and  four  stand  to  horse,  while  the  corporals  and 
numbers  one  and  three  lead  forward  and  form  rank 
with  them. 

To  link. 

To  link  after  dismounting,  the  man  stands  to 
horse,  faces  about  to  the  rear,  takes  the  link  which 


MOUNTED   BIFLES.  241 

hangs  from  the  halter  ring  of  the  horse  of  his  left 
file  in  his  right  hand,  seizes  his  own  horse  by  the 
bit  near  the  mouth,  and  draws  the  horse  of  his  lefi 
file  towards  his  own  until  he  can  hook  the  snap 
into  the  curb  ring;  in  hooking,  the  nails  of  his 
right  hand  are  down. 

When  he  dismounts  he  leaves  his  reins  over  the 
pommel  of  the  saddle. 

To  facilitate  the  linking,  the  horse  holder  should 
bear  his  horse's  head  well  towards  number  three. 

^4. — Form  and  course  of  inspection  for  the  single 
rank  formation:  The  company  being  formed  in  line,  in 
one  rank,  mounted,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned 
officers,  in  their  places,  (see  section  1,)  to  inspect  it — 
the  commands  are : 

1.  For  inspection. — Prepare  to  dismount. 

2.  Dismount. 

At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  second  lieu- 
tenants move  forward  ten  yards.  The  brevet  second 
lieutenant  places  himself  upon  the  line  with  them, 
in  front  of  the  left  file  of  the  company;  they  all 
then  return  sabre  and  prepare  to  dismount. 

The  non-commissioned  ofiicers  move  forward  ten 
yards,  and  prepare  to  dismount. 

Numbers  two  and  four  move  forward  five  yards, 
and  prepare  to  dismount. 

Numbers  one  and  three  prepare  to  dismount  in 
their  places. 

At  the  second  command,  all  dismount  and  stand 
to  horse.  They  then  shift  the  pistol  holster  to- 
wards the  front  of  the  body  sufficiently  to  enable 
21 


242  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

the  inspecting  officer  readily  to  withdraw  the  pistol. 
The  men  then  unsling  rifles,  order  arnis,  and  spring 
rammers  without  noise,  with  the  right  arm  passed 
through  the  rein;  they  then  allow  the  rifle  to  fall 
across  the  body  obliquely  into  the  hollow  of  the 
left  arm,  which  holds  it  with  the  fore-arm  extended 
down,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb  and  closed 
fingers.  In  this  position  they  await  the  inspec- 
tion. 

As  soon  as  the  inspecting  officer  perceives  that 
the  second  command  has  been  executed,  he  leturns 
his  sabre,  dismounts,  gives  his  horse  to  a  trum- 
peter to  hold,  ancf  commences  his  inspection  on  the 
right  of  the  line  of  officers.  He  passes  along  the 
front  of  the  line,  around  its  left,  and  along  its  rear; 
he  then  passes  to  the  front  of  the  line  of  non- 
commissioned officers,  which  he  inspects  in  the 
same  manner.  He  draws  and  inspects  the  pistol 
of  each  man  as  he  comes  to  him,  and,  after  inspect- 
ing, returns  it  to  the  holster.  He  then  passes  to 
the  right  of  the  front  line  of  men,  draws  and  in- 
spects the  pistol  of  the  man  on  the  right  of  that 
line,  returns  it  to  the  holster,  takes  the  rifle  from 
the  position  in  which  it  rests,  and,  after  inspecting, 
returns  it  to  that  position ;  and  so  on  throughout 
the  line.  Each  man  slings  his  rifle  and  re-adjusts 
his  pistol,  as  soon  as  the  inspector  has  passed  one 
file  beyond  him.  After  having  completed  his  in- 
spection of  the  men,  horses,  arms,  equipments,  &c., 
from  the  front,  the  officer  passes  around  the  left 
and  along  the  rear  of  the  line,  examining  as  he 
goes  the  condition  of  men,  horses,  arms,  and  equip- 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  243 

ments.     He  then  inspects  the  rear  line  of  men  in 
the  same  manner. 

After  which  he  mounts,  and  commands : 

1.  Prepare  to  mount.  4.  Right. — Dress. 

2.  Mount.  5.  Front. 

3.  Form  rank. 

At  the  first  command  all  prepare  to  mount  in 
their  places.  At  the  second  command  all  mount, 
and  the  rear  line  of  men  move  forward  to  their 
places,  boot  to  boot  with  the  front  line  of  men.  All 
then  move  forward  together  to  the  line  of  non-com- 
missioned officers,  on  which  they  are  alijjned  by  the 
fourth  and  fifth  commands. 

The  sabres  are  then  inspected,  as  directed  in  Cavalry 
Tactics,  bj  the  command : 

•1.  Inspection  of  sabre. 

If  the  company  be  in  tents  or  other  quarters, 
the  valises  or  saddle  bags  and  clothing  are  inspected 
in  the  quarters. 

If  in  the  field,  the  men  will  unstrap  and  display 
them  on  the  ground  at  their  feet,  as  they  stand  to 
horse,  before  they  unsling  rifles. 

The  trumpeters  will  be  near  and  in  rear  of  the 
inspecting  officer  when  he  gives  the  fir.«t  command. 
They  will  dismount  with  the  rest.  One  of  them 
holds  the  horse  of  the  other,  who  goes  to  take  that 
of  the  inspector. 


244  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

ARTICLE  II. 

Skirmish  drill  for  mounted  rifles. 

§  5.  Preliminary  remarks. 

For  this  drill  the  men  should  be  dressed  so  as  to 
secure  the  greatest  freedom  of  action,  as  in  the 
blouse  or  sack,  and  in  the  forage  cap,  with  the  chin- 
strap  down.  The  revolver  will  be  worn  in  a  belt- 
holster  upon  the  right  side  of  the  man.  The  gun 
will  be  slung  across  his  back,  with  the  butt  near  his 
right  hip.  In  addition  to  the  usual  equipment  of  a 
cavalry  soldier,  each  man  will  be  provided  with  a 
*Mink,"  for  the  purpose  of  securing  his  horse  when- 
ever he  dismounts.  It  will  be  buckled  in  the 
halter-ring  of  the  headstall,  and  when  not  wanted 
for  immediate  use,  will  be  hooked  up  by  the  snap 
in  the  same  ring. 

At  the  signal  "  boot  and  saddle,"  the  horses  will 
be  saddled  and  bridled. 

At  the  signal  "to  horse,"  the  command  will  be 
formed  according  to  the  instructions  already  given 
in  section  2. 

Should  the  command  be  less  than  a  complete 
company,  the  officer  in  charge  of  it  will  make  such 
changes  in  its  organization  as  are  necessary  in  con- 
sequence of  the  absence  of  members. 

Every  command,  be  it  a  full  company  or  a  scout- 
ing party  less  than  a  company,  will  be  divided  into 
four  equal  sections  if  possible. 

A  section  must  contain  at  least  eight  men. 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  245 

Some  portion  of  every  command  will  be  held  in 
reserve,  unless  it  is  so  small  as  to  manifestly  render 
it  unwise  to  divide  it.  Any  section  may  form  the 
reserve;  and  its  commander  will  be  assigned  by 
selection  and  not  according  to  rank. 

A  "set  of  four"  means  the  four  men  who  tell 
ofiF  together. 

A  *'  chief  of  four  *'  is  the  right  file  of  the  set,  or 
"  number  one "  of  the  set,  and  will  be  habitually 
the  guide  of  his  set;  when  in  column  of  fours,  he 
will  command  the  set  to  which  he  belongs. 

He  will  be  responsible  that  the  men  of  his  set 
jiever  separate  from  each  other,  and  for  the  interval, 
distance,  and  alignment. 

The  senior  officer  on  drill  is  termed  the  "  Chief," 
his  next  in  rank  is  termed  the  "Assistant." 

Before  skirmishing,  two  or  three  men  will  bo 
detained  to  accompany  and  protect  the  Chief. 

Preparatory  to  skirmishing,  a  section  will  take 
open  order. 

The  interval  between  men  in  open  order,  mea-  * 
sured  from  "  boot  to  boot,"  is  twenty-seven  inches. 

In  a  column  of  fours,  open  order,  the  distance  be- 
tween the  sets  of  four,  from  croup  to  head,  is  4  yards. 

In  a  column  of  twos,  open  order,  the  distance 
from  croup  to  head  is  eighteen  inches. 

In  a  column  "by  file,"  open  order,  the  distance 
from  croup  to  head  is  eighteen  inches. 

These  distances  and  interval  are  deduced  from 
the  length  and  breadth  of  the  horse,  and  from  the 
agreement  which  must  exist  between  the  depth  of 
a  column)  and  the  length  of  the  line  into  which  it 
will  wheel. 


246  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

The  interval  of  twenty-seven  inches  will  be 
found  in  practice  ample  to  enable  the  men  to  mount 
and  dismount  in  their  places  in  line  or  in  column, 
without  the  necessity  of  the  alternate  files  moving 
out  to  the  front  for  that  purpose. 

In  an  enemy's  country,  or  when  in  danger  of 
sudden  attack  or  ambuscade,  the  leading  section 
of  the  company  or  scouting  party  should  march 
in  open  order,  so  as  to  be  able  to  get  jit  once  into 
action. 

To  take  open  order. 

I  6.     Being  in  line,  right  in  front,  the  commands  of 
the  Chief  are : 
« 

1 .  1st  section,  (or  2d  or  Sd,  as  the  case  may  he,") 
open  order — Gallop. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command  all  gather  their  horses;  at 
the  second  command  all  take  the  gallop,  except  the 
centre  file  of  the  section,  which  trots  out  directly 
to  the  front.  Those  on  the  right  of  the  centre 
oblique  to  the  right,  each  man  continuing  to  ob- 
lique until  he  has  an  interval  of  twenty-seven 
inches  between  him  and  the  next  file  on  his  left; 
those  on  the  left  of  the  centre  continue  to  oblique 
to  the  left  until  each  man  has  twenty-seven  inches 
interval  between  him  and  the  next  file  on  his  right. 
They  all  then  align  themselves  on  the  centre,  take 
up  its  gait,  and  continue  to  move  to  the  front  until 
the  next  command  of  the  Chief. 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  247 


To  rjeturn  to  close  order. 

Being  in  line,  right  in  front,  in  open  order,  the  com- 
mands of  the  Chief  are : 

1.   Close  order — Trot.  2.  March.  ' 

At  th-e  first  command  all  gather  their  horses ;  at 
the  second  command  the  centre  file  moves  to  the 
front  at  the  ^alk,  the  others  close  in  towards  him 
at  the  trot;  each  in  succession  taking  up  the  walk 
and  aliizning  on  the  centre  as  he  gains  his  positioa 
in  the  line. 

\  7.  The  section  being  in  line,  right  in  front,  open  or- 
der, breaks  into  columns  of  fours,  by  the  commands : 

1.  Bi/  fours — Trot,  (or  Gallop.)       2.  March. 

At  the  first  command  the  first  set  of  four  gathers 
its  horses,  and  takes  the  trot  together  at  the  second. 
After  the  first  set  has  cleared  the  front  of  the  line, 
or  marched  three  yards,  the  second  set  moves  out 
at  the  trot,  (or  gallop,)  marches  straight  to  the 
front  until  clear  of  the  line,  and  then  obliques  to 
the  right  until  in  position  in  column  exactly  be- 
hind the  first  set,  and  at  four  yards  distance  from 
it,  when  it  marches  to  the  front  to  take  its  place  ia 
column.  The  third  set  follows  the  second,  and  so 
on  throughout  the  section,  according  to  the  forego- 
ing directions. 

Care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  losing  distance  in 
this  movement.     The  sets  of  four  must  move  out 


248  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

promptly  in  turn,  and  oblique  together.  The  Chief 
commands  "Guide  right"  when  the  first  set  is  out. 

A  column  of  "twos"  and  "file"  may  be  formed 
on  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  means,  ex- 
cept that  the  distance  in  these  cases  is  only  eighteen 
inches  from  head  to  croup. 

In  all  formations  of  this  drill,  the  same  princi- 
ples will  be  observed  in  regard  to  increasing  the 
gait  as  are  now  established  in  Cavalry  Tactics. 

When  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  file,  the  va- 
rious methods  of  forming  into  line  (front,  right,  or 
left,)  can  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means 
laid  down  in  Cavalry  Tactics  for  the  platoon. 

Observe :  that  as  there  is  no  rear  rank,  linos  can 
be  formed  at  once  on  either  flank  by  wheeling  by 
fours  to  the  right  or  left.  When  the  right  of  the 
column  is  in  front,  and  the, wheel  is  made  by  fours 
to  the  right,  the  sets  will  be  in  line  by  inversion. 
The  men  of  each  set  will  not  be  inverted. 

When  the  men  are  not  well  instructed  in  the 
drill,  the  deployments  from  close  order  into  opea 
order,  and  from  open  order  into  skirmishing  order, 
should  be  made  at  the  walk  or  trot.  Habitually 
they  should  be  executed  at  the  gallop ;  and  in  ac- 
tion, with  the  greatest  possible  celerity  compatible 
with  steadiness. 

In  deploying,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned 
officers  will  fall  to  the  rear  of  the  line  in  order  to 
superintend  the  movement. 

Every  movement  not  fully  described  in  the  fol- 
lowing pages  will  be  understood  to  be  executed  aa 
is  now  ordered,  in  the  system  already  in  use. 


MOUNTED  RIFLES.  249 

2  8.  To  form  column  of  twos,  open  order,  from  col- 
umn by  file,  marching  at  the  walk,  right  in  front,  the 
commands  are : 

1.  Form  twos,  open  order — Trot.  2.  Marcbt. 

At  the  second  command  numbers  two  and  four, 
oblique  to  the  left  at  the  trot,  and  move  to  the 
front  when  in  rear  of  their  places  in  columns  of 
twos,  until  in  line  with  their  respective  ones  and 
threes.  The  leading  set  of  twos  then  being  at  the 
walk,  all  the  others  close  up  at  the  trot  to  their 
places,  with  distance  of  eighteen  inches,  and  inter- 
Tal  from  boot  to  boot  of  twenty-seven  inches. 

\  9.  To  form  column  of  fours,  open  order,  from  col- 
nmn  by  file,  when  marchiDg  at  the  walk,  right  in  front, 
the  commands  are : 

1.  Form  foursj  open  order — Trot.         2.  March* 

At  the  first  command  number  one  of  each  set 
continues  to  march  at  the  walk  to  the  front ;  twos, 
threes,  and  fours  of  every  set  oblique  to  the  left  at 
the  trot,  each  moving  to  the  front  when  in  rear  of 
the  place  he  will  occupy  in  his  set  of  four ;  when 
they  have  gained  their  places  in  line  with  numbers 
one,  the  leading  set  being  at  the  walk,  the  others 
take  up  the  trot,  which  they  keep  until  each  has 
arrived  at  the  distance  of  four  yards  from  the  one 
preceding  it;  each  in  turn  then  takes  up  the  walk. 
The  Chief  commands  *^  Guide  right"  when  the  first 
set  is  formed. 

2  10.  To  form  column  of  fours,  epen  order,  from  col- 
umn of  twos,  open  order,  when  marching  at  the  walk, 
with  right  in  front,  the  commands  are: 


250  ,  SKIRMISH  DRILL  FOR 

J.  Form  fours — Trot.  2.  March. 

At  the  second  command  threes  and  fours  obliqua 
to  the  left  at  the  trot,  until  opposite  their  places  in 
the  sets  of  four,  when  they  move  to  the  front,  taking 
up  the  walk  when  in  line  with  ones  and  twos.  The 
Chief  commands  *' Guide  right"  when  the  move- 
pient  is  completed.  Oaes  and  -twos  preserve  the 
walk  and  direction  during  the  movement ;  and  after 
the  other  files  have  moved  out,  must  take  care  noi 
to  diminish  the  distance  left  by  them.  If  the 
column  is  trotting  when  the  movement  is  ordered, 
it  will  be  executed  at  the  gallop. 

^11.  To  break  from  column  of  fours  into  column  o^ 
tvros,  open  or  close  ofder,  marching  at  the  walk,  with 
right  in  front,  the  commands  are  : 

1.  By  twos.  2.  March. 

At  the  second  command  numbers  three  and  four 
halt  until  numbers  one  and  two  have  cleared  them, 
when  they  oblique  to  the  right,  promptly,  in  to  their 
places  in  column  of  twps.  The  Chief  commands 
*' Guide  right''  as  soon  as  the  movement  is  com- 
pleted. 

^♦§  12.  To  break  a  column  of  twos,  in  open  or  in  close 
order,  into  column  by  file,  when  marching  at  the  walk, 
,  right  in  front,  the  commands  are : 

« 

1.  Bi/  file—TROT.  2.  March. 

At  the  second  command  number  one  of  the 
leading   set  takes  the  trot.     As   soon  as   he  has 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  251 

cleared  number  two  of  the  first  set,  number  two 
obliques  to  the  right  at  the  trot,  and  enters  the 
column  behind  number  one.  Number  three  then 
moves  in  his  place  in  column  at  the  trot,  followed 
by  number  four,  who,  by  obliquing  at  the  trot^ 
takes  his  place  in  rear  of  number  three;  and.so  on 
throughout  the  column,  each  even-numbered  file 
obliquing  at  the  trot  as  soon  as  the  odd-numbered 
file  on  his  right  has  cleared  him.  The  files  must 
move  very  promptly  and  exactly  in  their  proper 
time,  so  as  not  to  lose  distance  in  this  movement. 

Being  in  column  of  twos,  wheels  to  the  left  may 
be  executed  when  the  right  is  in  front;  or  to  the 
right  with  the  left  in  front,  but  not  the  reverse  of 
theie,  for  then  the  twos  would  be  inverted  in  theii: 
respective  fours,  and  confusion  would  result  on  ac- 
count of  the  change  in  position  of  the  horse  holder. 

§  13.  To  deploy  forward  as  skirmishers,  from  a  line, 
right  in  front,  halted,  or  marching  at  any  gait,  the  com- 
mands are  : 

1.  On  (such)  set — Deploy  as  s7drmishcrs-r- 
Gallop. 

2.  March. 

At  the  second  command  all  take  the  gallop  except 
the  designated  set,  which  trots  out  to  the  front. 
Those  on  the  right  and  left  of  it  oblique  at  tl^e 
gallop  to  the  right  and  left,  each  set  taking  up  the 
trot  when  on  line  with  the  directing  set,  and  at 
fifteen  yards  from  the  nearest  file  of  the  next  set  on 
the  side  of  direction. 

In  this  movement  the  chiefs  of  four  will  be  held 


252  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

responsible  for  the  direction  and  interval  and  align- 
ment of  the  men  of  their  respective  sets,  and  will 
Bee  that  the  sets  are  at  proper  intervals  from  each 
other.  The  Chief  will  halt  the  line  when  it  has 
reached  the  point  where  it  has  to  act.  " 

The  following  movements  will  enable  cavalry, 
when  on  a  march,  to  get  into  action  with  the  least 
possible  delay,  in  case  of  an  attack  when  passing  a 
defile  or  of  any  other  ambuscade. 

It  is  understood  that  always,  when  dismounted 
to  fight,  the  horse-holders  remain  mounted,  unless 
otherwise  ordered. 

In  all  the  manoeuvres  of  this  article  the  com- 
mands numbered  "  1 ''  are  cautionary. 

ARTICLE  III. 

§  14.  To  dismount  to  fight  when  in  column  of  fours, 
open  order,  right  in  front,  halted  or  marching  at  any 
gait,  to  meet  an  enemy  on  the  left  and  front,  the  com- 
mands are : 

1.  Dismount  to  fight. 

2.  Action  front  and  left. 

3.  Commence  firing. 

At  the  first  command  all  halt,  spring  to  the 
ground,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one 
yard  to  the  front.  At  the  second  command  the 
first  set  moves  forward  four  yards,  and  at  the  third 
command  commences  firing.  The' other  sets  move 
at  the  double  quick  obliquely  to  the  left,  and  take 
their  places  on  the  line  with  the  first  set.  Each 
set,  as  soon  as  it  arrives  upon  the  line,  commences 
firing. 


MOUNTED  lllFLES.      .  253 

In  case  it  is  desired  to  form  the  line  towards  the 
right  of  the  head  of  the  column,  the. commands  are: 
1.  Dismount  to  jight ;  2.  Action  front  and  riglit  } 
3.  Commence  firing.  '  All'  the  s\3ts  except  the  first 
will  then  gain  their  placeii  in  the  lii^e  by  obliquing 
to  the  right.  The  ^ets-  will  be  in  line  by  inversion. 
The  men  in  each  se|i  ^ill  be  in  direct  order. 

\        '  v..        V 

§  15.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  open  order,  right  in 
front,  marching  al  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  an  attack 
on  left  of  rear,  the  commands  are : 

1.  Dismount  to  fight. 

2.  Action  rear  and  left. 

3.  Commence  firing. 

At  the  first  command  all  halt,  spring  to  the 
ground,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one 
Jjird  to  the  front.  At  the  second  command  the 
men  of  the  rear  set  face  to  the  right,  and,  led  by 
their  chief,  file  to  the  right  around  the  rear  set  of 
horses  to  a  line  five  yards  in  rear  of  their  croups. 

At  the  second  command  all  the  other  sets  face 
to  the  left,  and  move  at  the  double-quick.  Each 
pian  as  he  clears  the  column  moves  obliquely  to  the 
left  and  rear^to  his  place  on  the  line  with  the  rear 
set. 

If  it  be  desired  to  get  at  once  into  action,  the 
Chief  commands  "Commence firing''  as  soon  as  the 
Ifet  first  on  the  line  is  established.  This  set  then 
commences  the  fire;  and  each  of  the  others  takes 
it  up  in  succession  as  it  arrives  upon  the  line ;  and 
in- all  of  the  following  movements  the  same  rule 
will  be  observed. 
22 


254  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

{  IG.  Being  in  column  of  four?,  open  order,  right  in 
front,  marching  at  any  gait,  or  haltiMl,  to  meet  an  attack 
from  the  right  of  the  column,  the  commands  are: 

1.  Dismount  to  fight. 

2.  Action  riyht. 

At  the  first  command  all  halt,  spring  to  the 
ground,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one 
yard  to  the  front.  At  the  second  command  all 
move  briskly  upon  a  line  five  yards  outside  the  right 
flank  of  the  column,  where  they  take  theii*  places, 
in  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  right.  The  sets  will 
be  in  order  by  inversion  ;  but  the  men  in  each  set 
will  be  in  direct  order,  the  chief  being  on  the  right. 
From  this  position  they  may  be  deployed  forward 
as  skirmishers,  if  it  be  desired. 

2  17.  When  in  column  of  fours,  open  order,  right  in 
front,  halted  or  marching,  to  meet  an  attack  from  the 
left,  the  commands  are : 

1.  Dismount  to  fiyht. 

2.  Action  left. 

At  the  first  command  all  halt,  spring  to  the 
ground,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one 
yard  to  the  front.  At  the  second  command  all 
move  briskly  to  the  left,  and  place  themselves  on  a 
line  five  yards  outside  the  left  flank  of  the  column, 
facing  to  the  left  of  it,  and  in  their  proper  places 
in  line  of  battle.  From  this  position  they  may  bo 
deployed  forward  as  skirmishers,  if  desired. 

§  18,  Being  in  column  of  twos,  with  right  in  front, 
marching  at  «iny  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  an  enemy  on 
left  of  front,  the  commands  are  : 


MOUNTED  RIFLES.  255 

1.  By  twos,  left  wheel — MARCH. 

2.  Dismount  to  Jight. 

3.  Action  front  and  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  twos  wheel  to  the  left 
and  halt.  At  the  second  command  all  dismount, 
link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one  yard  to  the 
front.  At  the  third  command  the  leading  set  moves 
to  a  line  five  yards  to  the  right  of  the  right  flank, 
as  now  formed,  and  facing  in  that  direction.  The 
others  move  obliquely  to  their  right  and  front,  at 
the  double  quick,  and  take  their  places  on  line  with 
the  first. 

If  it  be  desired  to  form  the  line  towards  the  right  of 
the  head  of  the  column,  the  commands  are  : 

1.  By  twos,  left  wheel — March. 

2.  Dismount  to  jight. 

3.  Action  front  and  right. 

Each  of  the  sets  in  rear  of  the  leading  set  will 
then  gain  its  place  in  the  line  by  passing  through 
the  interval  on  the  right  of  its  set  of  horses,  and 
moving  obliquely  to  the  right  and  front,  to  its  place 
in  line  with  the  leading  set.  The  sets  will  be  in 
line  by  inversion. 

•  ^  19.  Being  in  column  of  twos,  right  in  front,  march- 
ing at  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  an  enemy  in  rear,  the 
commands  are: 

1.  By  twos,  left  wheel — MarCH. 

2.  Dismount  to  fight. 

3.  Action  rear  and  left. 


256  SKIRMISH    DRILL   FOR 

At  the  first  command  all  wheel  by  twos  into  line 
to  the  left,  and  halt.  At  the  second  command  all 
dismount,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  step  one  yard 
to  the  front,  and  await  the  next  command.  At  the 
third  { cm  uand  the  rear  set  faces  to  the  left,  and 
moves  at  the  double-quick  to  its  place  on  a  line  five 
yards  to  the  left  of  the  left  flank,  as  now  formed, 
and  facing  in  that  direction.  The  other  sets  face 
obliquely  to  the  left,  and  move  off'  at  the  double- 
quick  to  their  places  in  the  line  with  the  rear  set. 

If  it  be  desired  to  form  the  line  to  the  right  in- 
stead of  the  left,  the  first  two  commands  are  the 
same  as  in  the  other  case;  the  third  command  is, 
"Action  rear  and  right;"  at  which  the  rear 
set  takes  its  place  on  tlie  line  as  before,  and 
the  others  pass  through  the  intervals  to  the  left  of 
their  sets  of  horses,  respectively,  and  take  their 
places  in  succession  on  the  left  of  the  set  first  es- 
tablished. The  sets  will  then  be  in  line  by  inver- 
sion. 

g  20.  Being  in  column  of  twos,  marching  at  any  gait, 
or  halted,  with  right  in  front,  to  dismount  to  fight,  in 
order  to  meet  an  enemy  on  the  right  flank,  the  com- 
mands are : 

1.  Bt/  twos,  left  wheel — March. 

2.  Dismount  to  fight — Action  right. 

At  the  first  command  the  twos  wheel  into  line  to 
the  left  and  halt.  At  the  second  command  all  dis- 
mount and  link.  In  linkinp:,  the  men  remain  faced 
to  the  front,  and  take  the  link  to  the  left  hand,  and 
the  bit  in  the  right.     After  linking  they  face  about, 


MOUNTED  RIFLES.  257 

unsling  rifles,  and  take  their  places  in  a  line  five 
yards  outside  the  croups  of  the  horses.  The  cau- 
tionary words  "ACTION  right"  should  be  uttered 
imraediately  after  " dismount  to  fight" 

The  method  of  linking  is  changed  in  this  instance 
to  avoid  the  inconvenience  which  might  result  from 
the  men  having  to  stoop  under  the  links,  after  link- 
ing, in  order  to  pass  to  their  position  in  r^ear  of  the 
horses. 

§  21.  Being  in  column  of  twos,  right  in  front,  march- 
ing at  any  gait,  or  baited,  to  dismount  to  fight,  to  meet 
an  enemy  on  the  left,  the  commands  are: 

1.  By  twos,  left  wheel — MARCH. 

2.  Dismount  to  fight. 

At  the  first  command  wheel  by  twos  into  line  to 
the  left  and  halt  j  at  the  SQCond  command  all  dis- 
mount, link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  step  five  yards  to 
the  front  and  stand  fast. 

In  case  it  should  be  desired  in  any  of  the  pre- 
ceding manoeuvres  to  form  the  line  in  an  oblique 
direction,  the  commands  would  be  the  same;  but  the 
set  first  in  the  line  would  be  placed  in  the  desired 
direction;  and  the  others  would  conform  to  it.  The 
chief  will  judge  from  the  circumstances  which  of 
the  manoeuvres  to  adopt — whether  the  flank,  the 
front,  or  the  rear. 

In  all  the  cases  of  this  article  the  command 
"Commence  firing"  will  be  the  signal  for  the  set 
first  on  the  line  to  open  fire.  The  other  sets,  if  not 
on  the  line  when  it  is  given,  will  commence  firing 
as  soon  as  practicable  after  they  arrive  on  the  line. 


^?K 


258  SKIRMISH  DRILL   FOR 

ARTICLE  IV. 

1  22.  To  deploy  as  skirmishers,  when  dismounted,  the 
command  is  ;  * 

1.    On  (such)  set  Deploy — FORWARD. 

At  this  command  the  section  springs  forward  at     ^ 
the  double-quick.     The  sets  on  the  right, ofr. the  di-. 
recting  set  move  obliquely  towards  the  right  until 
opposite  their  places  in   line  of  battle,  when  they 
move  to  the  front,  aligning  by  the  left. 

The  sets  on  the  left  of  the  directing  set  move 
obliquely  towards  the  left  until  opposite  their  places 
in  line  of  battle,  when  they  move  to  the  front, 
aligning  by  the  right.  All  move  forward  until 
halted  by  the  chief. 

When  in  proper  position  in  line  of  battle,  thus 
deployed,  there  will  be.  fifteen  yards  between  sets 
and  three  feet  between  files  in  each  set. 

The  firing  will  commence  at  the  command  of  the 
chief. 

If  it  be  desired  to  deploy  on  the  line  already 
occupied,  the  command  will  be  *'  On  (^such)  set — 
Deploy." 

The  directing  set  stands  fast ;  the  sets  to  the  right 
and  left  of  it  face  to  the  right  and  left,  respectively, 
and  move  at  the  double-quick  to  take  their  inter- 
vals ;  then  face  to  the  front,  and  align  themselves 
on  the  directing  set. 

2  23.  To  deploy  as  skirmishers,  mounted,  from  a  column 
of  fours,  right  in  front,  the  commands  are: 

1.    On  (such)  set — Deploy — Gallop,       2.  March. 


MOUNTED  RIFLES.  259 

At  the  second  command  the  directing  set  trota 
out  to  the  front ;  those  in  front  of  it  oblique  to  the 
right  at  the  gallop ;  those  in  rear  to  the  left  at  the 
gallop;  and  all  take  trot  when  they  have  gained 
their  intervals  of  fifteen  yards,  aligning  themselves 
by  the  directing  set.  The  chief  will  halt  the  line 
when  it  has  arrived  where  it  is  to  act.  ,  ,.. 

To  assemble  the  skirmishers  into  line  or  column 
again,  the  chief  will  place  himself  at,  or  otherwise 
indicate,  the  point  at  which  the  directing  set  is  to 
rest,  and  have  the  rally  sounded.  At  this  signal  the 
sets  will  close  in  at  the  gallop  upon  the  indicated 
point  and  take  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

When  the  line  is  formed,  it  will  be  broken  into 
column,  in  order  to  advance  or  retire  as  may  be 
necessary. 

§  24.  Having  been  thus  deployed  into  line  for  skir- 
mishing, to  commence  action,  the  commands  are : 

1.  Dismount  to  fight.         3.  Halt. 

2.  Forward.  4.  Commence  firing. 

At  the  first  command,  all,  except  the  horse- 
holders,  dismount,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  step 
one  pace  to  the  front,  and  await  the  next  order. 
At  the  second  command,  the  line  moves  forward  at 
the  double-quick  until  halted.  At  the  fourth  com- 
mand, the  right  file  of  each  set  delivers  his  fire,  and 
he  is  followed  in  succession  by  the  other  two. 

The  chief  of  four  will  take  care  that  there  is 
always  one  gun  loaded ^in  his  set;  this  will  never 
be  neglected,  whether  in  advancing  or  retreating. 
The  files  of  each  set  must  depend  upon  each  other 


260  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

for  support  and  assistance ;  they  must  never  sepa- 
rate; every  kind  of  cover  must  be  seized  and  occu- 
pied by  the  skirmishers ;  each  chief  of  four  must 
be  alert  to  perceive  such  advantages  for  his  set, 
taking  care,  however,  that  in  attempting  to  secure 
them  he  does  not  separate  too  far  from  the  other 
sets  of  the  line  to  receive  or  give  support  when 
necessary. 

The  horses  will  be  habitually  kept  at  about  one 
hundred  yards  in  rear  of  their  riders,  although  they 
should  be  nearer,  when  they  can  find  shelter  from 
fire  which  will  admit  of  it.  Fifty  yards  will  be  far 
enough  when  the  enemy  does  not  use  fire  arms. 

They  will  be  under  charge  of  a  non-commissioned 
ofiicer;  and  when  it  is  desired  to  re-mount  rapidly, 
should  be  advanced  to  meet  their  riders.  The  re- 
serve will  be  kept  mounted  and  where  it  can  best 
protect  the  horses  of  the  dismounted  men  and  get 
into  action  best. 

The  deployed  line  will  be  manoeuvred  by  the 
commands,  signals,  and  means  provided  in  the 
Cavalry  Tactics. 

If  it  be  desired  to  fight  mounted,  the  chief  will 
command  the  charge.  The  men  will  then  draw 
sabre  or  pistol  and  cl^rge. 

^  25.  The  section  being  in  column  of  fours,  open  order, 
right  in  front,  and  at  the  walk,  to  take  close  order,  the 
commands  are: 

1.   Close  order — Trot.  2.  March. 

At  this  command,  number  one  of  the  leading 
set  marches  to  the  front  at  the  walk.     The  other 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  261 

• 

men  of  his  set  closing  upon  him  at  the  trot  until 
each  has  p;ained  his  place  in  the  set  of  four  in  close 
order.  The  set  then  walks.  The  other  sets  close 
at  the  trot  in  the  same  manner,  each  walking  when 
it  has  closed  to  eighteen  inches  from  that  in  its 
front. 

g  26.  The  section  being  in  columns  of  twos,  right  in 
front,  open  order,  to  take  close  order,  the  commands 
are: 

1.  Close  order,  2.  March. 

At  this  command,  numbers  two  and  four  incline 
to  the  right,  slightly  quickening  the  gait  and  place 
themselves  boot  to  boot  with  numbers  one  and 
three. 

§  27.  To  form  column  of  fours,  in  close  order,  when 
marching  in  column  of  file  at  the  walk,  with  right  in 
front,  the  commands  are: 

1.  Form  fours.  2.   Trot — March. 

At  the  second  command,  number  one  of  the  lead- 
ing set  contioues  to  march  to  the  front  at  the  walk. 
All  the  others  oblique  to  the  left  at  the  trot ;  each 
man  marching  to  the  front  when  in  rear  of  his  place 
in  his  set  of  fours  in  close  order,  and  aligning  by 
number  one  of  his  set.  All  of  the  sets  (except  the 
leading  set)  continue  the  trot  until  they  have  closed 
up  to  within  eighteen  inches  of  each  other,  and  then 
take  the  walk. 


262  SKIRMISH    DRILL   FOR 

ARTICLE  V. 

I  28.  To  sling  rifles,  from  carry  arms,  the  command  is : 

1.   tSlhig  rijlt's. 

At  this  command,  raise  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  a  little  higher  than  the  hip,  inclining  the 
barrel  over  the  rightr  shoulder,  and  in  rear  of  the 
head;  at  the  same  time,  with  the  left  hand  near 
the  right  shoulder,  move  the  sling  out  from  the 
barrel,  thrust  the  head,  right  shoulder  and  right 
arm  through  the  opening ;  let  the  piece  full  into 
its  position,  steadying  it  with  the  right  hand,  and 
drop  the  hands  by  the  side. 

To  unsling  rifles,  the  command  is : 
1.    Unsling  rijies. 

At  this  command,  pass  the  right  hand  through 
the  opening  between  the  sling  and  piece  near  the 
right  hip,  bear  the  piece  towards  the  front  with  the 
right  arm,  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  as  in  carry 
arms,  and  raise  it  a  little  above  the  right  hip ;  at 
the  same  time,  with  the  left  hand,  free  the  sling 
from  the  bead,  and  lower  the  piece  to  the  position 
of  carry  arras. 

§  29.  All  of  the  movements  described  herein  are 
supposed  to  be  executed  when  the  right  is  in  front. 
It  will  be  understood  that  they  can  all  be  executed 
when  the  left  is  in  front  upon  the  same  principles 
by  inverse  means. 


MOUNTED    RIFLES.  263 

The  men  should  always,  after  dismounting,  leave 
their  reins  over  the  pommel  of  the  saddle. 

When  more  than  two  full  companies  are  serving 
together,  and  their  front  in  single  rank  would  be 
unduly  extended,  all  lines  should  be.  formed  of 
companies  in  column  of  platoons  at  wh'eeling  dis- 
tance. 

As  far  as  possible,  the  composition  of  the  different 
sets  will  remain  unchanged,  and  every  thing  should 
be  done  which  will  promote  the  mutual  dependence 
of  the  men  of  each  set  on  each  other. 

They  .>-hould  act  together  as  much  as  possible  on 
all  kinds  of  duty,  as  well  in  the  fatigue  duties  of 
the  camp  or  garrison  as  when  on  drill  or  in  action. 

All  details  should  be  made,  as  much  as  practica- 
ble, of  sets  of  four,  rather  than  of  individuals  from 
different  sets ;  and  the  chief  of  four  should  be 
always  in  command  of  his  set,  and  invested  with 
the  authority  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  over  it. 
He  must  see  that  his  men  stand  by  each  other  in 
action,  and  whether  in  the  charge,  in  pursuit,  or  in 
retreat,  that  they  never  separate.  After  the  men 
and  horses  are  familiar  with  the  drill,  all  of  its 
movements  should  be  executed  at  the  gallop. 

The  men  should  be  made  to  saddle  up  with  the 
greatest  possible  dispatch  whenever  the  "  boot  and 
saddle"  sounds. 

Always  before  using  their  guns,  the  men  must 
dismount. 

In  order  to  avoid  fretting  their  horses,  the  men 
should  be  at  least  five  yards  from  them  before  they 
commence  firing. 

When  the  men  are  in  action  on  foot,  they  should 


264  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

be  manoeuvred  with  due  reference  to  the  safety  of 
their  horses. 

While  the  horses  should  be  so  far  in  rear  of  the 
men  as  to  be  out  of  the  range  of  the  enemy's  fire, 
they  should  not  be  so  far  that  their  riders  cannot 
reach  them  before  the  enemy,  if  an  attempt  should 
be  made  to  capture  or  stampede  them.  Generally, 
in  open  ground,  one  hundred  yards  will  be  about 
the  maximum  distance.  They  should  be  nearer,  if 
they  can  be  safe  from  fire. 

One  of  the  non-commissioned  officers  of  each  sec- 
tion should  be  left  in  charge  of  its  horses  when  the 
men  dismount  to  fight,  and  he  will  be  held  responsi- 
ble for  their  security  and  proper  management.  The 
other  will  dismount  with  his  section,^  linking  his 
horse  to  that  of  the  nearest  number  one. 

In  this  drill,  inversions  of  platoons^  of  sections, 
and  of  sets  of  four'shoufd  be  freq'iiently  practiced, 
but  the  individual  ineri'  of  the  sets  should  never, 
either  when  mounted  ot  on  foot,  be  inverted  in 
their  sets.        .^      ^        -   v- 

When  the  companyls  about  to  be  formed,  two 
or  three' men  will  be  detailed  to  accompany  th6 
chief  during  the  drill  or  skirmish. 

Whenever  the  men  are  dismounted,  at  the  com- 
mand *' mount,"  they  will  run  to  their  horses  with- 
out unnecessary  noise,  unlink  and  mount. 

When  the'  '*  rally''  is"  sounded,  the  skirmishers 
will  close  upon  the  indicated  point  at  the  gallojf, 
and  by'  the  quickest  means.     *•'  -^     • 

When  charging  in  line  wfth-  pistols  or  sabresj 
the  officers  must  ride  in  the  rank  j  the  captain  6n 
the  right  bf  the  ^fil:sV"pktdf(iri,Hh^  firSt  li^utebant 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  265 

on  the  left  of  it,  the  second  lieutenant  on  the  right 
of  the  second  platoon,  and  the  brevet  second  lieu- 
tenant on  its  left.  In  case  of  the  absence  of  any 
one  of  them,  his  place  must  not  be  supplied  by  the 
next  in  rank,  except  on  the  flank  of  the  company. 
All  the  commands  should  be  habitually  given 
with  the  trumpet;  and,  on  drill,  the  trumpeters 
should  always  accompany  the  chief.  It  is  very 
important  that,  in  this  drill,  the  men  should  learn 
perfectly  what  the  signals  mean. 


23 


A  GLOSSARY  OP  TERMS 

USED   IN 

CAVALRY    TACTICS. 


About. — About-face  is  a  change  of  front  on  the  heels  as 

pivots  over  an  arc  of  180°,  that  is  to  say  over  a  senii- 

,     circle ;   about-wheel   is  a    circular    movement  of   the 

line  on  one  flank  as  pivot,  so  that  the  uevr  front  is  the 

former  rear. 

Alignment. — The  act  of  straightening  or  forming  troops 
or  individuals  on  right  lines,  marked  by  fixed  points 
or  guides.     It  also  signifies  the  line  itself. 

Assembly. — A  trumpet  call.  The  collecting  and  uniting 
together  in  order  the  units  or  parts  of  military  corps. 

Akmy. — An  armed  body  of  men.  It  is  usually  applied  to 
large  collections  of  troops  comprising  several  arms 
of  service. 

Artillery. — All  the  offensive  weapons  of  war;  techni- 
cally, cannon  and  such  weapons  as  are  too  heavy  for 
the  use  of  single  men.  As  a  distinct  arm  of  service, 
it  embraces  only  those  corps  whose  appropriate  arms 
are  of  the  last  named  description.  Light  artillery 
♦  drawn  by  horses  should  be  organized  in  squadrons. 

Breech. — The  extremity  of  a  gun  nearest  the  vent  or 
cone. 

Breech-loader. — All  fire-arms  not  loaded  by  the  muzzle. 
These,  including  revolvers  and  repeating  arms,  are 
the  only  suitable  guns  for  horsemen. 


268  GLOSSARY. 

Brigade. — The  command  of  a  Brigadier-General ;  com- 
posed of  2  or  more  regiments ;  2  or  more  brigades 
form  a  division. 

Cavalrt, — Soldiers  vrho  serve  chiefly  on  horseback  ;  for- 
merly they  were  confined  to  the  mounted  service  ; 
and  those  who  were  armed  with  muskets,  serving 
often  on  foot,  were  called  dragoons.  In  our  service 
the  difference  is  merely  nominal. 

Carbine. — A  short  musket  much  used  by  cavalry.  The 
only  varieties  of  carbine  now  approved  by  expe- 
rienced commanders  are  such  as  load  at  the  breech, 
and  revolvers. 

Charge. — A  rapid  movement  either  at  the  gallop  or  trot- 
out,  by  which  actual  contact  with  the  enemy  is  ob- 
tained. 

Column. — Parallel  lines  of  troops,  generally  at  equal  dis- 
tances. In  signification,  it  is  opposite  to  line^'  also 
in  cavalry,  it  means  single  men  and  horses  arranged 
one  behind  another,  or  a  similar  arrangement  of 
twos,  fours,  sections,  platoons,  &c. 

Column  of  route. — Is  usually  a  column  of  files,  twos  or 
fours,  but  should  be  formed  of  platoons,  when  obsta- 
cles do  not  prevent. 

Column  with  distance. — Column  of  platoons  with  wheel- 
ing distance,  that  is,  distance  between  them  equal  to 
the  front  of  a  platoon. 

Close  Column. — Column  of  squadrons  with  12  yards  dis- 
tance. 

Countermarch  is  usually  understood  as  a  moveinent 
which  changes  the  direction  to  one  opposite :  its 
tactical  meaning  is,  a  flank  movement  by  files  which 
changes  the  front  to  the  former  rear. 

Commands  are  of  three  kinds:  1st.  That  of  caution* 
which  is  **  attentioji,"  the  last  syllable  being  strongly 
emphasized ;  2d.  The  preparatory  command,  which 
indicates  the  desired  movement;  3d.  That  of  execu- 
tion, such  as    ^^Marchf"    or   *'JIalt,^*    on  receiving 


GLOSSARY.  269 

■which  the  execation  of  the  commands  follows  in- 
stantly. In  the  manual  at  arms  and  in  the  foot  drill 
the  commands  especially  of  execution  should  be  dis- 
tinct, but  very  short ;  but  all  others  should  be  pro- 
longed considerably.  The  commands  are  numbered 
1,  2,  3,  &c.,  which  numbers  are  not  expressed  in  giv- 
ing the  commands. 

Company. — A  company  of  soldiers  usually  varying  from 
50  to  100.  This  is  the  regimental  unit  for  infantry, 
but  not  for  cavalry;  the  latter  should  therefore  be 
required  by  law  to  organize  in  squadrons. 

Croup. — The  buttocks  of  a  horse. 

Cuirassier. — A  horseman  wearing  defensive  armour. 

Distance  is  measured  perpendicular  to  the  proper  front, 
or  from  front  to  rear  ;  thus  the  distance  between  the 
front  and  rear  ranks  in  close  order  is  2  feet ;  that  be- 
tween squadrons  in  close  order  is  12  yards. 

Depth  is  the  extent  fjom  the  head  to  the  rear  of  a  column. 

Deployment. — The  movement  from  close  column  into  line. 

Defile. — A  narrow  pass  between  obstacles  compelling  a 
reduction  of  the  front  of  column  or  line. 

Division,  in  the  squadron,  is  composed  of  2  platoons  ;  a 
half-squadron :  iu  an  army  a  division  is  two  or  more 
brigades. 

Direct-march  is  a  forward  movement  perpendicular  to 
the  alignment. 

Diagonal-march  is  one  which  commences  with  a  wheel 
of  an  eighth  of  a  circle,  to  gain  a  certain  point  to 
the  right  or  left. 

Evolutions  of  a  regiment  are  the  movements  by  which 
a  regiment  passes  from  one  formation  to  another; 
evolutions  of  the  line  are  the  corresponding  move- 
ments of  two  or  more  regiments. 

Execution. — The  carrying  into  effect  any  order.  This 
must  be  done  with  promptness  on  the  reception  of  a 
command. 


270  GLOSSARY. 

File. — The  import  of  this  term  depends  on  the  number 
of  ranks;  in  infantry  forraatiotis  in  3  ranks  a  file 
■would  be  3  men;  in  cavalry  formations  in  2  ranks  a 
file  consists  of  2  men,  mounted  or  dismounted;  when 
there  is  but  one  rank  a  file  is  only  1  man;  in  gen- 
eral a  file  is  1  man  for  every  i-ank  in  the  formation  ; 
a T^/eo/ men  in  common  parlance  is  2  private  soldiers. 
In  file,  the  men  stand  one  behind  the  other. 

File-leader  is  the  front  man  of  the  file. 

FiLE-CLosERS  are  the  non-commissioned  officers,  posted 
1  yard  behind  the  rear  rank  ;  but  sometimes  com- 
missioned ofl&cers  thus  posted  act  as  file-closers. 

Front  is  the  direction  perpendicular  and  before  the  line 
or  column ;  the  reverse  of  rear. 

Flank. — The  right  or  left  side  of  a  column  or  line. 

FLANK-MARgii. — A  movement  to  the  right  or  left,  com- 
mencing by  a  wheel  over  a  quarter  circle. 

Formation, — The  mode  or  order  of  arranging  troops; 
also  the  act  of  placing  the  fractions  of  corps  in  line 
or  column. 

Forage. — Food  for  animals;  as  a  verb,  to  range  over  the 
country  in  quest  of  provisions  for  man  and  beast. 

Foragers, — Soldiers  detailed  to  impress  or  otherwise 
collect  food,  or  anything  else  for  public  service. 

Forager's  charge. — A  charge  in  open  and  extended 
order,  each  trooper  acting  separately  and  according 
to  circumstances. 

Field-officers. — Those  above  the  rank  of  captain  and 

not   being  of  the    staff;    but   field  officers    by  rank 

often  serve  on  the  staff. 
Guide. — The  trooper,  either  sergeant,  corporal  or  private, 

by  whose  march  that  of  the  others  on  his  right  or 

left  is  regulated. 

Guide  of  the  column  is  the  man  on  one  of  the  flanks  of 
the  front  rank  of  a  column,  who  is  charged  with  the 
direction  of  the  march. 


GLOSSARY.  271 

Guide  of  the  march  in  line. — The  sergeant,  file-closer 
of  one  of  the  wings,  who  in  the  march  in  line,  re- 
places the  particular  guide,  when  the  latter  places 
himself  in  the  line  of  officers,  to  ensure  the  directiou 
of  the  march  by  serving  as  an  intermediate  point. 

General  Guides  are  the  two  sergeants  who,  in  the  form- 
ation of  a  regiment,  mark  the  point  where  the  right 
and  left  flanks  are  to  rest;  they  are  selected  in  the 
first  and  last  squadrons,  and  are  under  the  orders  of 
the  Adjutant  and  Sergeant-Major,  for  the  tracing  of 
lines. 

Guides  Principal. — The  principal  guides  are  the  ser- 
geants who  serve  to  mark  the  intermediate  points  of 
fbrmation  in  line.  The  sergeants  file-closers  of  the 
1st  and  4th  platoons  are  the  principal  guides  of  their 
squadrons. 

Guides  particular  are  the  sergeants  who  place  them- 
selves on  the  line  of  formation  to  mark  the  front  of 
their  squadrons  as  they  arrive.  The  two  sergeants 
of  the  flanks,  who  are  not  counted  in  the  rank,  are 
the  particular  guides  of  their  squadrons.  In  marcli- 
ing,  the  position  of  the  guide  who  regulates  the 
movement  of  the  line  or  column  is  indicated  by  the 
commands  guide  left  or  guide  right;  as  a  general  rule 
the  guide  is  left  when  the  column  is  right  \n  front,  and 
vice- versa,  unless  especially  ordered  otherwise;  in 
the  oblique  march  the  guide  is  on  the  side  toward 
■which  the  oblique  is  made,  and  when  the  primitive 
direction  is  resumed,  the  guide  is  where  he  was  be- 
fore obliquing. 

In  columns  composed  of  cavalry  ah d  infantry,  the  cavalry 
guides  cover  the  2d  file  of  the  subdivisions  of  infantry, 
on  the  side  of  the  guides.  , 

In  line,  officers  in  front  of  squadrons  align  themselves  on 
the  rear  rank  of  infantry. 

Gallop. — The  speed  at  the  slowest  gallop  is  300  yards 
per  minute. 

Guidon. — A  small  pennon  or  flag  carried  on  the  le/l  of  the 
Ist  and  3d  platoons. 


272  GLOSSARY. 

Gatheb  H0B8E. — This  is  the  sign  by  "which  the  trooper 
prepares  his  horse  for  any  movement.  It  is  made 
by  raising  the  bridle  hand  and  drawing  it  slightly 
towards  the  body,  at  the  same  time  closing  the  legs  a 
little,  behind  the  girths. 

Haunches. — Tlife  hinder  portions  of  the  horse  in  advance 
of  the  buttocks  and  after  the  last  ribs. 

Interval. — The  lateral  space  between  squadrons,  or 
troops,  or  fractions  of  troops. 

Inverse, — Opposite  to  what  is  customary  and  natural. 

Inverse  order. — An  arrangement  reversing  the  ordi- 
nary and  natural  relative  positions  ;  when  the  subdi- 
visions of  a  corps  are  in  inverse  order,  their  right 
is  where  their  left  would  naturally  be. 

Inversion. — The  change  from  the  natural  to  the  inverse 
order. 

Infantry. — Foot  soldiers;  but  infantry  is  sometimes 
mounted  temporarily  for  rapid  movements. 

Light  Horse. — Cavalry  lightly  armed  and  equipped;  now 
synonymous  with  light  cavalry  or  light  dragoons. 

Line,  or  Line  of  Battle. — That  order  or  disposition  of 
troops,  in  which  all  the  companies,  squadrons,  &c., 
stand  in  the  same  row  or  line,  in  1,  2  or  3  ranks; 
the  line  being  either  curved  or  straight. 

Lance. — A  weapon  with  a  wooden  shaft  and  metalic 
head  and  point;  much  used  among  the  semi-civilized 
races ;  also  used,  to  some  extent,  by  European  cav- 
alry, but  little  used  by  ours.  The  length  varies  from 
8  to  11  feet,  10^  1[)eing  the  most  approved  length 
from  butt  to  point. 

Manceuvbes. — Tactical  changes  of  position  by  troops. 

Movement  is  nearly  allied  to  vianceiivre ;  equally  so  to 
march,  each  term  implying  change  of  position;  but 
a  manoeuvre  is  generally  considered  to  embrace  sev- 
eral movements  or  marches. 

March. — The  word  of  execution  at  which  the  required 
movement  is  instantly  commenced  ;  also  the  simul- 


GLOSSARY.  •        273 

taneous  or  successive  movement  of  troops  from  one 
point  to  another.  A  dijy''s  march,  without  unusual 
impediments,  is  from  15  to  17  miles;  longer -day's- 
journeys  are  called  forced  marches ;  these  are  used 
only  when  required  by  circumstances;  light  troops 
often  march  on  urgent  occasions  from  20  to  40  miles 
in  one  day,  and  small  bodies  of  cavalry  have,  in  re- 
treat or  pursuit,  accomplished  90  miles  in  less  than 
24  hours. 
Such  marches  are,  of  course,  destructive  to  man  and 
beast  and  must  not  be  allowed,  except  when  vitally 
essential  to  the  success  of  important  enterprises. 

Oblique. — A  direction  between  front  and  flank. 

Oblique  march. — A  march  gaining  ground  to  the  flank 
without  changing  front. 
In  the  individual  oblique  march,  each  man  executes  an 
oblique   movement;  making  a    quarter*turn   to  the 
right  or  left  as  ordered. 

Oblique  march  by  troop  is  executed  by  the  movement,  at 
the  same  time,  of  each  of  the  sub-divisions  of  a  troop 
in  line.  In  general  the  different  changes  of  front 
of  squadron  require  oblique  movement  by  the  half- 
wheeling  of  sub-divisions. 

Obstacle. — "Whatever  obstructs  the  march,  requiring  a 
temporary  reduction  of  the  extent  of  front. 

Organization. — Arrangement  and  distribution  of  the  di- 
visions, sub-divisions,  and  corps  of  every  sort,  under 
suitable  chiefs,  into  eff"ective  bodies. 

Pace. — In  cavalry,  one  yard ;  the  pace  or  step,  when  not 
mounted,  is  28  inches. 

Picket. — A  short  stake  to  which  the  trooper  attaches  the 
rein  or  rope  which  is  to  confine  his  horse  in  the  camp 
or   bivouac.     It  should  be  at  least  18  inches  long, , 
and  of  tough,  elastic  material.     The  animal  is  best 
confined  by  a  strap  around  the  pastern. 

Pivot. — The  man  or  flank  which  in  a  wheel  turns 
without  gaining  or  losing    ground,  and  in  a  turn 


274  GLOSSARY. 

mnrcbes  over  a  sb^rt  curved  path  or  arc  of  circle  ; 

in  2  ranks  the  front  rank  man  is  pivot. 
In  wheeling,  the  pivot  is  said  to  be  fixed,  because  it  turns 

on  its  own  centre  'without  advancing  or  receding. 
In  turning,  the  pivot  is  said  to  be  moveable,  because 

it  marches  on  an  arc  of  circle. 
The  TURN  is  sometimes  called  a  wheel  on  a  moveable 

pivot. 
Where  there  are  more  than  one  single  file,  the  arc  is 

increased    in    proportion    to    the    number   of  files 

abreast.     Single  files  turn  on  an   arc   3  yards  long. 

But  the  pivot  man  of  any  number  in  line,  from  2  to 

15  inclusive,  turn  on  an  arc  of  5  yards. 

The  curved  path  or  arc,  moved  over  by  a  pivot — 

Of  twos,  fours,  sections  of  8  files,  and  platoons  of  12, 

is  5  yards. 
Of  Divisions  of  24  files,  is  10  yards. 
Of  Squadrons  of  48  files,  is  20  yards. 
Of  Platoons  of  16  files,  is  G  yards. 
Of  Divisions  of  32  files,  is  12  yards. 
Of  Squadrons  of  64  files,  is  24  yards. 

The  abf)ve  is  the  length  of  the  pivot-arcs  in  the 
wheel,  or  rather  turn  over  a  quarter  of  a  circle  ;  the 
arc  will  be  shortened  or  lengthened  as  the  turn  is 
less  or  more  than  90  degrees. 

Pivot  FLANK  is  that  flank  around  which  is  executed  the 
wheel  into  line  in  natural  order. 

Platoon. — The  fourth  of  a  squadron,  or  the  half  of  a 
division;  it  is  composed  of  12  files  in  the  squadron 
of  48;  of  16  files  in  the  squadron  of  64:  when  it 
has  16  files,  it  is  sub-divided  into  sections  of  8  files. 

Ployment. — The  movement  from  regiments  in  line,  to 
close  column ;  it  is  the  reverse  of  deployment,  the 
latter  being  the  movement  from  column  into  line. 

Points. — Points  of  direction,  or  fixed  points,  serve  to  point 
out  the  direction  in  which  a  troop  in  line  or  column 
is  to  march ;  also  to  mark  the  right  and  left  of  lines. 


GLOSSARY.  275 

Intermediate  points  are  those  taken  between  the  fixed 
points,  to  preserve  the  exactness  of  direction  and 
Btraightness  of  the  lines. 

QuARTE  (pronounced  Carte,  f- — The  position  of  the  right 
hand,  holding  the  sabre  with  the  fingers  to  the  left, 
nails  upward  ;  opposite  to  tierce. 

Rank. — Relative  grade  or  degree  among  military  men; 
a  rank  of  soldiers  is  a  row  of  them  siiJe  by  side,  or 
abreast.  Cavalry  is  organized  in  1  or  in  2  ranks ; 
the  single  or  1  rafik  system  is  believed  by  experi- 
enced officers  to  suit  our  service  best. 

Rank  and  File. — The  order  of  the  common  soldier ;  in 
common  phrase,  it  is  applied  to  all  who  are  not 
commissioned  officers.  In  this  book  it  is  limited  to 
its  strict  signification,  viz  :  those  who  compose  the  ranks 
and  the  files,  therefore  excluding  all  who  are  not 
counted  into  fours. 

Regiment. — The  command  of  a<  colonel ;  3  to  5  squadrons 
are  understood  as  forming  a  regiment;  these  latter 
numbers  are  the  most  approved  for  cavalry  manoeu- 
vres and  3  are  preferable  to  6. 

Reverse  flank. — The  flank  opposite  to  the  pivot  and 
usually  opposite  to  the  guide. 

Rifle. — The  short  breech  loading^  rifle  is  the  best  arm 
for  our  mounted  service ;  in  battle  the  troopers 
should  be  dismounted  when  circumstances  permit, 
using  the  rifle  on  foot  jind  mounting  again  when 
necessary  to  pursue  or  retreat. 

Sabre. — The    cavalrj'    sabre    should    be    very    slightly 

curved,  as  light  as  consistent  with  strength,  and  the 

point  more  relied  on  than  the  edge. 
Schabraque    (  pronounced  Shab-rack,  )    is    the    saddle 

cover  ;  it  should  be  water-proof. 
Squad  is  usually  from  4  to  12  men  united  in  1  rank  for 

drill. 

Squadron. — 48  or  64  files  of  mounted  soldiers,  divided 
into  4  platoons,  2  platoons  making  1  division. 


276  GLOSSARY. 

Skirmishers. — Light  troops  thrown  forward  in  advance 
of  the  main  body  to  observe  the  movements  of  the 
enemy,  check  his  advance,  and  prevent  surprise. 

Strategy. — The  movements  and  operations  of  armed 
bodies  when  not  within  reach  of  projectiles. 

Staff. —  OflBcers  and  non-commissioned  officers  not  im- 
mediately connected  with  the  line ;  those  of  the 
quartermaster's  department ;  inspectors,  paymas- 
ters, adjutants,  &c.,  are  of  this  class  ;  there  is  a 
medical  staflF  also,  a  general  staflF,  brigade  staflF, 
and  a  regimental  staff. 

Tactics. — The  movements  of  armed  bodies  when  in 
reach  of  projectiles  or  weapons. 

Tampion. — A  cylindrical  piece  of  wood  or  other  mate- 
rial to  close  up  the  muzzle  of  a  gun. 

Tierce. — Opposite  to  quarte,  the  position  of  the  sword- 
band  when  the  finger-nails  are  downward  or  to  the 
right. 

Tboop. —  Any  number  of  armed  horsemen  ;  it  is  usually 
applied  to  a  company  or  division  of  2  platoons. 

Trooper. — An  armed  horseman. 

Trot. — The  cavalry  movement,  intermediate  between 
the  walk  and  the  gallop  ;  the  common  trot  is  about 
240  yards  per  minute,  the  trot  out  is  from  275  to 
300  yards  per  minute. 

Turn. — A  sort  of  whe?l  in  which  the  pivot  is  moveable, 
or  gains  ground. 

Unit. — A  sub-division  or  part  of  armed  bodies,  most  re- 
garded in  the  organization  of  those  bodies ;  thus, 
the  squadron  is  the  proper  unit  of  a  regiment. 

Vault. — To  mount  without  stirrups,  by  leaping  or 
springing  from  the  ground. 

"Wheel. — A  movement  to  the  right  or  left  in  which  one 
flank  turns  in  its  own  place ;  see  pivot  and  turn. 
The  definitions  of  wheel  and  turn  are  peculiar  to 
mounted  troops.  The  IKtter  touch  boot  exclusively 
to  the  pivot,  dress  by  both  flanks,  but  especially  by 
the  wheeling  or  marching  flank. 


INDEX. 


PART  I.— DRILL  OF  THE  TROOPER. 


PAGE. 

First  lessons,          .            .             .            .            .11 

To  conduct  the  horses  to  the  ground, 

12 

Position  before  mounting, 

12 

Prepare  to  mount, 

13 

To  mount, 

14 

Bridle  hand, 

14 

Length  of  stirrup, 

16 

Position  of  foot  in  stirrup, 

15 

Form  ranks, 

16 

Position  mounted. 

16 

Use  of  reins, 

18 

Use  of  legs. 

, 

19 

Effect  of  reina, 

19 

To  march. 

20 

To  halt, 

21 

To  turn, 

21 

To  turn  about, 

22 

Quarter  turn;  oblique, 

23 

Rein  back. 

24 

Dismount, 

25 

File  off, 

26 

Forward,  trot. 

27 

Trot  out,      . 

.28 

Slow  trot,  gallop. 

29 

Right  or  left  pass. 

30 

Movements  of  bridle  hand. 

31 

Halt;  turn;  turn-about,     . 

32 

.      24 

278 


INDEX. 


Quarter  turn  ;  rein  back  ;  the  spur, 

Preparation  for  sabre  exercise, 

Draw  sabre, 

Present;  carry;  return  sabre, 

Inspection  of  eabre. 

Raise  sabre, 

Open  and  close  files. 

Cut,  thrusts,  moulinet. 

Tierce,  quarte,  guard, 

Moulinet,     . 

Tierce  point;  quarte  point 

Left  point;  right  point, 

Rear  point;  against  infantry,  right  and  left  point 

Front  cut;  right  cut;  left  cut, 

Rear  cut;  right,  left  and  rear  in  quarte  and  tierce 

Parry,  . 

Against  infantry — parry, 

Manual  for  Colt's  revolver, 

To  loa  1  the  repeating  rifle. 

To  load  with  powder  and  ball, 

Manual  of  breech-loader, 

Self-priming  breech-loader. 

Inspection  of  revolver  pistol, 

Inspection  of  breech-loader. 


PAOI. 

33 
34 
35 
36 
37 
38 
39 
40 
41 
42 
43 
44 
45 
46 
47 
48 
49 
51-55 
57 
67 
68 
69 
60 
61 


PART  II.— PLATOON  DRILL. 


Platoons  in  2  ranks  ;  posts, 

Squadron  in  line  ;  posts. 

Column  of  twos  and  fours. 

Column  of  platoons. 

Column  of  Divisions, 

Form  platoon,  (company  or  squadron,) 

Rif;ht  dress  ;  count  by  fours, 

Alignment, 

By  file,  right  backwards  dress, 

By  twos,  right  or  left  dress, 

To  correct  the  alignment, 


62-64 

64-65 

66-67 

67-68 

69 

69 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 


INDEX. 


279 


To  open  and  close  ranks, 

To  rein  back, 

To  brtnk  by  files, 

To  march  in  column  by  files, 

To  change  direction, 

Halt;  forward  trot;  oblique, 

Platoon,  front  into  line. 

Left  into  line, 

On  right  into  line. 

Oft  left  into  line, 

By  twos  (or  fours,) 

Direct  inarch  by  twos  (or  fours,) 

Head  of  column  left  (or  right,) 

Left  turn, 

Left  (or  right)  oblique, 

Cohunn  of  twos  or  fours,  front  into  line. 

Column  of  twos  or  fours,  left  into  line. 

Column  of  twos  or  fours,  on  right  into  line, 

Left  into  single  rank. 

Right  into  2  ranks,  .  ^ 

To  form  twos  or  fours  at  same  gate, 

To  break  by  twos  or  file,  same  gait. 

By  file,  march, 

Form  twos — trot, 

Form  fours — trot, 

To  break  by  twos  and  cy  file,  doubling  gait, 

March  in  line. 


Open  files. 

Close  files. 

Open  and  close  files 

Countermarch, 

Front,  halt, 

"Wheelings, 

Fixed  pivot, 

In  circle  wheel. 


marching. 


PAQB. 

75-76 

7C-77 

77 

78 

78 

79 

80 

81 

82 

82 

83 

84 

84 

85 

88 

87 

88 

89 

90 

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

96 

97 

98 

99 

100 

101 

102 

103 

104 

105 

106 

107 

108 

109 

110 


280 


INDEX. 


Platoon  right  (or  left)  wheel, 

*'  "      about  wheel, 

**  ♦*      half  wheel, 

Moveable  pivot,       .  .  .  .       ■ 

Left  (or  right)  turn, 
Individual  oblique, 
Platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break  by  fours  or 

twos,  '     . 

Platoon  marching,  by  twos  or  fours,  form  platoon 
By  fours  (or  twos) — trot. 
Form  platoon — trot,  .  . 

Form  platoon — gallop,         ... 
By  fours,  left  (or  right)  wheel. 
By  fours,  left  (or  right)  about  wheel, 
♦Halt,  right  dress,  front, 
Forward,  guide  right  (or  left,) 
To  march  the  column  of  fours  to  the  rear, 
To  gain  ground,  right  or  left. 
Movements  by  fours. 


To  charge  by  platoon, 

The  charge. 

Rallying, 

Skirmishing, 

Prepare  to  fight  on  foot, 

Dragoons  on  foot, 

Bling  and  unsling  carbine. 

Leaping  the  ditch  and  bar. 


PAOB. 
Ill 
112 

112 
113 
114 
116 


116 
117 
118 
119 
120 
120 
121 
122 
122 
123 
123 
124 
125 
126 
127 
128 
129-134 
135 
136 
137 
138 
139 


PART  III.— THE  SQUADRON. 


The  squadron,  .  , 

Positions  in  line. 

Positions  in  column,  twos  or  fours. 
Directions,  .  . 

Count  by  fours. 


140 
141 
142 
143 
144 


INDEX. 


281 


Successive  alignment, 

To  open  and  close  ranks, 

To  break  the  squadron  by  fours,     . 

Column  of  fours,  front  into  line,     . 

"         "      left  " 

<<         "       on  right  into  line, 
Rapidity  of  gaits, 

To  form  in  one  rank  and  two  ranks, 
Column  with  distance. 
Changes  of  direction, 

((  «<  .  .      , 

Left  or  right  oblique, 
Change  of  gait, 

In  column  of  platoons,  to  break  by  fours. 
By  twos  ;  by  fours  ;  by  file. 
Column  by  file,  form  twos,  ,  . 

Column  by  twos,  form  fours, 
Column  by  fours,  form  platoons,     . 
By  fours — trot. 
Form  twos — trot. 

Form  fours — trot;  form  platoons — trot, 
Platoons  left-about  wheel. 
To  halt  the  column, 
Left  into  line  wheel, 
Column  with  distance,  left  in  front. 
Break  by  the  right  to  march  to  the  left, 
'Form  line  to  the  right  by  inversion. 
Break  by  the  right  to  the  rear  to  march  to  the  left. 
On  right  into  line. 
By  inversion  on  left  into  line. 
To  break  by  platoons, 
Front  into  line, 

Break  by  platoons  and  move  forward, 
Line  to  the  front  by  inversion, 
Platoons  right  wheel,  head  of  column  left, 
Line  faced  to  rear  on  rear  of  column. 
Right  about  wheel,  by  inversion  front  into  line. 
Platoons  right  wheel,  head  of  column  right, 


INDEX. 


Line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  head  of  column, 

Line  faced  to  rear,  by  inversion  on  head  of  column 

Movements  by  fours, 


Direct  march  in  line, 


Flank  files  forward ;  halt, 

Squadron  forward;  march, 

Squadron,  halt, 

Countermarch, 

"Wheelings, 

Fixed  pivot;  wheeling  in  circle. 

Right  or  left;  right  about,  or  left  about,  wheel. 

Moveable  pivot,  turning,     . 

Right  oblique. 

Platoons  right  half  (and  left  half)  wheel, 

By  fours  right  wheel. 

By  fours  left  wheel, 

By  fours  right  about  wheel, 

Platoons  left  wheel, 

Platoons  right  about, 

Break  by  platoons,  marching. 

Form  squadron, 

Break  by  platoons,  doubling  the  gait, 

Form  squadron — trot, 

Passing  obstacles, 

In  each  platoon  by  fours  or  twos — trot. 

Form  platoons, 

Charge — rallying — skirmishing. 

Charge,         .  .  . 

To  the  charge,  march. 

As  foragers,  .  . 

Rallying,      . 

Skirmishing, 

"Whole  squadron  as  skirmishers. 

Three  first  platoons  as  skirmishers. 

One  division  as  skirmishers, 

1st  or  4th  platoon  prepare  to  fight  on  foot, 


INDEX. 


283 


PAGE. 

1st  or  2d  division  prepare  to  fight  on  foot, 

219 

Column  by  divisions,           .... 

220 

Form  divisions,        ..... 

221 

Column  by  divisions,  by  platoons  march, 

222 

Form  divisions — trot, 

223 

By  platoons — trot,                .             .             .             « 

22ft 

Divisions,  break  by  right  to  march  to  left, 

225 

Squadron  of  64  files,           .            .            .            226-227 

PART  IV.     SINGLE  RANKS. 

Single  rank  formations. 

.      228 

Positions, 

229 

In  one  rank  form  squadron. 

.       230 

Count  by  fours;  prepare  to  mount, 

.       231 

By  files  to  the  right, 

.       231 

Side  of  the  guides. 

.  *    232 

Front,  halt,              ...» 

.       233 

DRILL  OF  MOUNTED  RIFLES,     235 
Aeticle  I. 


SECTION. 
1 

2 
3 
4 


Composition  of  company  and  posts,  etc., 
To  mount,        ...  .  . 

To  dismount  and  to  link,     . 
Form  and  course  of  inspection, 

Article  II. 

Skirmish  drill;  preliminary  remarks,  .  .  5 
To  take  open  order  and  return  to  close  order,  (in 

line,)  .....  6 
Open  order  in  line — to  break  into  fours,  twos,  and 

files,      ......  7 

In  column  of  file  to  form  twos,  open  order,            .  8 

In  column  of  file  to  form  fours,  open  order,           .  9 


284  INDEX. 

SECTION. 

In  column  of  twos,  open  order,  to  form  fours,  open 

order,  .  .  .  .  .10 

In  column  of  fours  to  form  twos,  open  or  close 

order,  .  .  .  .  .11 

In  column  of  twos  to  form  files,  open  or  close  order,       12 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers  from  line,  .  .        18 

Article  III. 

In  open  order  column  of  fours ;   action  front  and 

left,      .  .  .  .  .  .14 

In  open  order  column  of  fours ;  action  rear  and  left,  15 

In  open  order  column  of  fours  ;  action  right,         .  16 

In  open  order  column  of  fours;  action  left,            .  17 

In  open  order  column  of  twos  ;  action  front  and  left,  18 

In  open  order  column  of  twos  ;  action  rear  and  left,  10 

In  open  order  column  of  twos;  action  right,          .  20 

In  open  order  column  of  twos ;  action  left,            .  21 

Article  IV. 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers  when  dismounted,  .  22 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers  from  column  of  fours,  23 

After  deploying  as  skirmishers  to  commenpe  action,  24 

Column  of  fours  open  order  to  return  to  close  order,  25 

Column  of  twos  open  order  to  return  to  close  order,  26 

Column  of  file  to  form  fours  in  close  order,  .  27 

Article  V. 

Changes  of  the  Manual. 

To  sling  and  unsllng  rifles,  .  .  ,28 

Concluding  remarks,  .  .  .  .29 


/r-ofZe-f-y 

3M.  ^^  ^«'<=^- 


BUaZiE    SZaNAZ.S. 

No.  1.     The  General. 


Vivace 


"FF^FF^?=FF 


3 

[zrm — ^^r-| — r 


"n'-*""i!^^    ^'■'"Laz"! — ail — m — t 


;f^ff 


3 ^ 


iwi 


1^-^531334: 


B 


No.  2.     Boots  and  Saddles. 

ro 


No.  3.     To  Horse. 


I'resato 


r\  '00  o 00  ^^      ^ 

tr~i —  Z'^T^'^r^ — T trC** — ^~r^ 

♦7"       ^^  ^^LJ  ^^  " 


No.  4.     Assembly. 

Allegro  Aloclemto 


'n: 


h; 


-*-w- 


FFF^-FF 


EF 


3^ 


pgjEi^g_^-Fj 


No.  5.     To  Arms. 


Allegro 


rrrrrrr-r-t:^r~--r— rrr— :i~r 


^   ^ 


pg|^^gg:^fL 


No.  6.     To  the  Standard. 

■'^ — -U} — *"i \"^ — rrn^~i'r-r;»-r~»"f» — ^nn 


:c 


^i: 


2.10. 


EEi 


eIsPS 


:€:n: 


:*'^*-* — ^^r 


■Fh 


--pE 


3zio. 


:ii: 


-6~^-d2F=]: 


q~::::LDnjqq:r-iz]=~zz: 


;FjvF 


EPEa^ 


:i:rza 


0'0  0 


13 


1 — r~r"f — r  *^*t^ *ll 

"•  "i~S  t:j"_:r"^ —  — r~r~r~  rrH^i^rTr 


-1 — I' 


I      I 


p^i3:E'-^-^ 


— I" 

-m- 


i__] _j I. 


fZ 


qziTi 


:£ 


vj^Zir 


-F 


r^ — I r 


:q^ 


No.  7.     March. 


Allegro 


—3- -3-- 


> g. .3.        _ 

T~r~r~i — r  h^f  ~"  i tirjHHzrir^SSI?^' - 

3 

*-r-( — rrr-r*r*~r ""^     — zr_x~ 


No.  S.     The  Charge. 


Allegro 


No,  9.     Rally 

-3- 3- 


:«zc:ic 


■ca-, iiiMini—i *- JMJitMM)iMm| p 


All« 


No.  10.     Reveille. 


n — IS"  r *Tr*i — *~nsr  I     »       i 

#  rrs^    -_ #_   _# 


*tl:*:[zi*z*~ 


Ad.  libitum. 


^3- 


-7. 


ns?^^^^ 


1^-— =:2-T:--zz--t2=i 


Alloffro 


-l^V-TZ- 


IN'Inrein. 


;£E 


^^ 


iijzd:^ 


Trr\ f  "r~rrf  n —  rr 


C*^ 


«  0 


— ^"Tj-nl ^^»~rr""r~i — f~-  r — i — ^■^"r 

— n"~in^  «^«~i — I — LI — I    I — I — ^  tpi~] — \\~v: 


i:£ 


Allegro 


ii^E^§L^£^^^ 


i£—  flizrrritri^ZD 
fzJrE^EEEz:^. 


^T *^ 


i 

*  rr 


Id-! 


'^^^eS^^^ 


"I — rrr 


*~r *  r 

EEE— EEE: 


CZH. 


^zrrrrfnfzbc 


— I 
. I 


"ns: 


J~ tz 


"mTz:i!zz:[:~zziiziis[ 


— * — — *  ^-^ 


No.  11.     Stable  Call. 


Allegro 

-"TT ^^ — iH"H- 


,^ 0  «^P 


*"**** 


0  ^000 0 


I     ■  ■ 


0 

— J__ 


T).  C. 


-!« 


'I       r 


-^-^a 


Allejs^ro 


^ez=. 


No.  12.     Waterino;  Call. 


* — I — »~"l — * 


rzuz'i    *      *~x      ^z r~ 


AlloKl'O 


No.  13.     Breakfast. 


•  #  3  # 

— I — I — r\ — I — ^"  hi — rrrzzi — i — ti     p""t 
zZj^  - 1  i— ^ —  [  .— a. ^_Jjzr ± 

-    =      j^^      --  ^ 

No.  14.     Assembly  of  Guard. 


— P^  p       -a-  ^     ^^  I 

'Ji  I: [^r~r  i —    v\    rr\~^!r_ r~r~:r:l 


♦"♦TI *       rf*~(*  r^i~r b: 

rrcr_zi~-:r:rnr-.r~r:  rv\_s^.  _  riz: t_ 


|lE=i£L^ 


No.  15.     Orders. 

3 

#_#*# (• 


.    rr 
rzrr 


#  ###  « 


3 


rri — I — rrci"  •'"r^irzcrriri,  rmiri;^ 


No.  16.     Assembly  of  Buglers. 

3 

ILiy — m — Li — I'rr- 1 — trizirrrz-rzuM 
6^  o. — 'aTi — r  I — ^'^  ^  Ui      rrri_  nr  r 


^S^ 


3 
0  »iP9    49 


**'(H*'. 


No.  17.     Retreat. 

Allegro  modernto 


i 


^---FF^FF^l: 


T* 


fel:f^f 


As  a  Signal,  plaj'  to  llie  mark  =*. 

2do.  _-- 


|^gg:EdMfe^S 


I  ^-v   3zio. 


•-»> 

« 


"♦  I    ♦  r      I  mi'r  ♦  ri    r 


I    I — r~ 


VJ- 


■  r-^_r_^^ri:l  i — ^-^-\-  \ — i — i — h— li — -^   r 


10 


Al* 


ffiig^:^g^ig 


-R^ 


•^it±i — i — I — I — fi — ^ I'! — !   r '  I! — ! — r 
I    rr7i~i~i    ^ri       h    rrt  r^pi    iz:r 


"^&r 


"P 


^^feriliiJl? 


f*  ri    ♦  r*r^ 


I 


No.  IS.     Fatigue  Call. 


— --♦— ni — rri — i 
lo:    n  r-r i — ''•n — i 


Allegro 


I — rrr:  '^ 


■rj^ 


3 

0       000_      0 

T—rn — p- 
-i — rri — [~ 

1 PTI — 1 — 


wo»*'*W" 


'I — rn"^r~ 
^1 — rri — r- 


^  |-        I  r-  ^  p 


-^ 


11 

No.  19.     Dinner  Call. 


Allep;ro 


:-, — *- 


* •- 

IS'! 


;^ 


--«, 


vn^-i:- 


~-~==^- 


:js:i:~ 


iiif5rF^:-tziS:=irE=tEt 


i *- 


— * ^^ 

No.  20.     Distributions. 

Allegro 


ICIX- 


:S:=i^ 


e 


K^<^. 


"f^Bil3ff£S 


'Sim 


— *- 


-'^^'f^^ia*!^ 


No.  21.     Drill  Call. 


SSlssfi 


12 

No.  22.     Officers'  Call. 


Allegro. 


;/:tt      ^''-i"!    I — I — «"i — r~n — m-i — \ — I — ^h 

f^J^Fz  F2.rF  F  F^7^^  ft 


No.  23.     Common  Step. 

Tempo  cii  IMarcia, 

Imo.      0 .  Q 


:rs^ 


'p— r-ri: 


:::!- 


i/A  2flo. 


3zio. 


■q" 


;?^ 


'^?-f?fFFFrrh 


"rrrrj 


Li — ^n — I 


I    r 


0'^    0 


■F^ 


.E" 


I     r 


i=^E^;gg^:|^5|5 


13 

^-f — fTr i:~*^'i: 


r-hPff*f: 


^-=w 


:g: 


^'- 


_nrEE^^ 


ziii: 


^  1^  t^ 


'^^: 


-'^rjjjjdi^.bz'^i 


_l::ziiizzizr;pnrzrT:frr3zt 
-ri — I — r  ~r+ 


*F^ 


£if^:i+^' 


±1 


— I — LI — -J— r: 


o*_, 


i£ 


*^*"*"*" 


'I   M    I   I   r 


;Efi^QE^Q; 


■a:«a:M_i  ii  u  t 

-r-n^rr-r-rrrf~r 


-St 


:<:^',« 


:\~S^r 


WSf^3^=l 


qrtoj-itfJS= 


'•^•»i0 


■f:t 


:r'*w" 


14 


F^f^F^F 


I — f" 


^ — ri — rj — I -r 


No.  24.     Cease  Firing. 

/TV 


;y>E: 


1 


No.  25.     Officers  take  place. 

3 

3  0^0 


-3- — 


No,  26.     Sick  Call. 


;:sE^fe 


^:4~K"'    I      rn 


^' 


F" 


— , 3^ * — I 3^«-r 


Elfcl 


--?-»*- 


t3?±crc±| 


15 


No.  27,     Tattoo. 


^-  FT 


2do.  .^ 


j jTv  3zio. 


iWj ^-# — ^-# — ,  ?zrr|_:ri:f  i: 

1-*     r    ^n   izi        r  I    * r 


p«i — p 


^-— — 

1 ■ 

-w- 


,3:5,ifE^E^S;i 


-nz:ri-fi:qzl 


n — I  u      I        I 


^E^= 


_^ 


16 
FOll  THE  SERVICE  OF  SKIRMISHERS. 

No.  1,     Forward. 


ijr  —^ m''M    m  i — m' 

-0 f  I    [—    I    I    r 


^S 


«    rr 


No.  2.     Halt. 

o 


-C__L 


^ 


-6iv- 


No.  3.     To  the  Left. 


-4--R 


1 


No.  4.     To  the  Right. 

Alley-ro 


4 


1       I       I 


1^^ 


No.  5.     About. 


c\     r  I   I    I    *  f^  ♦    ♦ 

"!g-  ~nrn~r-i"~r~p:  r: 


^eeIeI 


rr^ 


Pres 


^^,      No,  6.     Rally  on  Chief. 


&Ji 


-^ 


3 


;S3: 


^1 


17 


^-3- 1 


1^ 


m 


-00 
— * 


0-0-0 


No.  7.     Trot. 


Moderato 


:G'n7 jTrTrf rf  fT  i7  ft  I  v^\ 


Allegrro 


No.  8.     Gallop, 


Allejcro 


No.  9.     Commence  Firing. 


IS 


iii*3Lim*: 


5*~$ 


3E5S 


:^tS=:E7tzzLtJtryd 


No.  10.     Disperse. 

Presto  3 


pi 


^s 


«; n?- 


Ie^^^^W: 


S L_ 


■aiaMiaiaitrza:  ' 


: ^m— -[—""ri    \^ ■ 


3 


S 


18 
Quick  March. 


Allegretto 

Imo. 


=:£.[=-ti[iisi 


_3zio. 

5s; 


iifis 


*»i      I — ^^    r~i — ST 


:z:]_^_z|_nsr    _ijv         X 


^zE^El 


I 1 


"n — ^si~iz.~m[ 


1 — * — £' 

I — I — 


w-  -m- 


— ~^ —  "J — I      iz:n_ 

#_ 


EEzEl 


:nzn"^"n: 


— 1^ 


19 


fe" 


-IL 


_^g f^. 


^-3" 


:sc=i— ^-'- 


:p^S 


I 


i=Jiq=g:q^ 


-j  — — — r         ^- r*~"*~i*~  "*x 


— i^^' — 


0^    «. 


I     \     r 
"I    I    r 


.jn... 


i£g 


i= 


"H" 


~1 ^' 


_i I — t.  _- 


,-f-* — 


-P-. 


6 


"^"=f- 


r I    ^    I — _ u — ,' 


fXJOOOOOOOOOOOOOOCXXXXXXXXXXXXiOOOOOCXDOO 

G  9 

G  & 

g  JOSEPH   FUNK  AND   SONS,  g 

g  SINGERS'  GZiEN,  g 

e  ROCKINGHAM  COUNTY.  VIRGINIA,  0 

I       MUSIC  PRINTERS.        | 
I I 

O00eXXiO00OO00(XXX3O00000O00000O0O0OCXXXt 


\ 


